Subaru 2018 Crosstrek 2.0i User Manual

(1,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Foreword

SFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s

Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in

excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control

system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this

manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its

operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such

as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the

SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the

nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in this

manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU

CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and

designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any

obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles

previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and

covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some

explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your

vehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next

owner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of SUBARU CORPORATION.

(2,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Vehicle types

SFWAB

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

Black plate (3,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

(3,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of

America, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in the United

States come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranties

. Federal Emission Control Systems

Warranties

. California Emissions Control Sys-

tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Maintenanc e

Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for Canada

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru

Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an

authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada

come with the following warranties:

. SUBARU Limited Warranty

. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic-

ability, details of coverage and exclusions,

is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A.

and Canada

All warranty information, including details

of coverage and exclusions, is in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’s

Manual

& Using your Owner’s Manual

Before you operate your vehicle, carefully

read this manual. To protect yourself and

extend the service life of your vehicle,

follow the instructions in this manual.

Failure to observe these instructions may

result in serious injury and damage to your

vehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteen

chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief

table of contents, so you can usually tell at

a glance if that chapter contains the

information you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-

bags

This chapter informs you how to use the

seat and seatbelt and contains precau-

tions for the SRS airbags.

Chapter 2: Keys and doors

This chapter informs you how to operate

the keys, locks and windows.

Chapter 3: Instruments and controls

This chapter informs you about the opera-

tion of instrument panel indicators and how

to use the instruments and other switches.

– CONTINUED –

(4,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Chapter 4: Climate control

This chapter informs you how to operate

the climate control.

Chapter 5: Audio

This chapter informs you about your audio

system.

Chapter 6: Interior equipment

This chapter informs you how to operate

interior equipment.

Chapter 7: Starting and operating

This chapter informs you how to start and

operate your SUBARU.

Chapter 8: Driving tips

This chapter informs you how to drive your

SUBARU in various conditions and ex-

plains some safety tips on driving.

Chapter 9: In case of emergency

This chapter informs you what to do if you

have a problem, such as a flat tire or

engine overheating.

Chapter 10: Appearance care

This chapter informs you how to keep your

SUBARU looking good.

Chapter 11: Maintenance and service

This chapter informs you when you need to

take your SUBARU to the dealer for

scheduled maintenance and informs you

how to keep your SUBARU running

properly.

Chapter 12: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimen-

sions and capacities of your SUBARU.

Chapter 13: Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

This chapter informs you about Uniform

tire quality grading standards and Report-

ing safety defects.

Chapter 14: Index

This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin

this manual. You can use it to quickly find

something you want to read.

For models with EyeSight system:

For details about the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement

for the EyeSight system.

& Safety warnings

You will find a number of WARNINGs,

CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.

These safety warnings alert you to poten-

tial hazards that could result in injury to you

or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well

as all other portions of this manual care-

fully in order to gain a better understanding

of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which serious injury or death could

result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which injury or damage to your

vehicle, or both, could result if the

caution is ignored.

NOTE

A NOTE gives information or sugges-

tions how to make better use of your

vehicle.

(5,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through it

in this manual. This symbol means “Do

not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this

happen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation list

You may find several abbreviations in this

manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-

tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner

ALR/ELR

Automatic locking retractor/

Emergency locking retractor

ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA

Blind Spot Detection/Rear

Cross Traffic Alert

CVT

Continuously variable trans-

mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD

Electronic brake force distri-

bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning system

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

INT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH

Lower anchors and tethers for

children

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT

Methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl

MT Manual transmission

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Braking

RON Research octane number

SRF

Steering responsive fog lights

system

SRH

Steering Responsive Head-

light

SRS

Supplemental restraint sys-

tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS

Tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem

(6,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you may

see on your vehicle.

For warning and indicator lights, refer to

“Warning and indicator lights” F23.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-

fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuric

acid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety precautions when

driving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle must

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-

mental Restraint System) airbag

does not do away with the need to

fasten seatbelts. In combination

with the seatbelts, it offers the

best combined protection in case

of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” F1-12.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem airbag)” F1-37.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap or

in your arms while the vehicle is

moving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a

(7,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

collision, because the child will

be caught between the passen-

ger and objects inside the vehi-

cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, infants

and small children should always

be seated in the REAR seat in an

infant or child restraint system

which is appropriate for the

child’s age, height and weight. If

a child is too big for a chil d

restraint system, the child should

sit in the REAR seat and be

restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating

positions than in the front seating

positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Place children in the REAR seat

properly restrained at all times in

a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Beca use children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD

SEAT IN THE FRONT SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS IN-

JURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD

BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD

TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIR-

BAG.

. Always turn the child safety locks

to the “LOCK” position when

children sit in the rear seat.

Serious injury could result if a

child accidentally opens the door

and falls out. Refer to “Child

safety locks” F2-28.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

Failure to follow this procedure

could result in injury to a child

operating the power window. Re-

fer to “Windows” F2-28.

. Never leave unattended children,

adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injure

themselves or others through

inadvertent operation of the ve-

hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,

temperature in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, close

all windows and lock all doors.

For instructions and precautions, carefully

read the following sections.

. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-

belts” F1-12.

. For the child restraint system, refer to

“Child restraint systems” F 1-25.

. For the SRS airbag system, refer to

“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem airbag)” F1-37.

– CONTINUED –

(8,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a lengthy time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, dr ive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is very

dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-

stream delays your reaction time

and impairs your perception, judg-

ment and attentiveness. If you drive

after drinking – even if you drink just

a little – it will increase the risk of

being involved in a serious or fatal

accident, injuring or killing yourself,

your passengers and others. In

addition, if you are injured in the

accident, alcohol may increase the

severity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent

causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects

all people differently, you may have con-

sumed too much alcohol to drive safely

even if the level of alcohol in your blood is

below the legal limit. The safest thing you

can do is never drink and drive. However if

you have no choice but to drive, stop

drinking and sober up completely before

getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over the

counter and prescription) that can

delay your reaction time and impair

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness. If you drive after taking

them, it may increase your, your

passengers’ and other persons’ risk

of being involved in a serious or fatal

accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check with

your doctor or pharmacist or read the

literature that accompanies the medication

to determine if the drug you are taking can

impair your driving ability. Do not drive

after taking any medications that can make

you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability

to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you

have a medical condition that requires you

to take drugs, please consult with your

doctor.

(9,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Never drive if you are under the influence

of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your

own health and well-being, we urge you

not to take illegal drugs in the first place

and to seek treatment if you are addicted

to those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, your

reaction time will be delayed and

your perception, judgment and at-

tentiveness will be impaired. If you

drive when tired or sleepy, your,

your passengers’ and other per-

sons’ chances of being involved in

a serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but instead

find a safe place to rest if you are tired or

sleepy. On long trips, you should make

periodic rest stops to refresh yourself

before continuing on your journey. When

possible, you should share the driving with

others.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modified

other than with genuine SUBARU

parts and accessories. Other types

of modifications could affect its

performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage or

performance problems resulting

from modification may not be cov-

ered under warranties.

& Use of cell phones/texting

and driving

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or text

while driving; it may distract your

attention from driving and lead to an

accident. If you use a cell phone to

talk or text, first pull off the road and

park in a safe place. In some States/

Provinces, it may be lawful to talk on

a phone while driving, but only if the

phone is hands-free.

& Driving vehicles equipped

with navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distract

your attention from driving. Also, do

not operate the controls of the

navigation system while driving.

The loss of attention to driving could

lead to an accident. If you wish to

operate the controls of the naviga-

tion system, first take the vehicle off

the road a nd stop it in a safe

location.

& Driving with pets

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your

driving and distract your attention from

driving. In a collision or sudden stop,

unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown

around inside the vehicle and hurt you or

your passengers. Besides, the pets can be

hurt under these situations. It is also for

their own safety that pets should be

properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-

strain a pet with a special traveling harness

which can be secured to the rear seat with

a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be

secured to the rear seat by routing a

seatbelt th rough t he carrie r ’s handle.

– CONTINUED –

(10,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the

front passenger’s seat. For further infor-

mation, consult your veterinarian, local

animal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire pressures

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-

sure of each tire (including the spare) at

least once a month and before any long

journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard. For detailed information, refer

to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and destruction of

the tires. The resulting loss of vehi-

cle control could lead to an accident.

& Attaching accessories

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,

labels or stickers (other than

properly placed inspection stick-

ers) to the windshield. Such

items may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach an

accessory (such as an electronic

toll collection (ETC) device or

security pass) to the windshield,

consult your SUBARU dealer for

details on the proper location.

General information

& California proposition 65

warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-

tuents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids in vehicles and

certain components of product wear

contain or emit chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm.

& California Perchlorate Advi-

sory

Certain vehicle components such as air-

bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and

keyless entry transmitter batteries may

contain perchlorate material. Special

handling may apply for service or vehicle

end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

(11,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Noise from under the vehicle

NOTE

You may hear a noise from under the

vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours

after the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this

does not indicate a malfunction. This

noise is caused by the operation of the

fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-

tem and the operation is normal. The

noise will stop after approximately 15

minutes.

& Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

. How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

. Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

. Howfar(ifatall)thedriverwas

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the informa-

tion if they have access to the vehicle or

the EDR.

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(1,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Keys and doors

Instruments and controls

Climate control

Audio

Interior equipment

Starting and operating

Driving tips

In case of emergency

Appearance care

Maintenance and service

Specifications

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Index

(14,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood (page 11-5)

2) Front wipers (page 3-77)

3) Headlights (page 3-67)

4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-36)

5) Moonroof (page 2-32)

6) Roof rails (page 8-13)

7) Outside mirror (page 3-88)

8) Door locks (page 2-21)

9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)

10) Flat tires (page 9-5)

11) Snow tires (page 8-10)

12) Fog lights (page 3-74)

13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-13)

14) Towing hook (page 9-13)

(15,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Rear window defogger (page 3-89)

2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)

3) Child safety locks (page 2-28)

4) Tie-down hole (page 9-13)

5) Rear gate (page 2-31)

6) Towing hook (page 9-13)

7) Rear window wiper (page 3-79)

– CONTINUED –

(16,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-33)

2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)

3) Front seat (page 1-2)

4) Rear seat (page 1-2)

5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK

NOTE

For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU

STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-

ual supplement for SUBARU

STARLINK.

(17,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Power windows (page 2-28)

2) Door locks (page 2-21)

3) Outside mirror switch (page 3-88)

4) Glove box (page 6-5)

5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)

6) Shift lever (MT models) (page 7-21)/

Select lever (CVT models) (page 7-24)

7) Seat heater switches (page 1-10)

8) Cup holder (page 6-6)

9) X-mode switch (page 7-39)

10) Center console (page 6-6)

11) Parking brake lever (page 7-43)

– CONTINUED –

(18,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Instrument panel

1) Steering responsive fog lights OFF

switch (page 3-74)/Steering Responsive

Headlight off switch (page 3-72)

2) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-12)

3) Combination meter (page 3-8)

4) Type A multi-function display (black and

white) (page 3-42)/Type B multi-function

display (color LCD) (page 3-47)

5) Audio*

6) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)

7) Climate control (page 4-2)

8) Tilt/Telescopic steering (page 3-90)

9) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-52)

10) Fuse box (page 11-34)

11) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)

12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 7-37)

*: For details about how to use the audio

and navigation system (if equipped), refer

to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s

Manual.

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

(19,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Audio control switches*

2) INFO button for type A multi-function

display (black and white) (page 3-42)/

INFO button for type B multi-function

display (color LCD) (page 3-47)

3) Cruise control (page 7-48)

4) Shift paddle (page 7-26)

5) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 3-

91)

6) SRS airbag (page 1-37)

7) Horn (page 3-92)

8) Combination meter display (color LCD)

control switches (page 3-33)

9) Talk switch for voice command system*/

Hands-free phone switches*

*: For details ab out how to use the

switches, refer to the separate naviga-

tion/audio Owner’s Manual.

– CONTINUED –

(20,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches

1) Windshield wiper (page 3-76)

2) Mist (page 3-77)

3) Windshield washer (page 3-78)

4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-79)

5) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-78)

6) Windshield wiper and washer switches

(page 3-77)

7) Light control switch (page 3-66)

8) Fog light switch (page 3-74)

9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-67)

10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 3-68)

11) Turn signal lever (page 3-75)

(21,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. models (type A)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may

be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-8)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-30)

3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

4) Speedometer (page 3-8)

5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

– CONTINUED –

(22,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! U.S.-spec. models (type B)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may

be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-8)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-30)

3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 3-33)

4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

5) Speedometer (page 3-8)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

(23,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may

be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-8)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-30)

3) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

4) Speedometer (page 3-8)

5) ECO gauge (page 3-10)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

– CONTINUED –

(24,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B)

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may

be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 3-8)

2) Select lever/gear position indicator

(page 3-30)

3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 3-33)

4) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)

5) Speedometer (page 3-8)

6) Fuel gauge (page 3-10)

(25,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light 3-13

Front passenger’s

seatbelt warning light

3-13

SRS airbag system

warning light

3-15

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag ON indi-

cator

3-15

Front passenger’s

frontal airbag OFF in-

dicator

3-15

CHECK ENGINE

warning light/Malfunc-

tion indicator light

3-15

Coolant temperature

low indicator light/

Coolant temperature

high warning light

3-16

Charge warning light 3-17

Oil pressure warning

light

3-17

Engine oil level warn-

ing light

3-18

Mark Name Page

AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

3-18

ABS warning light 3-20

Brake system warning

light

3-21

Door open warning

light

3-22

AWD warning light

(CVT models)

3-22

Power steering warn-

ing light

3-23

Hill start assist warning

light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light

3-22

Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light/

Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation indi-

cator light

3-23

Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator

light

3-24

Turn signal indicator

lights

3-30

High beam indicator

light

3-30

Mark Name Page

High beam assist indi-

cator light (green) (if

equipped)

3-30

High Beam Assist

warning indicator (yel-

low) (if equipped)

3-30

Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (if equipped)

3-31

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning

light/Steering Respon-

sive Headlight OFF in-

dicator light (if

equipped)

3-31

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

3-31

Access key warning

indicator (if equipped)

3-25

Security indicator light 3-29

Headlight indicator

light (if equipped)

3-31

Cruise control indica-

tor light (if equipped)

3-31

Cruise control set indi-

cator light (if equipped)

3-31

– CONTINUED –

(26,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Mark Name Page

X-mode indicator (if

equipped)

3-32

Hill descent control in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-32

Low fuel warning light 3-22

Low tire pressure

warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)

3-18

Windshield washer

fluid warning light

3-18

Steering responsive

fog lights warning indi-

cator/Steering respon-

sive fog lights OFF

indicator (if equipped)

3-31

BSD/RCTA warning

indicator (if equipped)

3-32

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

3-32

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

3-32

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-32

Mark Name Page

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator (if

equipped)

3-32

(27,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact the

nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD)*, audio unit or navigation

unit*, the settings for some of these functions can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Combination meter display (color

LCD)” F3-33.

*: if equipped

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation

Monitoring start delay time (after

closure of doors)

0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Dome light, cargo area light, and

map lights illumination

ON/OFF OFF

Keyless Access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Door unlock selection function (dri-

ver’s door unlock)

Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only

Door unlock selection function (rear

gate unlock)

Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only

Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation

Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation

Defogger and deicer system for

models with the automatic climate

control system

Rear window defogger, outside mir-

ror defogger and windshield wiper

deicer

Operation for 15 minutes/

Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes

– CONTINUED –

(28,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Item Function Possible settings Default setting

Dome light/Map lights/Cargo area

light

Operation of dome light/map light/

cargo area light OFF delay timer

OFF/10 seconds/20 seconds/30

seconds

30 seconds

Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

Operation/Non-operation Operation

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the

auto on/off headlights

Low/Normal/High/Very high High

Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights Operation/Non-operation Operation

Welcome lighting function (if

equipped)

Welcome lighting function (when

approaching)

OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds

30 seconds

Welcome lighting function (when

exiting)

OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/90

seconds

30 seconds

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper

operation

Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation

Other models: Operation

One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane

changer

Operation/Non-operation Operation

Auto dimmer cancel (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the

auto dimmer cancel

OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

High beam assist function (if

equipped)

High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

(31,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Seats ........................................................................ 1-2

Safety tips ............................................................. 1-2

Front seats ............................................................ 1-5

Rear seats ............................................................. 1-6

Head restraints ...................................................... 1-8

Seat heater (if equipped) ...................................... 1-10

Safety precautions ................................................1-10

Operation.............................................................. 1-11

Seatbelts................................................................ 1-12

Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................1-12

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)......................1-14

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR)............................................1-14

Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................1-14

Fastening the seatbelt...........................................1-14

Seatbelt maintenance............................................1-20

Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... 1-21

Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner................ 1-21

Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt

pretensioners...................................................... 1-22

System monitors................................................... 1-24

System servicing ..................................................1-24

Precautions against vehicle modification...............1-24

Child restraint systems ........................................ 1-25

Safety tips for installing child restraint systems ....1-26

Where to place a child restraint system ................1-26

Choosing a child restraint system.........................1-28

Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR

seatbelt .............................................................1-28

Installing a booster seat ....................................... 1-32

Installation of child restraint systems by use of

lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................1-33

Top tether anchorages ..........................................1-36

SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ......... 1-37

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system .............................................................. 1-38

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system for accessories and any objects.............1-40

General precautions regarding SRS airbag

system and children ..........................................1-42

Components......................................................... 1-45

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system..............1-47

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag ............... 1-58

SRS airbag system monitors.................................1-66

SRS airbag system servicing ................................1-67

Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-68

How to contact the vehicle manufacturer

concerning modifications for persons with

disabilities that may affect the advanced airbag

system .............................................................. 1-69

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

(32,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Seats

& Safety tips

! Safety tips for seat

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-

ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-

trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, make

sure the hands and feet of rear

seat passengers and cargo are

clear of the adjusting mechan-

ism.

. After adjusting the seat, push it

slightly to make sure it is se-

curely locked. If the seat is not

securely locked, it may move or

the seatbelt may not operate

properly.

. Do not put objects under the front

seats. They may interfere with

front seat locking and cause an

accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk of sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times

in a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-2

(33,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

for the child’s a ge, height and

weight. Secure ALL types of child

restraint devices (including forward

facing child seat) in the REAR seats

at all times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning child restraint sys-

tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” F1-25.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-

ing under the seatbelt in the event of

a collision, always put the seatback

in the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do not

place objects such as cushions

between the passenger and the seat-

back. If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest their

feet between the front seatback and

seat cushion. Doing so may lead to

defective operation of the following

systems and could result in serious

injury.

. Occupant detection system

. SRS side airbag

. Seat heater (if equipped)

. Power seat (if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-3

(34,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits well

back and upright in the seat. Do not

put cushions or any other materials

between occupants and seatbacks

or seat cushions. If you do so, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

of the lap belt sliding up over the

abdomen will increase, and both can

result in serious internal injury or

death.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargo

higher than the top of the seatback

because it could tumble forward and

injure passengers in the event of a

sudden stop or accident.

! Safety tips for head restraint

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed because

they are designed to reduce the

risk of serious neck injury in the

event that the vehicle is struck

from the rear. Also, never install

the head restraints the opposite

way round. Doing so will prevent

the head restraints from function-

ing as intended. Therefore, when

you remove the head restraints,

you must reinstall all head re-

straints correctly to protect vehi-

cle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-

ver, should not operate a vehicle

or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the

head restraints are placed in their

proper positions in order to mini-

mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-4

(35,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Front seats

! Manual seat (if equipped)

! Forward and backward adjust-

ment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to

the desired position. Then release the

lever and try to move the seat back and

forth to make sure that it is securely locked

into place.

! Reclining the seatback

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the

seatback to the desired position. Then

release the lever and make sure the

seatback is securely locked into place.

The seatback placed in a reclined position

can spring back upward with force when

the lever is pulled. While operating the

lever to return the seatback, hold the

seatback lightly so that it may be raised

back gradually.

! Seat height adjustment (driver’s

seat)

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat

is lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat

rises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted by

moving the seat adjustment lever up and

down.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-5

(36,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Power seat (driver’s seat – if

equipped)

1) Seat position forward/backward con-

trol switch

To adjust the seat forward or backward,

move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-

justment of the seat, you cannot adjust

the seat cushion height.

2) Seat height control switch

To adjust the seat height, pull up or push

down the rear end of the control switch.

3) Seatback angle (reclining) control

switch

To adjust the angle of the seatback, move

the control switch.

& Rear seats

! Armrest (if equipped)

To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge

of the armrest.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengers

must never be allowed to sit on the

center armrest.

! Folding down the rear seatback

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat-

back, check that there are no

passengers or objects on the rear

seat. Not doing so creates a risk

of injury or property damage if

the seatback suddenly folds

down.

. Never allow passengers to ride

on the folded rear seatback or in

the cargo area. Doing so may

result in serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especially

long items properly to prevent

them from being thrown around

inside the vehicle and causing

serious injury during a sudden

stop, a sudden steering maneu-

ver or a rapid acceleration.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-6

(37,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock

release knob and then fold the seatback

down.

! Return the rear seatback

WARNING

When returning the seatback to its

original position, observe the fol-

lowing precaution.

Failure to observe the precaution

may damage the seatbelt, impairing

its effectiveness, and possibly re-

sult in a serious injury.

. When returning the seatback to

its original position, pull the

seatbelt out towards the vehicle

exterior so that it will not be

caught between the seatback

and the trim.

Lock release knob

1) Unlocked

2) Locked

A) Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its original

position, raise the seatback until it locks

into place and make sure that the unlock-

ing marker on the lock release knob is no

longer visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to its

original position, check that the

unlocking marker on the lock re-

lease knob is not visible. Also, shake

the seatback slightly to confirm that

it is securely fixed in place. If the

seatback is not securely fixed in

place, the seatback may suddenly

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-7

(38,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

fold down in the event of sudden

braking, or objects may move out

from the cargo area, which could

cause serious injury or death.

& Head restraints

WARNING

The front seat head restraints are

designed to be installed into the

front seats only. The rear seat head

restraints are designed to be in-

stalled into the rear seats only. Do

not attempt to install the front seat

head restraints into the rear seats, or

the rear seat head restraints into the

front seats.

NOTE

It is possible to adjust the angle of the

front seat head restraints only. When

installing the front seat head restraints,

make sure that the angle of the head

restraints can be adjusted.

! Front seats

Both the driver ’s seat and the front

passenger’s seat are equipped with head

restraints. Both head restraints are adjus-

table in the following ways.

! Height adjustment

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

Each head restraint should be adjusted so

that the center of the head restraint is

closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.

NOTE

When the head restraint cannot be

pulled out or installed due to insuffi-

cient clearance between the head re-

straint and the roof, tilt the seat and

then perform the installation and re-

moval tasks.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-8

(39,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Angle adjustment

The angle of the head restraint can be

adjusted in several steps. While maintain-

ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the

head restraint to a position where the back

of your head is as close to the head

restraint as possible.

To tilt:

Tilt the head restraint by hand to the

preferred position. A click will be audible

when the head restraint is locked.

To return:

Tilt the head restraint once as far forward

as it can go. The head restraint will

automatically return to the fully upright

position. Then, adjust the head restraint

again to the preferred angle.

! Rear seats

Both the rear window side seats and the

rear center seat are equipped with head

restraints.

! Rear windows side seating posi-

tion

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release button to lower the head

restraint.

After installing the head restraint, make

sure it is securely locked.

! Rear center seating position

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended to

be used at the retracted position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise the

head restraint to the extended posi-

tion.

1) Incorrect (retracted position)

2) Correct (extended position)

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seats

1-9

(40,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Head restraint

2) Release button

To raise:

Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:

Push the head restraint down while press-

ing the release button on the top of the

seatback.

To remove:

While pressing the release button, pull out

the head restraint.

To install:

Install the head restraint into the holes that

are located on the top of the seatback until

the head restraint locks. Press and hold

the release butt on to lower the head

restraint.

When the rear-center seating position is

occupied, raise the head restraint to the

extended position. When the rear center

seating position is not occupied, lower the

head restraint to improve rearward visibi-

lity.

Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater is equipped in the front

seats.

The seat heater operates when the ignition

switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”

position.

& Safety precautions

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin may

suffer slight burns even at low

temperatures if they use the seat

heater for a long period of time.

When using the heater, always be

sure to warn the persons con-

cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates against heat,

such as a blanket, cushion, or

similar items. This may cause the

seat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enough

or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn off the seat heater.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater

1-10

(41,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

NOTE

Use of the seat heater for a long period

of time while the engine is not running

can cause battery discharge.

& Operation

1) HI – Rapid heating

2) LO – Normal heating

3) Off

A) Left-hand side

B) Right-hand side

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or

“HI” position on the switch, as desired,

depending on the temperature.

Selecting the “HI” position will cause the

seat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the

opposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi-

nates when the seat heater is in operation.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater

1-11

(42,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle should

fasten their seatbelts BEFORE

the vehicle starts to move. Other-

wise, the possibility of serious

injury becomes greater in the

event of a sudden stop or acci-

dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in order

to provide full restraint. Loose

fitting belts are not as effective in

preventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-

port only one person. Never use a

single belt for two or more per-

sons – even children. Otherwise,

in an accident, serious injury or

death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assemblies

including retractors and attach-

ing hardware worn by occupants

of a vehicle that has been in a

serious accident. The entire as-

sembly should be replaced even

if damage is not obvious.

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury.

. Keep the lap belt as low as

possible on your hips. In a colli-

sion, this spreads the force of the

lap belt over stronger hip bones

instead of across the weaker

abdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-

straint when the occupant sits

well back and upright in the seat.

To reduce the risk o f sliding

under the seatbelt in a collision,

the front seatbacks should be

always used in the upright posi-

tion while the vehicle is running.

If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a

collision, the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen will

increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any other

materials between occupants

and seatbacks or seat cushions.

If you do so, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and of the lap

belt sliding up over the abdomen

will increase, and both can result

in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt under

the arm or behind the back. If an

accident occurs, this can increase

the risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt can

become very hot in a vehicle that has

been closed up in sunny weather;

they could burn an occupant. Do not

touch such hot parts until they cool.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module, which will

record the use of the seatbelt by the front

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-12

(43,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

passenger when any of the SRS frontal,

side and curtain airbags deploy.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suitable

for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint

systems” F1-25.

! Children

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with c onsiderable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater. For that reason, we

strongly recommend that ALL chil-

dren (including those in child seats

and those that have outgrown child

restraint devices) sit in the REAR

seat properly restrained at all times

in a child restraint device or in a

seatbelt, whichever is appropriate

for the child’s height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward faci ng

child seats) in the REAR seats at all

times.

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions. For instructions and precau-

tions concerning the child restraint

system, refer to “Child restraint

systems” F1-25.

If a child is too big for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear seat

and be restrained using the seatbelts.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions. Never allow a child to

stand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses

the face or neck, move the child closer to

the belt buckle to help provide a good

shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

securely place the lap belt as low as

possible on the hips and not on the child’s

waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt

cannot be properly positioned, a child

restraint system should be used. Never

place the shoulder belt under the child’s

arm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use the

seatbelts. They should consult their doctor

for specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips, not over the waist.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-13

(44,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR).

The emergency locking retractor allows

normal body movement but the retractor

locks automatically during a sudden stop,

impact or if you pull the belt very quickly

out of the retractor.

& Automatic Locking Retractor/

Emergency Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-

matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic

Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor normally functions as an Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/

ELR has an additional locking mode

“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode” intended to secure a child restraint

system. When the seatbelt is once drawn

out completely and is then retracted even

slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in

that position and the seatbelt cannot be

extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is

retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system on

the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,

the seatbelt must be changed over to the

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-

moved, make sure that the seatbelt re-

tracts fully and the retractor returned to the

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode.

For instructions on how to convert the

retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to

the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child

restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”

F1-28.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”

F3-13.

& Fastening the seatbelt

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position according to

the following procedure.

Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the

upright position. Move the seat as far from

the steering wheel as practical while still

maintaining full vehicle control.

Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-

back to the upright position. Move the seat

as far back as possible.

2. Sit well back in the seat.

3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-14

(45,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulder

belt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best suited for the

driver/front passenger. Always adjust the

anchor height so that the shoulder belt

passes over the middle of the shoulder

without touching the neck.

To raise:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

up.

To lower:

Pull the release knob and slide the anchor

down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure that

it is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, make

sure the shoulder portion of the

webbing does not pass over your

neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt

anchor to a lower position. Placing

the shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sudden

braking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to

avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-15

(46,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)

1. Sit well back in the seat.

2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the

belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the button on the buckle.

2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to

avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that the

belts are retracted properly to avoid

catching the belt webbing in the door.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-16

(47,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Rear center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate

2) Connector (tongue)

3) Connector (buckle)

4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-

bing twisted can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

When fastening the belt after it is

pulled out from the retractor, espe-

cially when inserting the connec-

tor’s tongue plate into the mating

buckle (on right-hand side), always

check that the webbing is no t

twisted.

WARNING

. Be sure to fasten both tongue

plates to the respective buckles.

If the seatbelt is used only as a

shoulder belt (with the connec-

tor’s tongue plate not fastened to

the connector’s buckle on the

right-hand side), it cannot prop-

erly restrain the wearer in posi-

tion in an accident, possibly

resulting in serious injury or

death.

. The head restraint is not intended

to be used at the lowest position.

Before sitting on the seat, raise

the head restraint to the extended

position. Otherwise, in an acci-

dent, serious injury or death

could result.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-17

(48,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1. Raise the head restraint to the ex-

tended position. Do not remove the head

restraint.

2. Remove the tongue plate from the belt

holder on the right side of the cargo area

and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it

through the belt guide as follows: First

insert one edge of the belt into the open

gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of

the belt in, so that the whole belt fits inside.

4. After confirming that the webbing is not

twisted, insert the connector ( tongue)

attached at the we bbing end into the

buckle on the right-hand side until a click

is heard.

. If the belt stops before reaching the

buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it

out more slowly.

. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let

the belt retract slightly after giving it a

strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-18

(49,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate

into the center seatbelt buckle marked

“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it

clicks.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.

7. Place the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips, not on your waist.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

1. Push the release button of the center

seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to

unfasten the seatbelt.

NOTE

When the seatback is folded down for

greater cargo area, it is necessary to

disconnect the connector.

2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard

pointed object into the slot in the connector

(buckle) on the right-hand side and push it

in. The connector (tongue) plate will then

disconnect from the buckle.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-19

(50,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.

You should hold the webbing end and

guide it back into the retractor while it is

rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)

into the belt holder.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to roll

up the seatbelt too quickly. Other-

wise, the metal tongue plates

may hit against the trim, resulting

in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up

sothatthetongueplatesare

neatly stored. A hanging tongue

plate can swing and hit against

the trim during driving, causing

damage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and

lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the

belts because this could seriously affect

their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and atta chments

including the webbing and all hardware

periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,

damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-

place the seatbelts even if only minor

damage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,

oils, chemicals and particularly

battery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-

tions or changes that will prevent

the seatbelt from operating prop-

erly.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts

1-20

(51,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Seatbelt pretensioners

The following seatbelts have a seatbelt

pretensioner.

. Driver’s seatbelt

. Front passenger’s seatbelt

The seatbelt pretensioners are designed

to be activated in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal and

side collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,

the occupants should sit in an

upright position with their seat-

belts properly fastened. Refer to

“Seatbelts” F1-12.

. Do not modify, remove or strike

the seatbelt retractor assemblies

equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners or surrounding area. This

could result in accidental activa-

tion of the seatbelt pretensioners

or could make the system inop-

erative, possibly resulting in ser-

ious injury. Seatbelt preten-

sioners have no user-serviceable

parts. For required servicing of

seatbelt retractors equipped with

seatbelt pretensioners, consult

your SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding seatbelt retrac-

tor assemblie s equipped w ith

seatbelt pretensioners or scrap-

ping the entire vehicle due to

collision damage or for other

reasons, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

NOTE

. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-

signed to activate in minor impacts or

in rear impacts.

. Pretensioners are designed to func-

tion on a one-time-only basis. In the

event that a pretensioner is activated,

both the driver’s and front passenger’s

seatbelt retractor assemblies should

be replaced only by an authorized

SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use only

genuine SUBARU parts.

. If a seatbelt that has a seatbelt

pretensioner does not retract or cannot

be pulled out due to a malfunction or

activation of the pretensioner, contact

your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged,

contact your SUBARU dealer as soon

as possible.

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with seatbelt preten-

sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the

contents in this section.

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

pretensioner

NOTE

This section is applicable to the follow-

ing components.

. Driver’s seatbelt

Front seatbelt pretensioner

The pretensioner sensor also serves as

follows.

. SRS frontal airbag sensor

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners

1-21

(52,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Side impact sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-

mined amount of force during frontal or

side collisions or rollover accidents, any

seatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner is

quickly drawn back in by the retractor to

take up the slack so that the belt more

effectively restrains the seat occupant.

The driver’s seatbelt pretensioner includes

a tension reducing device which limits the

peak forces exerted by the seatbelt on the

occupant in the event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt retractor remains

locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not

be pulled out and retracted and therefore

must be replaced.

! In cases of rollover accident, frontal

collisions or side collisions, the

following components will operate

simultaneously

For details, refer to “ In cases of rollover

accident, frontal collisions or side colli-

sions, the following components will oper-

ate simultaneously” F1-23.

& Seatbelt with shoulder belt

and lap belt pretensioners

NOTE

This section is applicable to the front

passenger’s side seatbelt.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder

belt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

On the f ront passenger ’sside,the

shoulder belt pretensioner is supplemen-

ted by a lap belt pretensioner, which is

located at the base of the center pillar. Like

the shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap belt

pretensioner instantaneously pulls in the

belt to eliminate slack if a certain level of

frontal collision force is detected. As a

result, the seatbelt restrains the front seat

occupant more effectively.

The front passenger’s seatbelt p reten-

sioner includes a tension reducing device

which limits the peak forces exerted by the

seatbelt on the occupant in the event of a

collision.

The adaptive force limiter will select a

reducing load to the suit body size of

occupant as detected by the occupant

detection sensor.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,

an operating noise will be heard and a

small amount of smoke will be released.

These occurrences are normal and not

harmful. This smoke does not indicate a

fire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been

activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-

mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt

cannot be pulled out and retracted and

therefore must be replaced.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners

1-22

(53,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! In cases of rollover accident, frontal collisions or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously

Driver’s side

seatbelt pre-

tensioner

Front passen-

ger’s side

shoulder belt

pretensioner

Front passen-

ger’s side lap

belt preten-

sioner

SRS frontal

airbag for dri-

ver

SRS frontal

airbag for front

passenger

SRS curtain

airbags

SRS side air-

bags

Rollover accidents ** –––

both sides

–

Frontal collisions

*****

––

Offset frontal

collisions

*****

both sides

–

Side collisions *

–––

impacted side

Rear impact –––––––

Minor impact ––––––

–

*: Activated

–: Not activated

*1: This does not operate if the occupant detection system deactivates airbag operation.

*2: When both the satellite safing sensor and any of the center pillar impact sensors/front door impact sensors sense an impact force.

*3: When both the satellite safing sensor and the driver’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.

However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the

seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.

*4: When both the satellite safing sensor and the front passenger’s side front door impact sensor sense an impact force.

However, when a center pillar impact sensor detects a signal faster than the front door impact sensor, or both sensors detect signals simultaneously, the

seatbelt pretensioner does not activate.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners

1-23

(54,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& System monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner

while the vehicle is being driven. The

seatbelt pretensioners share the control

module with the SRS airbag system.

Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a

seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag

system warning light will illuminate. For

details, ref er to “SRS airbag system

monitors” F1-66.

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-

tractor assembly or scrapping

the entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARU

dealer.

. Tampering with or disconnecting

the system’s wiring could result

in accidental activation of th e

seatbelt pretensioner and/or

SRS airbag or could make the

system inoperative, which may

result in serious injury. Do not

use electrical test equipment on

any circuit related to the seatbelt

pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-

tems. For required servicing of

the seatbelt pretensioner, con-

sult your nearest SUBARU deal-

er.

CAUTION

The sensors and SRS airbag control

modules are located in the following

locations.

. Front sub sensors: on both the

right and left side at the front of

the vehicle

. Front door impact sensors: on

both front doors

. Satellite safing sensor: under the

rear center seat

. SRS airbag control module (in-

cluding the impact sensors): un-

der the center of the instrument

panel

If you need service or repair in those

areas or near the front seatb elt

retractors, have the work performed

by your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

If the front or side part of the vehicle is

damaged in an accident to the extent

that the seatbelt pretensioner does not

operate, contact your SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts to your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er’s Manual.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelt pretensioners

1-24

(55,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Child restraint systems

Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint

system in the rear seat while riding in the

vehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraint

system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards, is compatible with

your vehicle and is appropriate for the

child’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or

the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt

(except those described in “Installation of

child restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).

Children cou ld be endan gered in an

accident if their child restraints are not

properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-

fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the front

seating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces

require that infants and small children be

restrained in an approved child restraint

system at all times while the vehicle is

moving.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on

his or her lap or in his or her arms

while the vehicle is moving. The

passenger cannot protect the child

from injury in a collision, because

the child will be caught between the

passenger and objects inside the

vehicle.

Additionally, holding a child in your

lap or arms in the front seat exposes

that child to another serious danger.

Since the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed and force, the

child could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re-

strained at all times. Never allow a

child to stand up, or to kneel on any

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-25

(56,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

seat. Unrestrained children will be

thrown forward during sudden stop

or in an accident and can be injured

seriously.

Additionally, children standing up or

kneeling on or in front of the front

seat are exposed another serious

danger. Since the SRS airbag de-

ploys with considerable speed and

force, the child could be injured or

even killed.

& Safety tips for installing child

restraint systems

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-

belts can become hot in a vehicle

that has been closed up in sunny

weather; they could burn a small

child. Check the child restraint

system before you place a child

in it.

. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.

Unsecured child restraint sys-

tems can be thrown around in-

side of the vehicle in a sudden

stop, turn or accident; they can

strike and injure vehicle occu-

pants as well as result in serious

injuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraint

system, follow the manufacturer’s

instructions supplied with it. After

installing the child restraint system,

check to ensure that it is held

securely in position. If it is not held

tight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may b e in-

creased.

& Where to place a child re-

straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-

dations on where to place a child restraint

system in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seat

You should not install a child restraint

system (including a booster seat) due to

the hazard to children posed by the

passenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seating

positions

Recommended positions for all types of

child restraint systems.

In these positions, the following equipment

is provided for installing a child restraint

system.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-26

(57,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Automatic Lockin g Retractor/Emer-

gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-

belts

. Lower anchorages (bars)

. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating position

The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper

anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro-

vided in this position.

Some types of child restraints might not be

able to be secured firmly due to projection

of the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should use

only a child restraint system that has a

bottom base that fits snugly against the

contours of the seat cushion and can be

securely retained using the seatbelt.

When you install a child restraint system in

the rear seat’s center seating position,

raise the center head restraint.

Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side

seating positions may be used for a seat in

thecenterseatingpositionifachild

restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions permit and specify using anchors as

far apart as those in this vehicle.

If a child restraint system is not correctly

fixed in place (for example, if a child

restraint system can be moved more than

1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you

should install the child restraint system in a

rear seat, window-side seating position.

WARNING

. Even with advanced airbags, chil-

dren can be seriously injured by

the airbag. Place children in the

rear seat properly restrained at

all times. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed and

force and can injure or even kill

children, especially if they are not

restrained or improperly re-

strained. Beca use children are

lighter and weaker than adults,

their risk of being injured from

deployment is greater.

For that reason, be sure to secure

ALL types of child restraint de-

vices (including forward facing

child seats) in the REAR seats at

all times. You should choose a

restraint device which is appro-

priate for the child’s age, height

and weight. According to acci-

dent statistics, children are safer

when properly restrained in the

rear seating positions than in the

front seating positions.

. Do not use lower anchorages

(bars) for a seat in the center

seating position unless a child

restraint system manufacturer’s

instructions permit and specify

using anchors spaced as far

apart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two or more lower

hooks onto the same anchorage

(bar).

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-27

(58,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS

EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S

SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A

FORWARD OR REARWARD FACING

CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT

PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO

RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH

TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE

SRS AIRBAG.

& Choosing a child restraint

system

Choose a child restraint system that is

appropriate for the child’s age and size

(weight and height) in order to provide the

child with proper protection. The child

restraint system should meet all applicable

requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards for the United States or

of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

for Canada. It can be identified by looking

for the label on the child restraint system or

the manufacturer’s statement of compli-

ance in the document attached to the

system.

Also it is important for you to make sure

that the child restraint system is compa-

tible with the vehicle in which it will be

used.

& Installing child restraint sys-

tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

CAUTION

When installing a child restraint

system in the rear center seating

position, set both seatbacks to the

original position. Otherwise, the

child restraint system cannot be

securely restrained, which may re-

sult in death or serious injuries in

the event of sudden stop, sudden

steering maneuver or an accident.

! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT.

DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY

OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-

CING THE CHILD’SHEADTOO

CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm

that it is securely locked into place.

– Check the red colored unlocking

marker which is attached to the bottom

of the lock release knob is invisible. For

details, refer to “Folding down the rear

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-28

(59,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

seatback” F1-6.

2. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

5. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

6. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is

recommended by the manufacturer’s in-

structions supplied with the child restraint

system, perform the following procedure.

(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to

the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode.

(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the

retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks

will be heard which indicate the retractor

functions as ALR.

7. Push and pull the child restraint system

forward and from side to side to check if it

is firmly secured. Sometimes a child

restraint can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion and

then tightening the seatbelt.

8. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR

mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion

of the belt to confirm that it cannot be

pulled out (ALR properly functioning).

9. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allo w the belt to retract

completely. The belt will retur n to the

ELR mode.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-29

(60,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Installing forward facing child re-

straint

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securely locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm

that it is securely locked into place.

– Check the red colored unlocking

marker which is attached to the bottom

of the lock release knob is invisible. For

details, refer to “Folding down the rear

seatback” F1-6.

2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint

where a child restraint system is intended

to be installed in the following way.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the window-side seating

position, remove the rear seat head

restraint. For details, refer to “Rear

seats” F1-9.

Store the head restraint in the cargo

area. Avoid placing the head restraint

in the passenger compartment to pre-

vent it from being thrown around in the

passenger compartment in a sudden

stop or a sharp turn.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the rear center seating

position, raise the rear seat head

restraint to the extended position. Do

not remove the head restraint. For

details, refer to “Rear seats” F1-9.

3. Place the child restraint system in the

rear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a child

restraint system on the rear center

seating position, if the child restraint

system does not fit snugly against

the contours of the rear center seat

cushion, install the child restraint

system on the window-side seating

position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to place a child restraint

system” F1-26.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the child restraint system follow-

ing the instructions provided by its manu-

facturer.

– When a child restraint system is

installed on the rear center seating

position, pass the rear center seatbelt

through the belt guide properly. For

details, refer to “Rear center seatbelt”

F1-17.

5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-30

(61,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.

7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the

retractor to change the retractor over from

the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to

the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into

the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,

clicks will be heard which indicate the

retractor functions as ALR.

8. Before having a child sit in the child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to check if it is firmly

secured. Sometimes a child restraint

system can be more firmly secured by

pushing it down into the seat cushion and

then tightening the seatbelt.

9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt

to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR

properly functioning).

10. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located behind the

rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to “To p

tether anchorages” F1-36.

11. To remove the child restraint system,

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-31

(62,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

press the release button on the seatbelt

buckle and allow the belt to retract

completely. The belt will return to the

ELR mode.

If you h ave installed a child restraint

system for the rear center seating posi-

tion, when you remove the child restraint

system, the seatbelt may not be restored

to the ELR mode even if the seatbelt is

retracted. In this case, lower the head

restraint to the retracted position to allow

the seatbelt to retract moreover. The

seatbelt will return to the ELR mode.

Remember that the head restraint is not

intended to be used at the lowest position

(retracted position). Therefore, when the

rear center seat is occupied (including

when a child restraint system is installed)

next time, be sure to raise the head

restraint to the extended position.

NOTE

When the child restraint system is no

longer in use, remove it and restore the

ELR function of the retractor. That

function is restored by allowing the

seatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

1. Place the booster seat in the rear

seating position and sit the child on it.

The child should sit well bac k on the

booster seat.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the booster seat and the child

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer.

3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click. Take care not to twist

the seatbelt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of child’s shoulder and

that the lap belt is positioned as low as

possible on the child’s hips.

4. To remove the booster seat, press the

release button on the seatbelt buckle and

allow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted or

reversed. In an accident, this can

increase the risk or severity of

injury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder belt

under the child’s arm or behind

the child’s back. If an accident

occurs, this can increase the risk

or severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly in

order to provide full restraint.

Loose fitting belts are not as

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-32

(63,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.

. Placethelapbeltaslowas

possible on the child’s hips. A

high-positioned lap belt will in-

crease the risk of sliding under

the lap belt and of the lap belt

sliding up over the abdomen, and

both can result in serious internal

injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. Placing the

shoulder belt over the neck may

result in neck injury during sud-

den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraint

systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)

! Lower and tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systems can

be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle

without use of the seatbelts. Such child

restraint systems are secured to the

designated anchorages provided on the

vehicle body. The lower and tether an-

chorages are sometimes referred to as the

LATCH system (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren).

Your vehicle is equipped with four lower

anchorages (bars) and three upper an-

chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-

modating such child restraint systems.

! Lower anchorages

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-33

(64,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The lower anchorages (bars) are used for

installing a child restraint system only on

the rear seat window-side seating posi-

tions. For each window-side seating posi-

tion, two lower anchorages are provided.

Each lower anchorage is located where

the seat cushion meets the seatback.

! Tether anchorages

The tether anchorages (upper an-

chorages) are provided at the locations

shown in the above illustration. For details,

refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-36.

! To install a child restraint system

using lower and tether an-

chorages

To install a child restraint system using

lower and tether anchorages, perform the

following procedure.

WARNING

Before installing a child rest raint

system, be sure to confirm that the

seatback is securel y locked into

place. Otherwise, in an accident,

serious injury or death could result.

1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm

that it is securely locked into place.

– Check the red colored unlocking

marker which is attached to the bottom

of the lock release knob is invisible. For

details, refer to “Folding down the rear

seatback” F1-6.

2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of

the rear seat seatbacks. These marks

indicate the positions of the lower an-

chorages (bars).

Remove the covers and locate the lower

anchorages (bars).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-34

(65,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.

For details, refer to “Rear seats” F1-9.

4. While following the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint system manu-

facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the

lower anchorages located at “

” marks on

the bottom of the rear seatback. When the

hooks are connected, make sure the

adjacent seatbelts are not caught.

5. [If your child restraint system is of a

flexible attachment type (which uses tether

belts to connect the child restraint system

properly to the lower anchorages)]

While pushing the child restraint into the

seat cushion, pull both left and right lower

tether belts up to secure the child restraint

system firmly by taking up the slack in the

belt.

6. Latch the top tether hook onto the

tether anchorage that is located behind the

rear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.

For additional instructions, refer to “To p

tether anchorages” F1-36.

7. Before seating a child in t he child

restraint system, try to move it back and

forth and right and left to verify that it is held

securely in position.

8. To remove the child restraint system,

follow the reverse procedures of installa-

tion.

If you have any question concerning this

type of child restraint system, ask your

SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-35

(66,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Top tether anchorages

Your vehicle is equipped with three top

tether anchorages so that a child restraint

system having a top tether can be installed

in the rear seat. When installing a child

restraint system using top tether, proceed

as follows, while observing the instructions

by the child restraint system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additional

stability by offering another connection

between a child restraint system and the

vehicle, we recommend that you use a top

tether whenever one is required or avail-

able.

! Anchorage location

1) For left seat

2) For center seat

3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed on

the back side of the rear seatback.

! To hook the top tether

CAUTION

. Exc ept for the center seating

position, r emove the head re-

straint when mounting a child

restraint system. Otherwise, it

might be possible that the top

tether cannot be fastened tightly.

. For the center seating position,

raise the center head restraint to

the extended position when

mounting a child restraint sys-

tem. Otherwise, it will be impos-

sible to use the seatbelt guide

that is attached to the head

restraint correctly.

The seatbelt guide is essential for

routing the belt webbing at the

center seating position. For in-

formation about using the seat-

belt guide, refer to “Rear center

seatbelt” F1-17.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems

1-36

(67,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1. Attach the top tether hook to the

appropriate upper anchorage.

For the center seating position, route

the top tether under the head restraint as

illustrated below.

1) Seatbelt guide

2) Seatbelt of the center seating position

3) Top tether

2. Tighten the top tether securely.

Please contact your SUBARU dealer if you

have any question regarding the installa-

tion of a child restraint system.

*SRS airbag (Supplemental

Restraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-

straint system. This name is used because

the airbag system supplements the vehi-

cle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-

mental restraint system in addition to a lap/

shoulder belt at each front seating position

and each rear window-side seating posi-

tions. The supplemental restraint system

(SRS) consists of seven airbags.

The configurations are as follows.

. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal

airbags

. Driver’s and front passenger’s side

airbags

. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-

senger, and window-side rear passen-

gers)

. Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed only

as a supplement to the primary protec-

tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbelt

pretensioners. For operation instructions

and precautions concerning the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-

sioners” F1-21.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-37

(68,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& General precautions regard-

ing SRS airbag system

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection in

the event of an accident, the

driver and all passengers must

always wear seatbelts when in

the vehicle. The SRS airbag is

designed only to be a supplement

to the primary protection pro-

vided by the seatbelt. It does not

eliminate the need to fasten seat-

belts. In combination with the

seatbelts, it offers the best com-

bined protection in case of a

serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increases

the chance of severe injury or

death in a crash even when the

vehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the seatbelt system,

refer to “Seatbelts” F1-12.

. The SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are designed only

to be a supplement to the primary

protection provided by the seat-

belt. They do not eliminate the

need to fasten seatbelts. It is also

important to wear your seatbelt to

help avoid injuries that can result

when an occupant is not seated

in a proper upright position.

WARNING

. The SRS airbags deploy with

considerable speed and force.

Occupants who are out of proper

position when the SRS airbag

deploys could suffer very serious

injuries. Because the SRS airbag

needs enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should always sit

upright and well back in the seat

as far from the steering wheel as

practical while still maintaining

full vehicle control and the front

passenger should move the seat

as far back as possible and sit

upright and well back in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. The

SRS side airbags are stored in

both front seat seatbacks next to

the door, and they provide pro-

tection by deploying rapidly (fas-

ter than the blink of an eye) in the

event of a side impact or frontal

collision. However, the force of

SRS side airbag deployment may

cause injuries if your head or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-38

(69,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean unnecessarily close to

the front or rear door on either

side. Also, do not put your head,

arms or hands out of the window.

The SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the cabin are stored in

the roof side (between the front

pillar and a point behind the rear

quarter glass), and they provide

protection by deploying rapidly

(faster than the blink of an eye) in

the event of a side impact, roll-

over or an offset frontal collision.

However, the force of its deploy-

ment may cause injuries if your

head is too close to it.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the SRS airbag. Because

the SRS airbag deploys with

considerable speed – faster than

the blink of an eye – and force to

protect in high speed collisions,

the force of an airbag can injure

an occupant whose body is too

close to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries

that can result when the SRS

airbag contacts an occupant not

in proper position such as one

thrown forward during pre-acci-

dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,

there remains a possibility that

an occupant may suffer minor

injury such as abrasions and

bruises to the face or arms be-

cause of the SRS airbag deploy-

ment force.

WARNING

. Do not rest your arm on either

front door or its internal trim. You

could be injured in the event of

SRS side airbag deployment.

. Do not place any objects over or

near the SRS airbag cover or

between you and the SRS airbag.

If the SRS airbag deploys, these

objects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,

some smoke will be released.

This smoke could cause breath-

ing problems for people with a

history of asthma or other breath-

ing trouble. If you or your pas-

sengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,

get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releases

hot gas. Occupants could get

burned if they come into direct

contact with the hot gas.

NOTE

. When you sell your vehicle, we urge

you to inform the buyer that the vehicle

is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,

notify the buyer of the applicable sec-

tion in this Owner’s Manual.

. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel

supply will be cut off to reduce the risk

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-39

(70,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

of fire caused by leaking fuel. For

details about restarting of the engine,

refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an

accident” F9-20.

& General precautions regard-

ing SRS airbag system for

accessories and any objects

WARNING

. Do not put any objects (including

straps or cords) over the steering

wheel pad, column cover, or

dashboard.

– These objects could be en-

tangled with the steering

wheel, preventing the SRS

frontal airbag, etc. from oper-

ating properly.

– If the SRS frontal airbag de-

ploys, these objects could be

propelled inside the vehicle,

causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under the

driver’s side of the instrument

panel. If the SRS knee airbag

deploys, those objects could in-

terfere with its proper operation

and could be propelled inside the

vehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached to

heavy, sharp or hard acces-

sories, or another key. If the SRS

knee airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could interfere with its

proper operation and could be

propelled inside the vehicle and

cause injury.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to the

windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-

ror over the inside rear view mirror. If

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-40

(71,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-

jects could become projectiles that

could seriously injure vehicle occu-

pants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to the

door trim or near either SRS side

airbags and do not place objects

near the SRS side airbags. In the

event of SRS side airbag deploy-

ment, they could be propelled

dangerously toward the vehicle’s

occupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-

phone or any other accessory to

a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear

pillar, the windshield, a side win-

dow, an assist grip, or any other

cabin surface that would be near

a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A

hands-free microphone or other

accessory in such a location

could be propelled through the

cabin with great force by the

curtain airbag, or it could prevent

correct deployment of the curtain

airbag. In either case, the result

could be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other

hard or pointed objects on the coat

hooks. If such items were hanging

on the coat hooks during deploy-

ment of the SRS curtain airbags,

they could cause serious injuries by

coming off the coat hooks and being

thrown through the cabin or by

preventing deployment of the cur-

tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coat

hooks, make sure there are no sharp

objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-

ing directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes or

other objects over either front

seatback and do not attach labels

or stickers to the front seat sur-

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-41

(72,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

face on or near the SRS side

airbag. They could prevent prop-

er deployment of the SRS side

airbag, reducing protection avail-

able to the front seat’s occupant.

. Do not install a seat cover unless

it is a genuine SUBARU seat

cover exclusively designed for

use with the SRS airbag. Even

when using a genuine SUBARU

seat cover, the SRS side airbag

system may not function nor-

mally if the seat cover is not

installed correctly.

& General precautions regard-

ing SRS airbag system and

children

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-

erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerable

speed and force and can injure or

even kill children, especially if they

are not restrained or improperly

restrained. Because children are

lighter and weaker than adults, their

risk of being injured from deploy-

ment is greater.

For that reason, we strongly recom-

mend that ALL children (including

those in child seats and those that

have outgrown child restraint de-

vices) sit in the REAR seat properly

restra ined at all times in a child

restraint device or in a seatbelt,

whichever is appropriate for t he

child’s age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint

devices (including forward faci ng

child seats) in the REAR seats at all

times.

According to accident statistics,

children a re safer whe n properly

restrained in the rear seating posi-

tions than in the front seating posi-

tions.

For instructions and precautions

concerning the child restraint sys-

tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tems” F1-25.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-42

(73,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS

SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE

CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up or

kneel on the front passenger’s seat.

The SRS airbag deploys with con-

siderable force and can injure or

even kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or in

your arms. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable force and can

injure or even kill the child.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-43

(74,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

. Never allow a child to do the

following.

– Kneel on any passenger’s seat

facing the side window

– Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback

– Put his/her head, arms o r

other parts of the body out of

the window

In the event of an accident, the

force of SRS side airbag and/or

SRS curtain airbag deployment

could injure the child seriously

because his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body are too

close to the SRS side airbag and/

or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is also

equipped with a front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children

should be placed in the rear seat

anyway and should be properly

restrained at all times.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-44

(75,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Components

1) Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

2) Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

3) SRS side airbag

4) SRS curtain airbag

5) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in the

following locations.

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center

portion of the steering wheel

A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the

pad of the airbag.

Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:

near the top of the dashboard under the

“SRS AIRBAG” mark

SRS side airbag: in the door side of each

front seat seatback which bears an “SRS

AIRBAG” label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side

(between the front pillar and a point behind

the rear quarter glass)

“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the

top of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under th e steering

column

A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the

door of the airbag.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-45

(76,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Airbag control module (including impact

sensor and rollover sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)

3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)

7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)

8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)

10) Airbag wiring

11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passenger’s side)

13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)

14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)

15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)

16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)

17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)

18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor

20) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator

22) SRS airbag system warning light

23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)

25) Front door impact sensor (right-han d

side)

26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-46

(77,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& SUBARU advanced frontal

airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system that com-

plies with the new advanced frontal airbag

requirements in the amended Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)

No. 208.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system automatically determines the de-

ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag at the time of deployment as well as

whether or not to activate the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if

activated, the deployment force of the SRS

frontal airbag at the time of deployment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on the

driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors

beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-

tached to the glove box lid beginning with

the phrase “Even with Advanced Air

Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read

the instructions on the warning labels and

tag.

Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU

advanced frontal airbag system is a

supplemental restraint system and must

be used in combination with a seatbelt. All

occupants should wear a seatbelt or be

seated in an appropriate child restraint

system.

For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer

to “Components” F1-45.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,

the following components deploy.

. SRS frontal airbag for driver

. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

. SRS knee airbag for driver

. SRS curtain airbag*

*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-

belts by reducing the impact to the

occupant’s head, chest and knees.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual

stage inflator. The inflator op erates in

different ways depending on the severity

of impact.

SRS airbag system warning light

Have the system inspected by your

SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS

airbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTE

The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not controlled by the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-

tem.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-47

(78,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator

operates in different ways depending on

the severity of impact.

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors

are installed between the seat and seat

rails, and monitor the physique and pos-

ture of the front passenger. Using this

information, the occupant detection sys-

tem determines whether the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-

ployed or not.

The occupant detection system may not

inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In this

case, although the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag does not operate, the front

passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-

ates with the driver’s seatbelt prete n-

sioner. For details about the seatbelt

pretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-

sioners” F1-21.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system from functioning correctly

or cause the system to fail.

. Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passenger’s seat such

as by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers rest

their feet between the front seat-

back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the front

passenger ’s seat. If liquid is

spilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemble

the front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory

(such as an audio amplifier) other

than a genuine SUBARU acces-

sory under the front passenger’s

seat.

. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the front

passenger’s seat.

. Do not place any objects (books,

etc.) around the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. Do not use the front passenger’s

seat with the head restraint re-

moved.

. Do not leave any articles on the

front passenger ’s seat or the

seatbelt tongue and buckle en-

gaged when you leave your vehi-

cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on the

seat or pierce the seat uphols-

tery.

. Do not place a magnet near the

seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt

retractor.

. Do not use front seats with their

forwa rd-backward position and

seatback not being locked into

place securely. If any of them are

not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure,

refer to “Forward and backward

adjustment” F1-5 and “Reclining

the seatback” F1-5.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-48

(79,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

SRS airbag system warning light

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front

passenger’s occupant detection system

have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light will illuminate. Have the system

inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-

diately if the SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.

If your vehicle has sustained impact, this

may affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.

Have your vehicl e inspected a t your

SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front

passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle

to your SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

The front passenger’s SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are not con-

trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-

tal airbag system.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicators

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON and OFF indicators” F3-15.

! Occupant detection system

1) Occupant detection sensors

The occupant detection system sensors

are installed between the seat and seat

rails, and monitor the physique and pos-

ture of the front passenger. Using this

information, the occupant detection sys-

tem determines whether the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-

ployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seat

or subject it to severe impact. Other-

wise, the SRS airbag system warn-

ing light may illuminate to indicate a

malfunction of the front passenger

occupant detection system. In this

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-49

(80,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

case, contact your SUBARU dealer

immediately.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cell

phones, laptops, portable music

players, or electronic games, espe-

cially when connected to the acces-

sory power outlet and placed on the

front passenger ’s seat or used by

the person sitting in the front pas-

senger’s seat, may affect the opera-

tion of the occupant detection sys-

tem. If either of the following situa-

tions occurs when using an electro-

nic device in the vehicle, at first try

to relocate that device to avoid it

creating any interference.

. The SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.

. The front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators oper-

ate erratically.

If the device continues to caus e

interference, the use of that device

in the vehicle should be discontin-

ued.

SRS airbag system warning light

If the front passenger’s seat cushion is

wet, this may adversely affect the ability of

the system to determine deployment.

Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seat

dry naturally and then check the SRS

airbag system warning light.

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators do not work properly

even when the front passenger’s seat is

dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front

passenger’s seat and have the occupant

detection system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-50

(81,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are

placed on the front passenger’s seat, this

may adversely affect the ability of the

system to determine deployment. This

may prevent the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-

ing properly. Check that the indicators

work properly.

When the OFF indicator turns off and the

ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-

ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a

collision. Remove luggage and electronic

devices from the front passenger’s seat.

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not

activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will not be activated when any of the

following conditions are met regarding

the front passenger’s seat:

. The seat is empty.

. The seat is equipped with an appro-

priate child restraint system and an infant

or a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-

ING that follows.)

. The front passenger’s occupant detec-

tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A FORWARD OR

REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN

THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT

EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGER’S

SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG IS DEACTI-

VATED. Be sure to install it in the

REAR seat in a correct manner. Also,

it is strongly recommended that any

forward facing child seat or booster

seat be installed in the REAR seat,

and that even children who have

outgrown a child restraint system be

also seated in the REAR seat. This is

because children sitting in the front

passenger’s seat may be killed or

severely injured should the front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

ploy. REAR s eats are the safest

place for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an infant in an appro-

priate child restraint system, ob-

serve the following precautions.

Failure to do so may interfere with

the proper operation of the occupant

detection system, activating the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

even though that seat is occupied by

the infant in the child restraint

system.

. Do not place any article (includ-

ing electronic devices) on the

seat other than the infant in the

child restraint system.

. Do not place more than one infant

in the child restraint system.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-51

(82,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! If the front passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator illuminates

and the OFF indicator turns off

even when an infant or a small

child is in a child restraint sys-

tem (including booster seat)

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Remove the child restraint system from

the seat.

3. By referring to the child restraint

manufacturer’s recommendations as well

as the child restraint system installation

procedures in “Child restraint systems”

F1-25, correctly install the child restraint

system.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and make su re that the front

passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator

turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If still the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off, take the

following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than the child restraint system

and the child occupant.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off after

taking releva nt correct ive action s de-

scribed above, relocate the child restraint

system to the rear seat and immediately

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

NOTE

When a child who has outgrown a child

restraint system or a small adult is

seated in the front passenger’s seat,

the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system may or may not activate the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

depending on the occupant’s seating

posture. Children should always wear a

seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-

spective of whether the airbag is deac-

tivated or activated. If the front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

(the ON indicator remains illuminated

while the OFF indicator turns off), take

the following action.

. Ensure that no article is placed on

the seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the OFF indicator turns off

despite the fact that the actions noted

above have been taken, seat the child/

small adult in the rear seat and imme-

diately contact your SUBARU dealer for

an inspection. Even if the system has

passed the dealer inspection, it is

recommended that on subsequent trips

the child/small adult always take the

rear seat.

Children who have outgrown a child

restraint system should always wear the

seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag

is deactivated or activated.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-52

(83,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Conditions in which front passen-

ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

will b e activated for deployment upon

impact when any of the following condi-

tions are met regarding the front passen-

ger’s seat.

. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)

are placed on the seat.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator illuminates and the

ON indicator turns off even when

the front passenger’s seat is

occupied by an adult

ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

This can be caused by the adult incorrectly

sitting in the front passenger’s seat.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Ask the front passenger to set the

seatback to the upright position, sit up

straight in the center of the seat cushion,

correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/

her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to

the rearmost position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminated

while the ON indicator remains off, take the

following actions.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Make sure that the front passenger

does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat

cover, seat heater or massager, etc.

3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,

the front passenger should remove any

unnecessary items before sitting in the

front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a

rear seat.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and wait 6 seconds to allow the

system to complete self-checking. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator

should illuminate while the OFF indicator

remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-

nated while the ON indicator remains off,

ask the occupant to move to the rear seat

and immediately contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-53

(84,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Operation

A) Driver’s side

B) Passenger’s side

1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.

2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine the

activation or deactivation condition of the

front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-

pending on the characteristic of item(s) or

person on the front p assenger’s seat

monitored by the front passenger’s occu-

pant detection system sensor. For this

reason, only the driver ’ s S RS frontal

airbag may deploy in the event of a

collision, but this does not mean failure of

the system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter-

mined amount of force during a frontal

collision, the control module sends signals

to the a irbag module(s) (only driver’s

module or both driver’s and front passen-

ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to

inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).

. the front sub sensors

. the impact sensors in the airbag control

module

On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag

also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-54

(85,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.

The two inflators of each airbag are

triggered either sequentially or simulta-

neously, depending on the severity of

impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS

frontal airbag and depending on the

severity of impact and the characteristic

of item(s) or person on the seat in the case

of the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-

bag.

! After deployment

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-

diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s

vision is not obstructed and the driver’s

ability to maintain control of the vehicle is

not impaired. The time required from

detecting impact to the deflation of the

SRS airbag after deployment is shorter

than the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys and the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,

the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,

fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and

some smoke will be released. These

occurrences are a normal result of the

deployment. This smoke does not indicate

a fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag system

components around the steering

wheel and dashboard with b are

hands right after deployment. Doing

so can cause burns because the

components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-

signed as follows.

. to deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe frontal

collision

. to function on a one-time-only basis

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not

designed as follows.

. to deploy in most lesser frontal im-

pacts

. to deploy in most side or rear impacts or

in most rollover accidents

*1: Because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone.

*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both the driver ’s and front

passenge r’s SRS frontal airbags would no t

protect the occupant in those situations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on the

level of force experienced in the passen-

ger compartment during a collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which the

driver’s/driver’s and front pas-

senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)

will most likely deploy

A head-on collision against a thick con-

crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19

mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates

only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-55

(86,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

vated when the vehicle is exposed to a

frontal impact similar in fashion and

magnitude to the collisio n described

above.

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which it is possible that

the driver’s/driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbags may be activated when the vehicle

sustains a hard impact in the undercar-

riage area from the road surface (such as

when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,

is severely impacted or knocked hard

against an obstacle on the road such as

a curb).

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-56

(87,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/

driver’s and front passenger ’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a

telephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a

truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset

frontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal

collision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that can

move or deform, such as a parked

vehicle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require deployment

of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of

accidents like those illustrated, the dri-

ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-

ing on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-57

(88,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the driver’s/dri-

ver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag(s) are not de-

signed to deploy in most cases

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deploy

in most of the following cases.

. If the vehicle is struck from the side or

from behind

. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed

frontal collision

1) First impact

2) Second impact

In an acci dent where the vehicle is

impacted more than once, the driver’s

and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first

impact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,

first with another vehicle, then against a

concrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and front

passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are

activated on the first impact, it/they will

not be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag

! SRS side airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door

side of each front seat seatback, which

bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impact

collision, the SRS side airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the door panel

and supplements the seatbelt by reducing

the impact on the occupant’s chest and

waist. The SRS side airbag operates only

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-58

(89,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

for front seat occupants.

! SRS curtain airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU

SRS curtain airbag system that complies

with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of the

cabin is stored in the roof side (between

the front pillar and a point over the rear

seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located

at the top of each center pillar.

Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact

collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the

impacted side of the vehicle deploys

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplements the seatbelt by

reducing the impact on the occupant’s

head.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both

sides of the vehicle deploy between the

occupant and the side window and supple-

ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact to

the occupant’s head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain

airbags on both sides of the vehicle deploy

between the occupant and the side win-

dow and supplement the seatbelt by

reducing the impact to the occupant’s

head and chest.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag can function only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position.

The following airbags deploy indepen-

dently of each other since each has its

own impact sensor.

. Driver’s SRS side airbag

. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag

. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)

. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in the

same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-

dently of the driver’s and front passenger’s

SRS frontal airbags in the steering wheel

and instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impact

force, is located in each of the following

locations.

. In the left and right front doors

. In the left and right center pillars

. In the left and right rear wheel houses

. Under the rear center seat

A rollover sensor is also located inside the

airbag control module.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-59

(90,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! In cases of rollover accident or side collisions, the following components will operate simultaneously

Impact sensors affected

SRS side airbags SRS curtain airbags

Seatbelt pretensioner

(shoulder belt pretensioner only)

Impacted side

Non-impacted

side

Impacted side

Non-impacted

side

Impacted side

Non-impacted

side

Both of the sen-

sors together

sense an impact

force

Impact sensor in

front doors

* – * – * –

Impact sensor

under rear cen-

ter seat

Both of the sen-

sors together

sense an impact

force

Impact sensor in

center pillars

* – * –––

Impact sensor

under rear cen-

ter seat

Both of the sen-

sors together

sense an impact

force

Impact sensor in

rear wheel

houses

––* –– –

Impact sensor

under rear cen-

ter seat

Rollover sensor in airbag control

module

– ***

*: Activated

–: Not activated

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-60

(91,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! After deployment

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag

immediately starts to deflate. The time

required from detection of an impact to

deflation of an SRS side airbag after

deployment is shorter than the blink of an

eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deplo yment then

slowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag deploy even when no one occupies

the seat on the side on which an impact is

applied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud

inflation noise will be heard and some

smoke will be released. These occur-

rences are a normal result of the deploy-

ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire

in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbag

system components around the

front seat seatback with bare hands

right after deployment. Doing so can

cause burns because the compo-

nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch any

part of the SRS curtain airbag sys-

tem (from the front pillar to the part

of the roof side over the rear seat).

Doing so can cause burns because

the components can be very hot as a

result of deployment.

! Example of the type of accident

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are designed as follows:

. to deploy in the event of an accident

involving a moderate to severe side impact

collision

. to function on a one-time-only basis.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain

airbag are not designed to deploy in the

following cases:

. in most lesser side impact

. in most frontal or most rear impacts

(because the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag deployment would not pro-

tect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-

signed to deploy when the vehicle is in an

extremely inclined state such as during a

rollover. They are not designed to deploy in

most lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag

deployment depend on the level of force

experienced in the passenger compart-

ment during a side impact collision. That

level differs from one type of collision to

another, and it may have no bearing on the

visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident in

which the SRS side airbag will

most likely deploy.

1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-61

(92,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most

likely deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side

impact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone

laterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-62

(93,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side

airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtain

airbags will deploy if a serious impact

occurs to the underside of your vehicle.

Some examples are shown in the illustra-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-63

(94,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to

deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS side

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS side

airbag may not deploy depending on the

level of accident forces involved.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-64

(95,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely

to deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-

on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact in an area outside the vicinity of

the passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or

similar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on

impact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions which

might not necessarily require SRS curtain

airbag deployment. In the event of acci-

dents like those illustrated, the SRS

curtain airbag may not deploy depending

on the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-65

(96,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Examples of the types of acci-

dents in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag

are not designed to deploy in

most cases

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision

with another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like those

illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS

curtain airbag are not designed to deploy

in most cases.

1) First impact

2) Second impact

A) SRS curtain airbag

B) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struck

from the side more than once, the SRS

side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy

only once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double side

impact collision, first with one vehicle and

immediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated on

the first impact, they will not be activated

on the second.

& SRS airbag system monitors

SRS airbag system warning light

A diagnostic system continually monitors

the readiness of the SRS airbag system

(including front seatbelt pretensioners)

while the vehicle is being driven. The

SRS airbag system warning light will show

normal system operation by illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-66

(97,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The following components are monitored

by the indicator:

. Front sub sensor

. Airbag control module (including im-

pact sensor and rollover sensor)

. Frontal airbag module

– Driver’s side

– Front passenger’s side

. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

. Side airbag sensor

. Front door impact sensor

. Side airbag module

. Curtain airbag sensor

. Curtain airbag module

. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear

center seat)

. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive

force limiter (front passenger’s side)

. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-

ger’s side)

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor

. Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module

. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicator

. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airbag

system.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

Immediately take your vehicle to

your nearest SUBARU dealer to

have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-

ule or scrapping the entire vehi-

cle damaged by a collision, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-

serviceable parts. Do not use

electrical test equipment on any

circuit related to the SRS airbag

system. For required servicing of

the SRS airbag, consult your

nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-

ingwithordisconnectingthe

system’s wiring could result in

accidental inflation of the SRS

airbag or could make the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areas

indicated in the following list, have

the work performed by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-

bag control module, impact sensors

and airbag modules are stored in

these areas.

– CONTINUED –

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-67

(98,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Under the center of the instru-

ment panel

. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle

. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas

. Bottom of the steering column

and nearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger ’s side and nearby

areas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the front

pillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushion

and rear wheel house on each

side

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag is

deployed, replacement of the system

should be performed only by an author-

ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-

nents of the SRS airbag system are

replaced, use only genuine SUBARU

parts.

NOTE

In the following cases, contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which only

the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both

driver’s and front passenger’sSRS

frontal airbags did not deploy.

. The pad of the steering wheel, the

cover over the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag, or either roof side (from

the front pillar to a point over the rear

seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

. The center pillar, front door, rear

wheel house or rear sub frame, or an

area near these parts, was involved in

an accident in which the SRS side

airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not

deploy.

. The fabric or leather of either front

seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise

damaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which no

SRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against vehicle

modification

WARNING

To avoid accidental activation of the

system or rendering the system

inoperative, which may result in

serious injury, no modifications

should be made to any components

or wiring of the SRS airbag system.

This includes following modifica-

tions.

. Installation of custom steering

wheels

. Attachment of additional trim ma-

terials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric or

leather

. Installation of additional fabric or

leather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-free mi-

crophone or any other accessory

to a front pillar, a center pillar, a

rear pillar, the windshield, a side

window, an assist grip, or any

other cabin surface that would be

near a deploying SRS curtain

airbag.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-68

(99,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Installation of additional electri-

cal/electronic equipment such as

a mobile two-way radio on or near

the SRS airbag system compo-

nents and/or wiring is not advi-

sable. This could interfere with

proper operation of the SRS air-

bag system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the following

modifications. Such modifications

can interfere with proper operation

of the SRS airbag system.

. Att achment of any equipm ent

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,

skid plate, etc.) other than genu-

ine SUBARU accessory parts to

the front end.

. Modification of the suspension

system or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of different

size and construction from the

tires specified on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s

door pillar or specified for indivi-

dual vehicle models in this Own-

er ’s Manual.

. Att achment of any equipm ent

(side steps or side sill protectors,

etc.) other than genuine SUBARU

accessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you

want to install any accessory parts on your

vehicle.

& How to contact the vehicle

manufacturer concerning

modifications for persons

with disabilities that may af-

fect the advanced airbag

system

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,

front side frame, radiator panel, instrument

panel, combination meter, steering wheel,

steering column, tire, suspension or floor

panel can affect the operation of the

SUBARU advanced airbag system. If you

have any questions, you may contact the

following SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District

of Columbia>

Subaru of America, Inc.

Customer Retailer Services Department

P.O. Box 6000

Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

Subaru Hawaii

2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,

Honolulu, HI 96819-4467

808-839-2273

<Guam>

Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-

bile

491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1

Dededo, Guam 96921-6225

671-633-2698

Trebol Motors

P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico

00910

787-793-2828

Subaru Canada, Inc.

Consumer Support Department

560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario

L5R 4J7

1-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-

tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are

in such an area, p lease contact t he

SUBARU distributor or dealer from which

you bought your vehicle.

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

1-69

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(103,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Keys ......................................................................... 2-2

Key number plate................................................... 2-2

Keyless access with push-button start system

(if equipped) ......................................................... 2-2

Safety precautions ................................................. 2-3

Locking and unlocking by holding the access

key fob ................................................................ 2-6

Unlock using PIN Code Access .............................2-10

Power saving function .......................................... 2-11

Power saving function of access key fob ..............2-12

Disabling keyless access function.........................2-12

Selecting audible signal operation.........................2-13

Warning chimes and warning indicator.................. 2-13

When access key fob does not operate properly ...2-14

Replacing battery of access key fob......................2-14

Replacing access key fob ..................................... 2-14

Certification for keyless access with push-

button start system.............................................2-14

Immobilizer ............................................................ 2-15

Security indicator light..........................................2-15

Key replacement ...................................................2-15

Certification for immobilizer system ......................2-16

Remote keyless entry system.............................. 2-17

Locking the doors................................................. 2-18

Unlocking the doors.............................................. 2-18

Unlocking the rear gate ......................................... 2-19

Vehicle finder function .......................................... 2-19

Sounding a panic alarm ........................................2-19

Setting audible signal operation

(models without “keyless access with push-

button start system”) ..........................................2-19

Replacing the battery............................................ 2-20

Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-20

Certification for remote keyless entry system........ 2-20

Door locks............................................................. 2-21

Locking and unlocking from the outside ............... 2-21

Locking and unlocking from the inside ................. 2-22

Key lock-in prevention function ............................2-23

Battery drainage prevention function ....................2-24

Alarm system ........................................................ 2-24

Alarm system operation........................................ 2-25

Arming the system ............................................... 2-25

Disarming the system...........................................2-26

Alarm system setting............................................ 2-26

If you have accidentally triggered the alarm

system .............................................................. 2-27

Valet mode ........................................................... 2-27

Child safety locks ................................................. 2-28

Windows................................................................ 2-28

Power window operation.......................................2-28

Initialization of power window with one-touch

auto up/down function....................................... 2-30

Rear gate ............................................................... 2-31

Lock/unlock.......................................................... 2-31

Open/close ...........................................................2-31

Moonroof (if equipped)......................................... 2-32

Moonroof switches ...............................................2-33

Sunshade ............................................................. 2-34

Keys and doors

(104,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Keys

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, ref er to

“Keyless access with push-button start

system” F2-2.

The following keys are provided with the

vehicle.

1) Master key (Main)

2) Master key (Sub)

3) Sub key

4) Key number plate

Akeycanbeusedinthefollowing

locations.

. Ignition switch

. Driver’s door

. Glove box

NOTE

Locking/unlocking using the remote

keyless entry system can also be con-

trolled with the buttons on the key. For

detailed information, refer to “Remote

keyless entry system” F2-17.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it bangs

against your knees while you are

driving, it could turn the ignition

switch from the “ON” position to

the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,

thereby stopping the engine.

& Key number plate

The key number is stamped on the key

number plate attached to the key set. Write

down the key numbe r and keep it in

another safe place, not in the vehicle. This

number is needed to make a replacement

key if you lose your key or lock it inside the

vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-

15.

Keyless access with push-

button start system (if

equipped)

The following access key fobs are pro-

vided with the vehicle.

1) Access key fob (main)

2) Access key fob (sub)

3) Key number plate

The keyless access with push-button start

system allows you to perform the following

functions when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Locking and unlocking of the doors and

rear gate. Refer to “Locking and unlocking

by holding the access key fob” F2-6.

. Starting and stopping the engine. For

detailed information, refer to “Starting and

Keys and doors/Keys

2-2

(105,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

stopping engine (models with push-button

start system)” F7-11.

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer t o

“Alarm system” F2-24.

NOTE

. Locking/unlocking using the remote

keyless entry system can also be con-

trolled with the buttons on the access

key fob. For detailed information, refer

to “Remote keyless entry system” F2-

17.

. Carefully store the key number plate

supplied with the access key fob. It is

necessary for vehicle repair and addi-

tional registration of access key fobs.

For details, refer to “Key replacement”

F2-15.

An emergency key is attached to each

access key fob.

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

The emergency key is used for the follow-

ing operations.

. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door

. Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTE

The glove box can be kept locked when

you leave your vehicle and the access

key fob (with the emergency key re-

moved) at a parking facility.

& Safety precautions

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, stay at

least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the

transmitting antennas installed on

the vehicle.

The radio waves from the transmit-

ting antennas on the vehicle could

adversely affect the operation of

implanted pacemakers and im-

planted defibrillators.

If you wear electronic medical equip-

ment other than an implanted pace-

maker or an implanted defibrillator,

before using the keyless access

with push-button start system, refer

to “Radio waves used for the key-

less access with push-button start

system” mentioned later, and con-

tact the electronic medical equip-

ment manufacturer for more infor-

mation. The radio waves from the

transmitting antennas on the vehicle

could adversely affect the operation

of the electronic medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keyless

access with push-button start sys-

tem”

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-3

(106,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. The keyless access with push-

button start system uses radio

waves of the following fre-

quency* in addition to the radio

waves used for the remote key-

less entry system. The radio

waves are periodically o utput

from the antennas installed on

the vehicle as shown in the

following illustrations.

* Radio frequency: 134 kHz

1) Antenna

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the access

key fob inside the vehicle or

within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the

vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The

access key fob may be locked

inside the vehicle, or the battery

may discharge rapidly. Note that

the push-button ignition switch

may not turn on in some cases

depending on the location of the

access key fob.

. The access key fob contains

electronic components. Observe

the following precautions to pre-

vent malfunctions.

– It is recommended to have the

access key battery replaced at

an authorized SUBARU dealer

to avoid the risk of damage.

– Do not get the access key fob

wet. If the access key fob gets

wet, wipe it off immediately

and let it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts to

the access key fob.

– Never leave the access key

fob in direct sunlight or any-

where that may become hot,

such as on the dashboard. It

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-4

(107,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

may damage the battery or

cause circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access key

fob in an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access key

fob in humid or dusty loca-

tions. Doing so may cause

malfunctions.

– Keep the access key fob away

from magnetic sources.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a personal computer

or home electrical appliance.

– Do not leave the access key

fob near a battery charger or

any electrical accessories.

– Do not apply metallic window

tint or attach metallic objects

to the windows.

– Do not fit non genuine acces-

sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped,

the integrated emergency key in-

side may become loose. Be care-

ful not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, do

not press the button of the ac-

cess key fob. If any button of the

access key fob is pressed, radio

waves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When carrying the access key

fob in a bag, take measures to

prevent the buttons from being

pressed accidentally.

NOTE

. The operatio nal/non-operational

setting for the keyless access function

can be changed. For the setting proce-

dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-

cess function” F2-12.

. For detailed information about the

operation method for the push-button

ignition switch while the keyless ac-

cess function is switched to the non-

operational mode, refer to “Access key

fob – if access key fob does not operate

properly” F9-17.

. The keyless access with push-but-

ton start system uses weak radi o

waves. The status of the access key

fob and environmental conditions may

interfere with the communication be-

tween the access key fob and the

vehicle under the following conditions,

and it may not be possible to lock or

unlock the doors or start the engine.

– When operating near a facility

where strong radio waves are trans-

mitted, such as a broadcast station

and power transmission lines

– When products that transmit

radio waves are used, such as an

access key fob or a remote trans-

mitter key of another vehicle

– When carrying the access key fob

of your vehicle together with the

access key fob or the remote trans-

mitter of another vehicle

– When the access key fob is

placed near wireless communica-

tion equipment such as a cell phone

– When the access key fob is

placed near a metallic object

– When metallic accessories are

attached to the access key fob

– When carrying the access key fob

with electronic appliances such as a

laptop computer

– When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged

. The access key fob is always com-

municating with the vehicle and is

continuously using the battery.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions,

it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the

battery becomes fully discharged, re-

place it with a new one.

. If an access key fob is lost, it is

recommended that all of the remaining

access key fobs be reregistered. For

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-5

(108,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

reregistration of an access key fob,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

. For a spare access key fob, contact a

SUBARU dealer.

. Up to 7 access key fobs can be

registered for one vehicle.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the storage spaces inside the vehicle,

such as the door pocket, dashboard,

inside the corner of the cargo area.

Vibrations may damage the key fob or

turn on the switch, possibly resulting in

a lockout.

. After the vehicle battery is dis-

charged or replaced, initialization of

the steering lock system may be re-

quired to start the engine. In this case,

perform the following procedure to

initialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignition

switch to the “OFF” position. For

details, refer to “Switching power

status” F3-7.

(2) Open and close the driver ’s

door.

(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi-

alization is completed.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

If you do, the following situations

may occur.

– The access key fob is mistakenly

locked inside the vehicle.

– A false warning issues although

no malfunction actually occurs.

– No warni ng issues even when

any malfunction occurs.

& Locking and unlocking by

holding the access key fob

When the access key fob is carried within

the operating range, the doors and the rear

gate can be locked/unl ocked just by

touching the door handle.

NOTE

The vehicle c an also be locked/un-

locked with the remote keyless entry

system. For details, refer to “Remote

keyless entry system” F2-17.

! Operating ranges

1) Antenna

2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))

1) LED indicator

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-6

(109,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

When the access key fob is within either of

the operating ranges of the front doors, the

LED indicator on the access key fob

flashes. When the keyless access func-

tions are disabled, the LED indicator does

not flash unless a button on the access key

fob is pressed.

NOTE

. If the access key fob is placed too

close to the vehicle body, the keyless

access functions may not operate

properly. If they do not operate prop-

erly, repeat the operation from further

away.

. If the access key fob is placed near

the ground or in an elevated location

from the ground, even if it is in the

indicated operating range, the keyless

access function may not operate prop-

erly.

. When the access key fob is within

the operating range, it is possible for

anyone, even someone who is not

carrying the access key fob, to operate

the keyless access function. Note that

the keyless access function can be

operated only by the door handle, door

lock sensor, rear gate opener button or

rear lock button in the operating range

in which the access key fob is detected.

. It is not possible to lock the doors

and rear gate using the keyless access

function when the access key fob is

inside the vehicle. However, depending

on the status of the access key fob and

the environmental conditions, the ac-

cess key fob may be locked inside the

vehicle. Before locking the vehicle,

make sure that you have the access

key fob.

. When the battery of the access key

fob is discharged, or when operating it

in a location with strong radio waves or

noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power

plant, broadcast station or an area

where wireless equipment is used), or

while talking on a cell phone, t he

operating ranges may be reduced, or

the keyless access function may not

operate.

In such a case, perform the procedure

described in “Locking and unlocking”

F9-17.

. The doors may lock or unlock when

the car is being washed or exposed to a

significant amount of water that con-

tacts the door handle while the key fob

is still in the operating range.

! How to lock and unlock

It is possible to perform the following

operations when you are carrying the

access key fob.

. Lock and unlock the doors

. Unlock and lock rear gate

NOTE

. It is not possible to lock the doors

and rear gate using the keyless access

function when the push-button ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Refer to “Switching power status” F3-

. If the door handle is gripped with a

gloved hand, the door lock may not be

released.

. If the door lock sensor is touched

three times or more repeatedly, the

system will ignore the sensor opera-

tion.

. When performing the locking proce-

dure too quickly, locking may not have

been completed. After performing the

locking procedure, it is recommended

to pull the REAR door handle to confirm

that the doors have been locked.

. If any of the doors (or the rear gate)

are not fully closed, the following will

occur to alert you that the doors (or the

rear gate) are not properly closed.

– an electronic chirp sounds five

times.

– the hazard warning flashers flash

five times.

. It is possible to lock the doors even

when one of the doors is open. After

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-7

(110,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

performing the locking procedure,

close the opened door or rear gate to

lock it.

. Within 3 seconds after locking the

doors and the rear gate by using the

keyless access function, it is not pos-

sible to unlock doors and/or the rear

gate by using the keyless access func-

tion.

. When locking, be sure to carry the

access key fob to prevent locking the

access key fob in the vehicle.

. The setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation and the volume of the

audible signal can be changed by your

SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU

dealer for details. Also, for models with

the combination meter display (color

LCD), the setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation can be changed by

operating the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD). For details, refer to

“Keyless Entry System” F3-41.

! Locking with the door lock sensor

1) Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all doors

including the rear gate, and touch the door

lock sensor on the door handle. All doors

including the rear gate will be locked. Also,

an electronic chirp will sound once and the

hazard warning flashers will flash once.

! Locking with the rear lock button

1) Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all doors

including the rear gate and press the rear

lock button. The rear gate and all doors will

be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will

sound once and the ha zard warning

flashers will flash once.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-8

(111,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Unlocking

Carry the access key fob, and grip the

following door handle.

. The driver’s door handle:

Either only the driver’s door will unlock, or

all doors will unlock.

. The front passenger’s door handle:

All doors and rear gate will be unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice

and the hazard warning flashers will flash

twice.

! Unlocking rear gate

1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press the

rear gate opener button. Either only the

rear gate will unlock, or all doors will

unlock. Also, an electronic chirp will sound

twice and the hazard warning flashers will

flash twice.

! Door unlock selection function

When the door is unlocked using the

keyless access function, only the doors

that were set can be unlocked.

The settings can be changed with the

following methods.

. The setting can be changed by operat-

ing the combination meter display (color

LCD) (if equipped). Refer to “Keyless Entry

System” F3-41.

. The setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-9

(112,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Unlock using PIN Code Ac-

cess

When all doors including the rear gate are

locked, you can unlock the doors (includ-

ing rear gate) without a key by pressing the

rear lock button.

1) Rear lock button

NOTE

PIN Code Access will be helpful if the

key fob is accidentally left in the

vehicle. It is recommended that a 5-

digit security code (PIN code) be regis-

tered.

! Preparation for registering a PIN

code

1. Turn off the ignition switch.

2. Close all doors (including rear gate).

3. Press and hold the “

” button on the

access key fob. Then all doors (including

rear gate) will be locked.

4. Keep the “

” button pressed, and

press the rear lock button within 5 seconds

after step 3.

5. Press and hold the rear lock button for

more than 5 seconds. Confirm a chirp

sound.

6. Release the “

” button and rear lock

button.

7. Press the “

” button on the access key

fob while the chirp sounds.

Then the chirp will stop and the prepara-

tion is complete.

NOTE

Press the “ ” button within 30 seconds

of step 6 to end the preparation mode

and move on to the registration stage.

Unless the “

” button is pressed within

30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code

registration will be canceled.

! Registration for a PIN code

For example, to register “32468” as the

PIN code, perform the following proce-

dure.

1. Press the rear lock button three times.

2. After a chirp sounds once, press the

rear lock button twice.

3. After a chirp sounds once, press the

rear lock button four times.

4. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press

the rear lock button six times.

5. After a chirp (ding) sounds once, press

the rear lock button eight times.

6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within

approximately 30 seconds after the chirp

starts sounding intermittently.

7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.

Then the PIN code will be registered.

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-10

(113,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

NOTE

. Press the rear lock button ten times

to enter “0”.

. Change the PIN code frequently to

protect your vehicle from theft.

. If you have lent your vehi cle to

another person, confirm that the PIN

code has not been changed or deleted.

If the PIN code has been changed or

deleted, reregister a new PIN code.

. If you make an error d uring the

registration procedure, press the “

”

or “

” button on the access key fob.

Then, start over from the procedure

described in “Preparation for register-

ing a PIN code”.

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

you cannot register a string of the same

five numbers together, such as

“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code.

. Do not register your vehicle license

plate number or simple numbers such

as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.

Doing so will increase the risk of

vehicle theft.

. When you try to register “22222”, the

registered PIN code will be deleted. You

cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code

Access until a new code is registered.

. After registering a new PIN code,

make sure that you can unlock the

doors using the PIN code.

. The PIN code cannot be d eleted

while the keyless access function is

disabled by operating the access key

fob.

. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-

lowing case.

– when you forget the PIN code

– when you want to change the PIN

code

! Unlocking

Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis-

tration for a PIN code”.

NOTE

. You cannot unlock by PIN Code

Access in the following cases.

– when the access key fob is within

the operating ranges

– when the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position

. If you make an operation error dur-

ing the unlocking procedure, start over

with the unlocking procedure after

waiting for 5 seconds or longer.

. To protect your vehicle from theft, a

buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes

are entered five times continuously. If

this occurs, you cannot unlock the

doors by PIN Code Access for 5

minutes.

& Power saving function

The keyless access function will be dis-

abled in the following cases to protect the

access key fob battery and the vehicle

battery.

. Case 1: When the keyless access

function and the remote keyless entry

system have not been used for 2 weeks

or longer while all doors are locked

Operate one of the following items to

recover the keyless access function:

– Unlock the doors by operating any

procedure other than gripping the front

passenger’s door handle

– Lock the doors

– Open a door and then close it

. Case 2: When the access key fob has

been left in the operating range for 10

minutes or longer while all doors are

locked

Operate one of the following items to

recover the keyless access function:

– Unlock the doors by gripping the

door handle

– Unlock the doors by pressing the

rear gate opener button

– Lock the doors by touching the door

lock sensor

– Lock or unlock the doors by using

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-11

(114,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the remote keyless entry system

– Lock or unlock the doors by using

the power door locking switch

– Open either of the front doors

& Power saving function of ac-

cess key fob

This function stops the access key fob

from receiving signals and helps minimize

the battery consumption of the access key

fob.

1. Press the “

” button twice while hold-

ing the “

” button.

1) LED indicator

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4

times to notify that the setting is complete.

When the access key fob is in the power

save mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not be

available.

To cancel the power save mode, press one

of the buttons on the access key fob.

& Disabling keyless access

function

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemaker

or an implanted defibrillator, per-

form the procedure described in

“By operating the dri ver’s door”

F2-13 to disable the keyless access

function. If you perform the proce-

dure described in “By operating the

access key fob” F2-12, the opera-

tion of an implanted pacemaker or

implanted defibrillator may be af-

fected by the radio waves from the

transmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be used

for a long time, or when you choose not to

use the keyless access function, the key-

less access function can be disabled.

NOTE

. The locking and unlocking function

by the remote keyless entry system is

not disabled.

. To start the engine while the func-

tions are disabled, perform the proce-

dure described in “Starting engine”

F9-18.

! Disabling functions

! By operating the access key fob

If you have registered a PIN code for PIN

Code Access, you can disable the keyless

access function by operating the access

key fob. For details about registering a PIN

code, refer to “Preparation for registering a

PIN code” F2-10.

1. Open the driver’s door.

2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lock

position.

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”

button on the access key fob simulta-

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-12

(115,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

function will be disabled.

! By operating the driver’s door

1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the

door.

2. Push “ ” of the power door locking

switch.

3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is

performed, open the driver’s door.

4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is

performed, push “

” of the power door

locking switch twice while the door is open.

5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is

performed, close and open the driver ’s

door twice.

6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is

performed, push “

” of the power door

locking switch twice while the door is open.

7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is

performed, close and open the driver ’s

door once.

8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is

performed, close the door.

A chirp sound will be heard, and the

functions will be disabled.

NOTE

In steps 4 and 6, press the power door

locking switch slowly. If the switch is

pressed quickly, the functions may not

be disabled.

! Enabling functions

When the procedure to disable the func-

tions is performed again, a chirp sound will

be heard, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE

. The keyless access function will be

enabled only if you perform the proce-

dure in the same manner you disabled

the function (for example, when dis-

abling by operating the driver’s door,

the function will not be enabled even if

you operate the access key fob).

. Press the push-button ignition

switch if you do not know the proce-

dure in which the keyless access func-

tion was disabled.

– When disabling by operating the

driver’s door: a chirp will not be

heard

– When disabling by operating the

access key fob: a chirp will be heard

& Selecting audible signal op-

eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off. For more details,

contact a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

For models with the combination meter

display (color LCD), the setting can be

changed by operating the combination

meter display (color LCD). For details,

refer to “Vehicle Setting” F3-41.

& Warning chimes and warning

indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning indicator

on the combination meter in order to

minimize improper operations and help

protect your vehicle from theft.

For details, refer to “Warning chimes and

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-13

(116,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

warning indicator of the keyless access

with push-button start system” F3-25.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” F9-17.

& Replacing battery of access

key fob

Refer to “Replacing battery of access key

fob” F11-43.

& Replacing access key fob

Access key fobs can be replaced at

SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-

tact a SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system

. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AHK

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-1

FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference receiv ed, inclu din g

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

. Canada-spec. models

Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system

2-14

(117,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Mexico-spec. models

IFT

RLVDE1415-1661

14AHK

DENSO

Immobilizer

The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from

starting the engine. Only keys registered

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can

be used to operate your vehicle. If engine

start is attempted with an unregistered

access key fob or key, the engine will not

start. Even if the engine does start, it will

stop after a few seconds. This system,

however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-

tee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under direct

sunlight or anywhere it may be-

come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the key

gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth

immediately.

. Do not modify or remo ve the

system. If modified or removed,

the proper operation of the sys-

tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE

. To protect your vehicle from theft,

please pay close attention to the follow-

ing security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-

tended with its keys inside.

– Before leav ing your vehicle,

close all windows and the moon-

roof, and lock the doors and rear

gate.

– Do not leave spare keys or any

record of your key number in the

vehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-free

type immobilizer system.

& Security indicator light

Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-29.

& Key replacement

Your key number plate will be required if

you ever need a replacement key made.

Any new key must be registered for use

with your vehicle’s immobilizer system

before it can be used. The maximum

number of keys that can be registered for

use with one vehicle is as follows.

. Four (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

. Seven (models with “keyless access

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Immobilizer

2-15

(118,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

with push-button start system”)

One key that has already been registered

is required in order to register a new key.

NOTE

If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code

still remains i n the memory of the

vehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-

curity reasons, the lost key’s ID code

should be erased from the memory. To

erase the lost key’s ID code, all keys

that will be used are required.

For details about new key registration

and erasing the lost key’s ID code,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for immobilizer

system

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

Refer to “Certification for keyless access

with push-button start system” F2-14.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference receiv ed, inclu din g

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

– Canada-spec. models

Keys and doors/Immobilizer

2-16

(119,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

– Mexico-spec. models

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-

mitter to severe shocks, such as

those experienced as a result of

dropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-

ter apart except when replacing

the battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitter

wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with

a cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-

mitter on an airplane, do not

press the button of the remote

transmitter while in the airplane.

When any button of the remote

transmitter is pressed, radio

waves are sent and may affect

the operation of the airplane.

When you carry the remote trans-

mitter in a bag on an airplane,

take measures to prevent the

buttons of the remote transmitter

from being pressed.

Access key fob

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) Rear gate unlock button

4) PANIC button

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

2-17

(120,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Transmitter

1) Lock/arm button

2) Unlock/disarm button

3) Rear gate unlock button

4) PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has the

following functions.

. Locking and unlocking the doors (and

rear gate)

. Unlocking the rear gate

. Sounding a panic alarm

. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-

tem. For detailed information, refer t o

“Alarm system” F2-24.

The operable distance of the remote key-

less entry system is approximately 30 feet

(10 meters). However, this distance will

vary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system’s operable distance will

be shorter in areas near a facility or

electronic equipment emitting strong radio

waves such as a power plant, broadcast

station, TV tower, or remote controller of

home electronic appliances.

NOTE

. For models with “keyless access

with push-button start system”,the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the push-button

ignition switch is in any position other

than the “OFF” position.

. For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”,the

remote keyless entry system will not

be activated when the key is inserted in

the ignition switch.

. The hazard warning flashers will

flash once or twice when the access

key fob/transmitter button is pressed in

the following cases.

– When locking the doors

– When unlocking the doors

– When unlocking the rear gate

Operation of the hazard warning

flashers in the above cases can be set

to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

& Locking the doors

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors

and rear gate. An electronic chirp will

sound once and the ha zard warning

flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are not

fully closed, the following will occur to alert

you that the doors (or the rear gate) are not

properly closed.

. an electronic chirp sounds five times.

. the hazard warning flashers flash five

times.

When you close the door, it will automati-

cally lock and then the following will occur.

. an electronic chirp sounds once.

. the hazard warning flashers flash once.

& Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock

the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will

sound twice and the hazard warning

flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors

and the rear gate, briefly press the unlock/

disarm button a second time within 5

seconds.

NOTE

If the interval between the first and

second presses of the unlock/disarm

button (for unlocking of all of the doors

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

2-18

(121,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

and the rear gate) is extremely short,

the system may not respond.

& Unlocking the rear gate

Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock

the rear gate.

An electronic chirp will sound twice and the

hazard warning flashers will flash twice.

& Vehicle finder function

Use t his function to find your vehicle

parked among many vehicles in a large

parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet

(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the

lock/arm button three times in a 5-second

period will cause your vehicle ’s horn to

sound once and its hazard warning

flashers to flash three times.

NOTE

If the interval between presses is too

short whe n you press the lock/arm

button three times, the system may

not respond to the signals from the

remote transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”

button once.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning flashers will flash.

To deactivate the panic alarm, press any

button on the remote transmitter. Unless a

button on the remote transmitter is

pressed, the alarm will be deactivated

after approximately 30 seconds.

& Setting audible signal opera-

tion (models without “keyless

access with push-button start

system”)

Using an electronic chirp, the system will

give you an audible signal when the doors

lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn

the audible signal off.

Perform the following steps to deactivate

the audible signal. You can also use the

same steps to restore the function.

1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

2. Hold down “ ” of the power door

locking switch.

3. While holding down “

” of the power

door locking switch, pull the key out and re-

insert it into the ignition switch at least 6

times within 10 seconds after Step 2.

4. Open and close the driver’s door once

within 10 seconds after Step 3.

5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3

times to indicate completion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform the

above procedure for you. Also, for models

with a combination meter display (color

LCD), the setting can be changed using

the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle

Setting” F3-41.

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

2-19

(122,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Replacing the battery

Refer to “Replacing key battery” F11-42.

& Replacing lost transmitters

If you lose a transmitter or want to

purchase additional transmitters (up to

four can be programmed), your transmit-

ters should be reprogrammed for security

reasons. For details, contact your

SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters

programmed into the remote keyless entry

system.

& Certification for remote key-

less entry system

! U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: CWTB1G077

FCC ID: CWTD1G049

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference receiv ed, inclu din g

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

! Canada-spec. models

Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system

2-20

(123,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Mexico-spec. models

IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814

SUBARU

MODEL: TB1G077

IFETEL RLVSUTD15-1815

SUBARU

MODEL: TD1G049

Door locks

& Locking and unlocking from

the outside

NOTE

If you unlock the driver’s door with a

key (including an emergency key) and

open the door while the alarm system is

armed, the alarm system is triggered

and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this

case, perform any of the following

operations:

. Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– Press any button on the access

key fob (except when the access

key fob battery is discharged).

– Press the push-button ignition

switch to “ACC”.

– Carry the access key fob and

perform either of the following pro-

cedures.

– Grip the front door handle

– P ress t he re ar gate opener

button

. Models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– Press any button on the remote

transmitter (except when the trans-

mitter battery is discharged).

– Insert the key into the ignition

switch and turn the ignition switch

to “ON”.

For details about the alarm system,

refer to “Alarm system” F2-24.

! How to lock and unlock the vehicle

by using the key

1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.

2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.

In this case, only the driver’s side door is

locked.

NOTE

Models with “keyless access w ith

push-button start system”:

The emergency key is directional. If the

key cannot be inserted, change the

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Door locks

2-21

(124,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

! How to lock the vehicle without

using the key

To lock the door from outside without the

key, the following methods are available.

! Locking using lock lever

1) Rotate the lock lever forward.

2) Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operated

will be locked.

! Locking using power door lock-

ing switch

1) Press the lock side of the power door

locking switch.*

2) Close the door.

*: For details about the power door locking

switch, refer to “How to operate the power

door locking switches” F2-23.

In this case, all closed doors and the rear

gate are locked at the same time.

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle when locking the

doors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking from

the inside

! How to use the lock lever

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.

2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

Always make sure that all doors and the

rear gate are closed before starting to

drive.

The red mark on the lock lever appears

when the door is unlocked.

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when you

drive, especially when small chil-

dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-

Keys and doors/Door locks

2-22

(125,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

belts and child restraints, locking

the doors reduces the chance of

being thrown out of the vehicle in an

accident.

It also helps prevent passengers

from falling out if a door is acciden-

tally opened, a nd intruders from

unexpectedly opening doors and

entering your vehicle.

! How to operate the power door

locking switches

All doors and the rear gate can be locked

and unlocked using the power door locking

switches located at the driver’s side and

the front passenger’s side doors.

Example

1) Press to lock

2) Press to unlock

NOTE

Make sure that you do not leave the key

inside the vehicle before locking the

doors from the outside using the power

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion

Under the follo wing conditions, all the

doors will not lock when the door lock

switch is pushed with the driver door open.

. The key is still in the ignition switch

(models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position (models with “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start system”)

NOTE

. When leaving the vehicle, make sure

you are holding the key before locking

the doors.

. The factory setting (default setting)

for this function is set as “operational”.

This function’s operational/non-opera-

tional setting can be changed by a

SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU

dealer for details.

! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-

vention function

When the system is set so that it does not

operate, the doors are locked by the

following operation.

. If the lock lever is turned to the front

(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door

open and the driver’s door is then closed

with the lock lever in that position, the

driver’s door is locked.

. If the spare key is used to lock the

driver ’s door from the outside of the

vehicle, the door is locked.

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Door locks

2-23

(126,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Battery drainage prevention

function

If a door or the rear gate is not completely

closed, the interior lights will remain

illuminated as a result. However, several

lights are automatically turned off by the

battery drainage prevention function to

prevent the battery from discharging. The

following interior lights are affected by this

function.

Item

Switch

position

Automatically turning

off

Map lights DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Dome light DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

Ignition

switch light

—

Approximately 20

minutes later

Cargo area

light

DOOR

Approximately 20

minutes later

NOTE

. The default setting for this function

is set as “operational”. The operational/

non-operational setting of this function

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact your SUBARU dealer to

change the setting.

. When leaving the vehicle, please

make sure that all doors and the rear

gate are completely closed.

. The battery drainage prevention

function does not operate while the

key is in the ignition switch.

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn

sounds and the hazard warning flashers

flash if someone attempts to break into

your vehicle.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the keyless access function or access

key fob.

The system will not be activated when the

push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

The system can be armed or disarmed

with the remote transmitter.

The system will not be activated when the

key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set

for activation at the time of shipment from

the factory. You can set the system for

deactivation yourself or have it done by

your SUBARU dealer.

Keys and doors/Alarm system

2-24

(127,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Alarm system operation

When the alarm system is armed, it is

triggered by the opening any of the doors

or the rear gate.

The alarm system will activate the follow-

ing alarms when triggered.

. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30

seconds.

. The hazard warning flashers will flash

for 30 seconds.

If any of the doors or the rear gate remains

open after the 30-second period, the horn

will continue to sound for a maximum of 3

minutes. If the door or the rear gate is

closed while the horn is sounding, the horn

will stop sounding with a delay of up to 30

seconds.

NOTE

The alarm system can be set to trigger

the illumination of the following interior

lights.

. Map lights (illuminates only when

the door interlock switch is in th e

“DOOR” position)

. Dome light (illuminates only when

the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”

position)

. Cargo area light (illuminates only

when the cargo area light switch is in

the “DOOR” position)

The notifications regarding the map

lights, dome light and cargo area light

are deactivated as the factory setting. A

SUBARU dealer can activate the sys-

tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

& Arming the system

The alarm system becomes armed when

the following operation is performed.

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

equipped) and turn the ignition switch to

the “OFF” position.

2. Carry the key and get out of the

vehicle.

3. Lock the doors using any of the

following methods.

. Locking using the remote keyless

entry system. For details, refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.

. Locking using the keyless access

function (if equipped). For details, refer

to “Locking with the door lock sensor”

F2-8.

. Locking using the power door lock-

ing switch. For details, refer to “Locking

using power door locking switch” F2-

22.

NOTE

Security indicator light

All doors and the rear gate will lock, an

electronic chirp will sound once, the

hazard warning flashers will flash once,

and the security indicator light will start

flashing rapidly.

4. Approximately 30 seconds later, the

system will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state,

the security indicator light will then flash

slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-

onds), indicating that the system has been

armed for surveillance.

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Alarm system

2-25

(128,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

NOTE

. The system can be armed even if the

engine hood, windows and/or moon-

roof are open. Always make sure that

they are fully closed before arming the

system.

. When arming the system, if any of

the doors or the rear gate is not fully

closed, an electronic chirp sounds five

times, the hazard warning flashers

flash five times to alert you that the

doors (or the rear gate) are not properly

closed. When you close the door, doors

will automatically lock and the system

will automatically arm in 30 seconds.

. The 30-second standby time can be

eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-

formed by your SUBARU dealer.

. If any of the following actions is

done during the standby period, the

system will not switch to the surveil-

lance state.

– Doors (including the rear gate)

are unlocked using the access key

fob/remote transmitter.

– Doors (including the rear gate)

are unlocked using the keyless

access function (models with “key-

less access with push-button start

system”).

– Any door (including the rear gate)

is opened.

– The ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position (models without

“keyless access with push-button

start system”).

– Push-button ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” position (mod-

els with “keyless access with push-

button start system”).

& Disarming the system

Perform either of the following procedures.

. Briefly press a button (for less than 2

seconds) on the access key fob/remote

transmitter.

. Carry the access key fob and perform

either of the following procedures (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”).

– Grip the front door handle.

– Press the rear gate opener button.

– Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator light

will then change slowly (once approxi-

mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-

proximately every 2 seconds), indicating

that the alarm system has been disarmed.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using the

access key fob/transmitter (i.e. the trans-

mitter is lost, broken or the transmitter

battery is too weak), you can disarm the

system without using the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

The system can be disarmed if you turn the

ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF” to

the “ON” position with a registered key/

access key fob.

NOTE

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”, if the ac-

cess key fob battery is discharged,

perform the procedure described in

“Switching power status” F9-17. In

such a case, replace the battery im-

mediately. Refer to “Replacing battery

of access key fob ” F11-43.

& Alarm system setting

To change the setting of your vehicle’s

alarm system for activation or deactiva-

tion, do the following.

1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to

“Disarming the system” F2-26.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

4. Hold down “

” of the driver’s power

door locking switch, open the driver’s door

within the following 1 second, and wait 10

Keys and doors/Alarm system

2-26

(129,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

seconds without releasing the switch. The

setting will then be changed as follows.

. Type A combination meter

Setting

status

Combination

meter display

Horn

Activate ALon Once

Deactivate ALoF

Twice

. Type B combination meter

Setting

status

Combination

meter display

Horn

Activate AL ON Once

Deactivate AL OFF

Twice

NOTE

You may have the above setting change

done by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-

gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations:

. Press any button on the access key fob/

remote transmitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”).

. Turn the push-button ignition to the

“ACC” position (model s with “keyless

access with push-button start system”).

NOTE

Only registered keys will stop the

alarm. If the immobilizer transponder

is not registered, the alarm will not

stop.

& Valet mode

When you choose the valet mode, the

alarm system does not operate. In valet

mode, the remote transmitter is used only

for locking and unlocking the doors and

rear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change the

setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for

deactivation mode. Refer to “Alarm system

setting” F2-26. The security indicator light

will continue to flash once every 3 seconds

indicating that the system is in the valet

mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting of

your vehicle’s alarm system for activation

mode. Refer to “Alarm system setting” F2-

26.

Keys and doors/Alarm system

2-27

(130,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Child safety locks

Each rear door has a child safety lock.

When the child safety lock lever is in the

lock position, the door cannot be opened

from inside. The door can only be opened

from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks to

the “LOCK” position when children

sit in the rear seat. Serious injury

could result if a child accidentally

opens the door and falls out.

Windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful to

prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,

neck, head or other objects from

being caught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-

dows using the lock switch when

children are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the power

window.

The power windows operate only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Power window operation

! Power window switches

. Driver’s side power window switches:

1) For front left window (with one-touch auto

up and down feature)

2) For front right window (with one-touch

auto up and down feature)

3) For rear left window

4) For rear right window

5) Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by the

power window switch cluster at the driver

side door.

Keys and doors/Child safety locks

2-28

(131,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Passenger ’s side power window

switches:

Each passenger’s window can be con-

trolled by the power window switch located

on the door.

! Operating the window

. With one-touch auto up and down

feature:

1) Automatically close*

2) Close

3) Open

4) Automatically open*

*: To stop the window halfway, operate the

switch to opposite side.

NOTE

Avoid the following.

. After the driver’s window is fully

closed or fully opened, the switch is

continuously operated in the same

direction for a few seconds.

. After the windows for three or more

seats are fully closed or fully opened,

each switch is continuously operated

in the same direction simultaneously

for a few seconds.

Either of the operations described

above may cause the power window

breaker to operate making it impossible

to open or close the window. Be sure to

initialize the power windows. If they are

not initialized, the one-touch auto up/

down function will not operate. Refer to

“Initialization of power window with

one-touch auto up/down function”

F2-30.

. Without one-touch auto up and down

feature:

1) Close

2) Open

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Windows

2-29

(132,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Anti-entrapment function (windows

with one-touch auto up/down func-

tion)

While closing the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s windows automatically, if the

window senses a substantial enough

object trapped between the window and

the window frame, it automatically moves

down slightly and stops.

If a foreign object is caught while the

driver’s window or passenger’s window is

opening automatically, the window will

stop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test this func-

tion using fingers, hands or other

parts of your body.

. The anti-en trapment funct ion

may not operate properly if some

object gets trapped just before

the window fully closes.

NOTE

. If a window detects an impact similar

to that caused by trapping an object (for

example, when the vehicle encounters

a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment

function may operate.

. The window cannot be operated for a

few seconds after the anti-entrapment

function operates.

! Off delay function (windows with

one-touch auto up/down function)

The front windows can be operated for

approximately 45 seconds even after the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“OFF” position. If a front door is opened

within 45 seconds, the off delay function is

canceled.

! Locking the passengers’ windows

1) Lock

2) Unlock

When the lock switch is in the lock position,

the rear passenger’s window switches on

the driver side door and the passengers’

window switches cannot be operated.

& Initialization of power window

with one-touch auto up/down

function

If the power window automatic function

(one-touch auto up and down function)

does not operate properly, operate each

window according to the following proce-

dure in order to initialize the power window

system.

1. Close the door.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.

3. Open the window completely and then

press and hold down the power window

switch for approximately 1 second.

4. Close the window completely and then

pull and hold the power window switch for

approximately 1 second.

Keys and doors/Windows

2-30

(133,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Rear gate

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaust

gas from entering the vehicle,

always keep the rear gate closed

while the engine is running.

. Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed

grip. Also avoid closing the rear

gate by pulling on the recessed

grip from inside the cargo space.

There is a danger of your hand

being caught and injured.

NOTE

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due

to a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-

function in the door locking/unlocking

system or other causes, you can unlock

it by manually operating the rear gate

lock release lever.

For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –

if the rear gate cannot be opened” F9-

19.

& Lock/unlock

The rear gate can be locked and unlocked

using any of the following systems.

. Power door locking switch: Refer to

“How to operate the power door locking

switches” F2-23.

. Keyless access with the push-button

start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-

less access with push-button start system”

F2-2.

. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.

& Open/close

1) The rear gate opener button

To open:

First unlock the rear gate lock then push

the rear gate opener button.

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Rear gate

2-31

(134,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

To close:

Lower the rear gate slowly and push down

firmly until the latch engages.

The rear gate can be lowered easily if you

pull it down holding the recessed grip.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in or

place cellophane tape on the rear

gate stays or scratch the stays

while loading or unloading cargo.

That could cause leakage of gas

from the stays, which may result

in their inability to hold the rear

gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head or

face on the rear gate when open-

ing or closing the rear gate and

when loading or unloading cargo.

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,

head or any objects protrude from

the moonroof. A person could be

seriously injured if any of the follow-

ing conditions occur.

. The vehicle stops suddenly.

. The vehicle turns sharply.

. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.

. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outside

objects.

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by entrapment, always con-

form to the following instructions

without exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,

arms, head or other objects will

be accidentally caught in the

moonroof.

. Always carry the key when you

leave the vehicle for safety rea-

sons and never allow an unat-

tended child to remain in the

Keys and doors/Moonroof

2-32

(135,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

vehicle. Failure to follow this

procedure could result in injury

to a child operating the moon-

roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-

trapment function by deliberately

placing part of your body in the

moonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the open

moonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof if

falling snow or extremely cold

conditions have caused it to

freeze shut.

. The anti-en trapment funct ion

does not operate when the moon-

roof is being tilted down. Be sure

to confirm that it is safe to do so

before tilting the moonroof down.

. If the moonroof does not close,

have the system checked by a

SUBARU dealer.

The moonroof has both tilting and sliding

functions.

The moonroof operates only when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Moonroof switches

! Tilting moonroof

1) Up

2) Down

To raise the moonroof, press and hold the

switch in the up side and release. To lower

the moonroof, press and hold the switch in

the down side.

NOTE

Release the switch after the moonroof

has been raised or has been lowered

completely. Pressing the switch con-

tinuously may cause damage to the

moonroof.

! Sliding moonroof

1) Open

2) Close

To open or close the moonroof using the

automatic function, press and hold the

switch toward the open/close side and

release.

To stop the moonroof halfway, press a

switch on the moonroof switch.

NOTE

. After washing the vehicle or after it

rains, wipe away water on the roof prior

to opening the moonroof to prevent

drops of water from falling into the

passenger compartment.

– CONTINUED –

Keys and doors/Moonroof

2-33

(136,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. For the sake of safety, it is recom-

mended that you avoid driving with the

moonroof fully opened.

! Anti-entrapment function

When the moonroof senses a substantial

enough object trapped between its glass

and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it

automatically moves back to the fully open

position and stops there. The anti-entrap-

ment function may also be activated by a

strong shock on the moonroof even when

there is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this function

using fingers, hands or other parts

of your body.

& Sunshade

The sunshade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is

closed.

If the moonroof is opened, the sunshade

also moves back.

Keys and doors/Moonroof

2-34

(139,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Ignition switch (models without “keyless

access with push-button start system”)............ 3-4

Key positions......................................................... 3-4

Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-5

Ignition switch light (if equipped) ........................... 3-5

Push-button ignition switch (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”) ............................................................... 3-6

Safety precautions ................................................. 3-6

Operating range for push-button start system ........ 3-6

Switching power status.......................................... 3-7

When access key fob does not operate properly .... 3-8

Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8

Meters and gauges ................................................. 3-8

Speedometer ......................................................... 3-8

Tachometer............................................................ 3-8

Odometer............................................................... 3-9

Double trip meter ................................................... 3-9

Fuel gauge............................................................ 3-10

ECO gauge (if equipped) .......................................3-10

Combination meter settings .................................. 3-11

Illumination brightness control............................ 3-12

Auto dimmer cancel function (if equipped) ............3-12

Warning and indicator .......................................... 3-12

Initial illumination for system check ...................... 3-12

Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................3-13

SRS airbag system warning light........................... 3-15

Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF

indicators ...........................................................3-15

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction

indicator light .....................................................3-15

Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant

temperature high warning light ..........................3-16

Charge warning light ............................................ 3-17

Oil pressure warning light.....................................3-17

Engine low oil level warning light.......................... 3-18

Windshield washer fluid warning light................... 3-18

AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models)..............3-18

Low tire pressure warning light

(U.S.-spec. models)............................................3-18

ABS warning light.................................................3-20

Brake system warning light (red) ..........................3-21

Low fuel warning light ..........................................3-22

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light.............................................3-22

Door open warning light .......................................3-22

All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models) .......... 3-22

Power steering warning light ................................3-23

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control operation indicator light ........3-23

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ....... 3-24

Warning chimes and warning indicator of the

keyless access with push-button start system

(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-25

Security indicator light..........................................3-29

Select lever/gear position indicator

(CVT models)..................................................... 3-30

Turn signal indicator lights ...................................3-30

High beam indicator light...................................... 3-30

High beam assist indicator light (green)

(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-30

High beam assist warning indicator (yellow)

(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-30

Instruments and controls

(140,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Cruise control indicator light (if equipped).............3-31

Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped)....... 3-31

Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light

(models with LED headlights).............................. 3-31

LED headlight warning light (models with LED

headlights).......................................................... 3-31

Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/

Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator

light (if equipped)................................................3-31

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............3-31

Headlight indicator light (if equipped)....................3-31

Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator

(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-31

X-mode indicator (if equipped) ..............................3-32

Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ............ 3-32

BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped)............. 3-32

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) .................. 3-32

RAB warning indicator (if equipped) ...................... 3-32

RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped) .................... 3-32

Icy road surface warning indicator (if equipped) ....3-32

Combination meter display (color LCD)

(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-33

Basic operation.....................................................3-34

Welcome screen and Good-bye screen.................. 3-34

Warning screen..................................................... 3-35

Telltale screen.......................................................3-35

Basic screens .......................................................3-36

Menu screens .......................................................3-38

Multi-function display (black and white) ............. 3-42

Driving information display ...................................3-43

Outside temperature indicator ............................... 3-46

X-mode indicator (if equipped) .............................. 3-47

Clock.................................................................... 3-47

Multi-function display (color LCD)

(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-47

Features ............................................................... 3-48

Welcome screen ................................................... 3-48

Self-check screen ................................................. 3-48

Interruption screen ...............................................3-49

Basic operation ....................................................3-49

Basic screens.......................................................3-50

Setting screen ...................................................... 3-57

How to get the source code using the open

source............................................................... 3-62

Clock...................................................................... 3-63

Setting the clock manually.................................... 3-63

Setting the clock automatically ............................. 3-66

Regulatory information ......................................... 3-66

Light control switch ............................................. 3-66

Precautions and tips.............................................3-66

Headlights ............................................................ 3-67

High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-68

Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-69

High beam assist function (if equipped) ................3-69

Daytime running light system ............................... 3-72

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-72

Headlight beam leveler

(models with LED headlights) .......................... 3-73

Fog light switch (if equipped).............................. 3-74

Steering responsive fog lights system

(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-74

Instruments and controls

(141,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Turn signal lever ................................................... 3-75

One-touch lane changer ........................................ 3-76

Wiper and washer ................................................. 3-76

Windshield wiper and washer switches ................. 3-77

Rear window wiper and washer switch ..................3-79

Mirrors ................................................................... 3-80

Inside mirror .........................................................3-80

Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ..........3-80

Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink

(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-81

Outside mirrors ....................................................3-88

Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...................... 3-89

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................. 3-90

Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) .........3-91

Horn ....................................................................... 3-92

Instruments and controls

(142,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Ignition switch (models with-

out “keyless access with

push-button start system”)

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK” position while the

vehicle is being driven or towed

because that will lock the steer-

ing wheel, preventing steering

control. And when the engine is

turned off, it takes a much greater

effort than usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-

ways remove the key from the

ignition switch for safety and

never allow an unattended child

to remain in the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure could re-

sult in injury to a child or others.

Children could operate the power

windows, the moonroof or other

controls or even make the vehicle

move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder or

key case to either key. If it banged

against your knees or hands while

you are driving, it could turn the

ignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-

tion, thereby stopping the engine.

Also, if the key is attached to a key

holder or to a large bunch of other

keys, centrifugal force may act on it

as the vehicle moves, resulting in

unwanted turning of the ignition

switch.

The ignition switch has four positions:

LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE

. Keep the ignition switch in the

“LOCK” position when the engine is

not running.

. Using electrical accessories for a

long time with the ignition switch in the

“ON” or “ACC ” position can cause the

battery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not move

from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position, turn the steering wheel

slightly to the left and right as you turn

the ignition switch.

& Key positions

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be inserted

or removed in this position.

The ignition switch will lock

the steering wheel when you

remove the key.

ACC

In this position the electrical

accessories (audio, acces-

sory power outlet, etc.) can be

used.

This is the normal operating

position after starting the en-

gine.

START

The engine is started in this

position.

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)

3-4

(143,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the

“START” position while the engine

is running.

NOTE

. To turn the key from the “ACC” to

“LOCK” position, the select lever must

be in the “P” position (CVT models) and

the key must be pushed in and turned.

. If your registered key fails to start

the engine, pull out the key once (the

security indicator light will blink), and

then insert the key again and turn it to

the “START” position again to restart

the engine.

. The engine may not start in the

following cases:

– The key grip is touching another

key or a metallic key holder.

– The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transpon-

der.

– T he key is near or touching

another transmitter.

& Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the

driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under the f ollowing

conditions.

. when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position

. when the key is removed from the

ignition switch

. when the driver’s door is closed

& Ignition switch light (if

equipped)

For easy access to the ignition switch in

the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-

nates when the driver’s door is opened or

when the driver’s door is unlocked using

the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for several

tens of seconds and then gradually turns

off under the following conditions.

. when the driver’s door is closed

. when the doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry transmitter

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)

3-5

(144,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The light turns off immediately under the

following conditions.

. when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position

. when all doors and the rear gate are

locked using the remote keyless entry

transmitter

Push-button ignition switch

(models with “keyless access

with push-button start sys-

tem”)

& Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions ” F2-3.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

1) Antenna

2) Operating range

NOTE

. If the access key fob is not detected

within the operating range of the anten-

nas inside the vehicle, the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start

cannot be operated.

. Even when the access key fob is

outside the vehicle, if it is placed too

close to the glass, it may be possible to

switch the power or to start the engine.

. Do not leave the access key fob in

the following places. It may become

impossible to operate the push-button

ignition switch and the engine start. It

may also cause a false warning to issue

although no malfunction actually oc-

curs, or not to issue a warning when

any malfunction occurs.

– On the instrument panel

– On the floor

– Inside the glove box

– Inside the door trim pocket

– On the rear seat

– In the cargo area

. Wh en operating the push-button

ignition switch or starting the engine,

if the access key fob battery is dis-

charged, perform the procedure de-

scribed in “Access key fob – if access

key fob does not operate properly” F9-

17. In such a case, replace the battery

immediately. Refer to “Replacing bat-

tery of access key fob” F11-43.

Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)

3-6

(145,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Switching power status

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time the

push-button ignition switch is pressed.

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Shift the select lever (CVT models)/the

shift lever (MT models) into the “P”/“N”

position.

3. Press the push-button ignition switch

without depressing the brake pedal. Every

time the button is pressed, the power is

switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”,

“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is

stopped and the push-button ignition

switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation

indicator on the push-button ignition switch

illuminates in orange.

Power

status

Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off

Power is turned

off.

ACC Orange

The following

systems can be

used:

audio and ac-

cessory power

outlet.

Orange

(while engine is

stopped)

All electrical

systems can be

used.

Turned off

(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. Whe n the push-button ignition

switch is left in “ON” (while the

engine is not running) or “ACC”

for a long time, it may result in

vehicle battery discharge.

. Do not spill drinks or other liquids

on the push-button ignition

switch. It may cause a malfunc-

tion.

. Do not touch the push-button

ignition switch with a hand soiled

with oil or other contaminants. It

may cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not operate smoothly, stop

the operation. Contact a SUBARU

dealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switch

does not illuminate even when

the instrument panel illumination

is turned on, have the vehicle

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hot

sun for a long time, the surface of

the push-button ignition switch

may get hot. Be careful not to

burn yourself.

NOTE

. Wh en operating the push-button

ignition switch, firmly press it all the

way.

. If the push-button ignition switch is

pressed quickly, the power may not

turn on or off.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)

3-7

(146,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. If the indicator light on the push-

button ignition switch flashes in green

when the push-button ignition switch is

pressed, steering is locked. When this

occurs, press the push-button ignition

switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

! Battery drainage prevention func-

tion

When the push-button ignition switch is left

in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi-

mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition

switch will be automatically switched to

“OFF” to prevent the battery from going

dead.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” F9-17.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used to warn

other drivers when you have to park your

vehicle under emergency conditions. The

hazard warning flasher works regardless

of the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,

push the hazard warning button on the

instrument panel. All the turn signal lights

and the turn signal indicator lights will

flash. To turn off the flasher, push the

button again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

NOTE

Some of the meters and gauges on the

combination meter use liquid-crystal

displays. You will find their indications

hard to see if you wear polar ized

glasses.

& Speedometer

The speedomete r shows the vehicle

speed.

& Tachometer

The tachometer shows the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

pointer of the tachometer in the red

zone. In this range, fuel injection will

be cut by the engine control module

to protect the engine from overrev-

ving. The engine will resume run-

ning normally after the engine speed

is reduced below the red zone.

Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher

3-8

(147,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Odometer

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Type A combination meter

3) Type B combination meter

This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The odometer shows the total distance

that the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE

If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up.

The indicators will turn off when:

. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper-

ated for approximately 10 seconds.

. The driver’s door is opened and then

closed.

& Double trip meter

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Type A combination meter

3) Type B combination meter

This meter displays the two trip meters

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

The trip meter shows the distance that the

vehicle has been driven since you last set

it to zero.

The display can be switched as shown in

the following sequence by pressing the

TRIP RESET switch.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the A

trip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIP

RESET switch and keep the knob pressed

for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt to

change the function of the indicator

during driving, as an accident could

result.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

3-9

(148,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

NOTE

. If the connection between the com-

bination meter and battery is broken for

any reason such as vehicle mainte-

nance or fuse replacement, the data

recorded on the trip meter will be lost.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

when the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

odometer/trip meter will light up. It is

possible to switch between the A trip

meter and B trip meter indications while

the odometer/trip meter is lit up.

In addition, it is possible to reset the trip

meter by pressing and holding the TRIP

RESET switch.

The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

– The driver’s door is opened and

then closed.

& Fuel gauge

1) TRIP RESET switch

2) Type A combination meter

3) Type B combination meter

The fuel gauge is displayed when the

ignition is in the “ON” position, and it shows

the approximate amount of fuel remaining

in the tank.

The gauge indication may change slightly

during braking, turning or acceleration due

to fuel level movement in the tank.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If you press the TRIP RESET switch

while the ignition switch is in the

“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, the

fuel gauge will light up and indicate the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10 sec-

onds.

– The driver’s door is opened and

then closed.

& ECO gauge (if equipped)

1) Type A combination meter

2) Type B combination meter

The ECO g auge shows the difference

between the current rate of fuel consump-

tion and the average rate of fuel consump-

tion since the trip meter was last reset.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

3-10

(149,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

If the ECO gauge moves towards the +

side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE

. The ECO gauge shows only an

approximate indication of fuel eff i-

ciency.

. After resetting the trip meter, the

average rate of fuel consumption is not

shown until you have driven for 1 mile

(or 1 km). Before that time, the ECO

gauge does not operate.

& Combination meter settings

Meter and vehicle settings can be set on

the combination meter.

! Type A combination meter

Various adjustments can be made, such

as switching units shown on the combina-

tion meter and adjusting the warning tone

volume.

While the ignition switch is in the “ OFF ”

position, each press of TRIP RESET

switch results in items shown in the table

below being switched.

Item

Combination

meter display

Possible

settings

A trip

—

B trip

—

Gauge

needle

sweep

function

On/Off

Changing

the unit*

mile/km

Warning

volume*

Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3

*: if available

NOTE

. If you switch the units on the combi-

nation meter, the units on the multi-

function display (black and white) also

switches accordingly.

. If either of the following conditions

is met, the combination meter setting

mode will be canceled.

– The driver’s door is opened.

– The TRIP RESET switch is not

operated for approximately 10 sec-

onds or more.

! Switching method

1. Push the ignition switch in the “OFF”

position.

1) TRIP RESET switch

2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat-

edly until the item you want to change is

displayed.

3. Press and hold the TRIP RESET

switch while the item to be changed is

displayed, the setting of the item will be

switched.

! Type B combination meter

Meter and vehicle settings can be set on

the combination meter display (color

LCD). Refer to “Menu screens” F3-38.

Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges

3-11

(150,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Illumination brightness con-

trol

The illumination brightness of the instru-

ment panel illuminates under the following

conditions.

. when the light switch is in the “

” or

“

” position

. when the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically

You can adjust the illumination brightness

for better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE

. When the control dial is turned fully

upward, the illumination brightness

becomes the maximum and the auto-

matic dimming function does not work

at all.

. The brightness setting is not can-

celed even when the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

& Auto dimmer cancel function

(if equipped)

When the ambient light is bright, the

illumination brightness is set to the max-

imum regardless of the position of the

control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust

the illumination brightness by using the

control dial. When the ambient light is dark,

you can dim the illumination brightness as

described above.

The operational/non -oper at io nal setting

and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel

function can be changed by your SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for

details.

Warning and indicator

& Initial illumination for system

check

Several of the warning and indicator lights

illuminate when the ignition switch is

initially turned to the “ON” position. This

permits checking the operation of the

bulbs.

Apply the park ing brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position. For

the system check, several of the following

lights illuminate and then turn off after

several seconds or after the engine has

started.

: Seatbelt warning light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the driver fastens the seat-

belt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning

light

(The seatbelt warning light turns off

only when the front seat passenger

fastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

ON /

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator light

/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag

OFF indicator light

Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control

3-12

(151,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light

: Coolant temperature low indicator

light/Coolant temperature high warn-

ing light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Engine low oil level warning light

: Windshield washer fluid warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(CVT models)

: Low tire pressure warning light

(U.S.- spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Low fuel warning light

: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start

assist OFF indicator light

: Door open warning light

: AWD warning light (CVT models)

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/

Vehi cl e Dynamic s Control opera tio n

indicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator

light

: Automatic headlight beam leveler

warning light (models with LED head-

lights)

: Hill descent control indicator light (if

equipped)

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a

burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the

corresponding system.

Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer

for repair.

& Seatbelt warning light

and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt

warning device at the driver’s and front

passenger’s seat, as required by current

safety standards.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, this device reminds the driver and

front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by

illuminating the warning lights in the loca-

tions indicated in the following illustration

and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-13

(152,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/

has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ ON”

position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will

flash for several seconds, to warn that the

seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s

seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also

sound simultaneously.

NOTE

. If the driver’s and/or front passen-

ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened

6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning

device operates as follows according

to the vehicle speed.

– At speeds lower than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

steady illumination and flashing at

15-second intervals. The chime will

not sound.

– At speeds higher than approxi-

mately 9 mph (15 km/h)

The warning light(s) for unfastened

seatbelt(s) will alternate between

flashing and steady illumination at

15-second intervals and the chime

will sound while the warning light(s)

is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warning

operation that follows the 6-second

warning after turning ON the ignition

switch. When the ignition switch is

turned ON next time, however, the

complete sequence of the warning

operation resumes. For further details

about canceling the warning operation,

please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the front

passenger’s sea t, the seatbelt warning

device for the front passenger’s seat will

be deactivated. The front passenger’s

occupant detection system monitors

whether or not there is a passenger on

the front passenger’s seat.

Observe the following precautions. Failure

to do so may prevent the device from

functioning correctly or cause the device to

fail.

. Do not install any accessory such as a

table or TV onto the seatback.

. Do not store a heavy load in the

seatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to

place his/her hands or legs on the front

passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to

pull the seatback.

. Do not use front seats with their back-

ward-forward position and seatback not

being locked into place securely. If any of

them are not locked securely, adjust them

again. For adjusting procedure, refer to

“Manual seat” F1-5.

If the seatbelt warning device for the front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the

front passenger’s seat is empty or it is

deactivated even when the front passen-

ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take

the following actions.

. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint system and

its child occupant, although we strongly

recommend that all children sit in the rear

seat properly restrained.

. Ensure that there is no article left in the

seatback pocket.

. Ensure that the backward-forward po-

sition and seatback of front passenger’s

seat are locked into place securely by

moving the seat back and forth.

If still the seatbelt warning device for front

passenger’s seat does not function cor-

rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-

tions described above, immediately con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-14

(153,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& SRS airbag system

warning light

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any of

the following conditions, there may

be a malfunction in the seatbelt

pretensioners and/or SRS airb ag

system. Immediately take your vehi-

cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer

to have the system checked. Unless

checked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS

airbag will not operate properly in

the event of a collision, which may

increase the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch is

first turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of the

warning light

. Illumination of the warning light

while driving

For details about the components mon-

itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

airbag system monitors” F1-66.

& Front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators

ON : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

indicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF

indicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON

and OFF indicators show you the status of

the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicator is displayed near the map

lights.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, both the ON and OFF

indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during

which time the system is checked. Follow-

ing the system check, both indicators turn

off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the

indicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal

airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-

vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag

ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF

indicator will remain off.

If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag

is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal

airbag ON indicator will remain off while

the OFF indicator will illuminate.

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”

position, if both the ON and OFF indicators

remain illuminated or off simultaneously

even after the system check period, the

system is malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-

spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light/Malfunction in-

dicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-

nates while you are driving, have

your vehicle checked/repaired by

your SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emission

control system checked and re-

paired as necessary could cause

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-15

(154,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

serious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate

that there is at least one problem or

potential problem somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

! If the light illuminates steadily

If the light illuminates steadily while driving

or does not turn off after the engine starts,

an emission control system malfunction

has been detected.

You should have your vehicle checked by

an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE

This light also illuminates when the fuel

filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,

the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illuminating

could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.

Remove the cap and retighten it until it

clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with

the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap

will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light turn off immediately. It may take

several driving trips. If the light does not

turn off, take your vehicle to your author-

ized SUBARU dealer immediately.

! If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, an

engine misfire condition has been de-

tected which may damage the emission

control system.

To prevent serious damage to the emis-

sion control system, you should do the

following.

. Reduce vehicle speed.

. Avoid hard acceleration.

. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-

ble.

. Stop towing a trailer as soon as

possible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light may

stop blinking and illuminate steadily after

several driving trips. You should have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

SUBARU dealer immediately.

& Coolant temperature

low indicator light/Cool-

ant temperature high

warning light

CAUTION

. After turning the ignition switch

to the “ON” position, if this

indicator light/warning light be-

haves in any of the fo llowing

ways, the electrical system may

be malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer immediately for

an inspection.

– It remains blinking in RED.

– It remains illuminated in RED

for more than 2 seconds.

– It remains blinking in RED and

BLUE alternately.

. While driving, if this indicator

light/warning light behaves in

any of the following ways, take

the specified appropriate mea-

sure listed below.

– Blinking or illuminated in

RED:

Safely stop the vehicle as

soon as possible, and refer to

the emergency steps to take in

the case of engine overheat-

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-16

(155,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

ing. After that, have the sys-

tem checked by your nearest

SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-

gine overheating” F9-12.

– Blinking in RED and BLUE

alternately:

The electrical system may be

malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspec-

tion.

This coolant temperature low indic ator

light/coolant temperature high warning

light has the following three functions.

. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-

cient warming up of the engine

. Blinking in RED indicates that the

engine is close to overheating

. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-

ing condition of the engine

For a system check, this indicator light/

warning light illuminates in RED for ap-

proximately 2 seconds when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position. After

that, this indicator light/warning light

changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-

tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light

turns off when the engine is warmed up

sufficiently.

If the engine coolant temperature in-

creases over the specified ran ge, the

indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.

At this time, the engine is close to over-

heating.

If the engine coo lant temperature in-

creases further, the indicator light/warning

light illuminates in RED continuously. At

this time, the engine may be overheating.

When the indicator light/warning light

blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely

stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and

refer to the emergency steps to take in the

case of engine overheating. Refer to

“Engine overheating” F9-12. After that,

have the system checked by your nearest

SUBARU dealer.

Also, if the indicator light/warning light

often blinks in RED, the electrical system

may be malfunctioning. Contact your

SUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTE

If the engine is restarted after a certain

driving condition, this indicator light/

warning light may illuminate in RED.

However, this is not a malfunction if the

indicator light/warning light turns off

after a short time.

& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging

system is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is

loose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

& Oil pressure warning

light

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the engine oil

pressure is low and the lubricating system

is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or does

not turn off after the engine starts, stop the

engine at the first safe opportunity and

check the engine oil level. If the oil level is

low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is

at the proper level but the light remains

illuminated, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer immediately.

For details about checking the engine oil

level or adding the engine oil, refer to

“Engine oil” F11-8.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-17

(156,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the

oil pressure warning light illumi-

nated. This may cause serious en-

gine damage.

& Engine low oil level

warning light

This light illuminates when the engine oil

level decreases to the lower limit.

If the engine low oil level warning light

illuminates while driving, park the vehicle

in a safe and level location, and then check

the engine oil level. When the engine oil

level is not within the normal range, refill

with engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” F11-

If the warning light does not turn off after

refilling the engine oil, or the warning light

illuminates even though the engine oil

level is within the normal range, have the

vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

. The warning light may stay illumi-

nated when the engine is started

straight after topping up or changing

the engine oil. In such cases, park the

vehicle on a level surface and wait for

more than a minute until the oil level

settles, after which the warning light

will turn off.

. The warning light may illuminate

temporarily in the following conditions

because a low oil level may be detected

as a result of significant oil movement

in the engine.

– when the vehicle is considerably

inclined on an uphill or steep slope

– when the vehicle has continu-

ously accelerated and decelerated

– when the vehicle is continuously

turned

– when the vehicle is driven on a

road that alternates continuously

between uphill and downhill

& Windshield washer

fluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level in

the windshield washer fluid t ank de-

creases to the lower limit (approximately

0.6 US qt, 0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).

& AT OIL TEMP warning

light (CVT models)

If this light illuminates when the engine is

running, it may indicate that the transmis-

sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

! Transmission control system warn-

ing

If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes

after the engine has started, it may indicate

that the transmission control system is not

working properly. Contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Low tire pressure

warning light (U.S.-spec.

models)

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will illuminate for approximately 2

seconds to check that the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning

properly. If there is no problem and all tires

are properly inflated, the light will turn off.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-18

(157,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label, you should determine the proper tire

inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver ’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then re main conti nuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low

tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Should the warning light illuminate steadily

after blinking for approximately one min-

ute, have the system inspected by your

nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminate

briefly after the ignition switch is

turned ON or the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute, you should have

your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significant

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the Low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-19

(158,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

If the light illuminates steadily after

blinking for approximately one min-

ute, promptly contact a SU BARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring system

is NOT a substitute for manually

checking tire pressure. The tire

pressure should be checked peri-

odically (at least monthly) using a

tire gauge. After any change to tire

pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-

itoring system will not re-check tire

inflation pressures until the vehicle

is first driven more than 20 mph (32

km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-

sures, increase the vehicle speed to

at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the

TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-

tion pressures. If the tire pressures

are now above the severe low pres-

sure threshold, the low tire pressure

warning light should turn off a few

minutes later. Therefore, be sure to

install the specified size for the front

and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditions

occur, we recommend that you

have the ABS repaired at the first

available opportunity by your

SUBARU dealer.

– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– The warning light illuminates

when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position,

but it does not turn off even

after the vehicle is started.

– The warning light illuminates

during driving.

. When the warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is

off), the ABS function shuts

down. However, the conventional

brake system continues to oper-

ate normally.

The ABS warning light, Vehicle Dynamics

Control warning light, and brake system

warning light illuminate simultaneously if

the EBD system malfunctions. For further

details of the EBD system malfunction

warning, refer to “Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) system warning” F3-

21.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off approximately 2

seconds after the engine has started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light remains illumi-

nated after the engine has been started,

but it turns off while driving.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

When driving with an insufficient battery

voltage such as when the engine is jump

started, the ABS warning light may illumi-

nate. This is due to the low battery voltage

and does not indicate a malfunction. When

the battery becomes fully charged, the

light will turn off.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-20

(159,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Brake system

warning light (red)

This light illuminates with the parking

brake applied while the ignition switch is

in the “ON” position. It turns off when the

parking brake is fully released.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light on is dangerous.

This indicates your brake system

may not be working properly. If

the light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to t he nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

The brake system warning light has the

following functions.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluid

level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of

the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light should

illuminate while driving (with the parking

brake fully released and with the ignition

switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an

indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn

brake pads. If this occurs, immediately

stop the vehicle at the nearest safe

location and check the brake fluid level. If

the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in

the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

the brake system warning light

/ ,

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

and ABS warning light / illuminate

simultaneously during driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-

tional braking system will still function.

However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If the brake system warning light

/ ,

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

and ABS warning light / illuminate

simultaneously, take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

location.

2. Shut down the engine, apply the

parking brake and then restart it.

3. Fully release the parking brake.

4. Even if all the warning lights do not

come back on, the EBD system may have

a possible malfunction. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

5. If all the warning lights stay illuminated

or come back on after approximately 2

seconds, shut down the engine, apply the

parking brake and check the brake fluid

level.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefull y to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”

mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,

have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

! Vacuum pressure system warning

The brake system warning light

/ will

illuminate when the vacuum pressure

sensor is malfunctioning or brake booster

pressure is decreasing.

If the brake warning light continues to

illuminate for several minutes after starting

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-21

(160,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the engine, there may be a malfunction in

the vacuum system. In this case, drive the

vehicle carefully and have the system

inspected by a SUBARU dealer.

& Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light illuminates when

the tank is nearly empty, at approximately

2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal). It only

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-

ever the low fuel warning light

illuminates. Engine misfires as a

result of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Hill start assist warning

light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light

! Hill start assist warning light

While the engine is running, if there are

any malfunctions in the Hill start assist

system, the warning light will illuminate.

WARNING

When the Hill start assist warning

light illuminates, have the vehicle

inspected at an authorized SUBARU

dealer.

! Hill start assist OFF indicator light

While the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the H ill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates continuously to

inform the driver that the Hill start assist

system is not operational.

& Door open warning light

The warning light illuminates if any door or

the rear gate is not fully closed. This

function is effective even if the ignition

switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”

position, or the key is removed from the

ignition switch.

For some models, only the open doors are

indicated by the warning lights.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-

nated before you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn-

ing light (CVT models)

This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with

tires of differing diameters fitted on the

wheels or with an excessively low air

pressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes,

promptly park in a safe location then

check whether all four tires are the

same diameter and whether any of

the tires has a puncture or has lost

air pressure for some other reason.

Continuing to drive with the AWD

warning light flashing can lead to

powertrain damage.

NOTE

If the temporary spare tire is used, the

AWD warning light may flash. Use of the

temporary spare tire should therefore

be restricted to the minimum time

necessary. Replace the temporary

spare tire with a conventional tire as

soon as possible.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-22

(161,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Power steering warning

light

While the engine is running, this warning

light illuminates when a malfunction has

been detected in the electric power steer-

ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

that may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol warning light/Vehicle

Dynamics Control op-

eration indicator light

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning

light

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem provides its ABS control

through the electrical circuit of the

ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system becomes unable to

provide ABS control. As a result, the

Vehicle Dynamics Control system

also becomes inoperative, causing

the warning light to illu minate.

Although both the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system and ABS are inop-

erative in this case, the ordinary

functions of the brake system are

still available. You will be safe while

driving with this condition, but drive

carefully and have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTE

. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system itself mal-

functions, the warning light only illumi-

nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock

BrakeSystem)remainsfullyopera-

tional.

. The warning light illuminates when

the electronic control system of the

ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

malfunctions.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light, ABS warning light, and brake

system warning light illuminate simul-

taneously if the EBD system malfunc-

tions. For further details of the EBD

system malfunction warning, refer to

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-23

(162,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

“Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warning” F3-21.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably inoperative under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The warning light does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

. The warning light illuminates while the

vehicle is running.

NOTE

If the warning light behavior is as

described in the following examples,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

may be considered normal.

. The warning light illuminates when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position and turns off approximately 2

seconds after the engine has started.

. The warning light illuminates right

after the engine is started but turns off

immediately, remaining off.

. The warning light illuminates after

the engine has started and turns off

while the vehicle is subsequently being

driven.

. The warning light illuminates during

driving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.

. The warning light illuminates when

the engine has stalled and continues to

illuminate after the engine has been

restarted. However, it will turn off once

the vehicle starts moving.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light

The indicator light flashes during activation

of the skid suppression function and during

activation of the traction control function.

NOTE

. The light may remain illuminated for

a short period of time after the engine

has been started, especially in cold

weather. This does not indicate the

existence of a problem. The light

should turn off as soon as the engine

has warmed up.

. The indicator light illuminates when

the engine has developed a problem

and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light is on.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under the follow-

ing condition. Have your vehicle checked

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

. The light does not turn off even after the

lapse of several minutes (the engine has

warmed up) after the engine has started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol OFF indicator light

The light illuminates when the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of the

following conditions. Have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. The light does not illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

. The light does not turn off even once

several seconds have elapsed after the

ignition switch has been turned to the “ON”

position.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-24

(163,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Warning chimes and

warning indicator of the

keyless access with

push-button start sys-

tem (if equipped)

Access key warning indicator

The keyless access with push-button start

system sounds a warning chime and

flashes the access key warning indicator

on the combination meter in order to

minimize improper operations and help

protect your vehicle from theft.

When the warning chime sounds and/or

the warning indicator flashes, take the

appropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica-

tor on the push-b utton ign ition

switch is flashing in green when

starting the engine. This indicates

the status that the steering wheel is

not released and could result in an

accident involving serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine again

after the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in green, if the operation

indicator is still flashing in green,

there could be a steering lock

malfunction. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch

flashes in orange, contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE

. Even when the access key fob is

within the operating ranges inside the

vehicle, the access key warning for

engine start may be provided depend-

ing on the status of the access key fob

and the environmental conditions.

. When the access key fob is taken out

of the vehicle through an open window,

the access key fob takeout warning or

passenger access key fob takeout

warning will not be provided.

! List of warnings

CAUTION

When any of the following warnings

occurs even if the access key warn-

ing indicator does not appear, take

the appropriate action.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-25

(164,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding,

ding ...

(intermittent)

——

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is “ACC” (in

CVT models, when the select lever is in

the “P” position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.

*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch was

switched to “ OFF” while the driver’s door

is open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Lockout warning:

An attempt was made to lock all doors

while the access key fob is left inside the

vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

*The doors cannot be locked while the

access key fob is inside the vehicle.

*A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors

will be unlocked.

—

Short beep

(2 seconds)

—

Access key fob lock-in warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

the push-button ignition switch is “OFF”

and the access key fob is inside the

vehicle.

Take out the access key fob from the

vehicle, and lock the doors.

*If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,

the doors cannot be locked.

—

Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep

(5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:

The door lock sensor is touched while the

ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and

one of the doors including the rear gate is

opened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.

*If one of the doors including the rear gate

is opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding

Long beep (60

seconds max.)

—

Power warning:

The door lock sensor was touched while

carrying the access key fob, the push-

button ignition switch is in a position other

than “OFF” (in CVT models, when the

select lever is in the “P” position).

Return the access key fob inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

*If the push-button ignition switch is not

switched to “ OFF”, the doors cannot be

locked.

Ding,

ding ...

(7 seconds)

——

Access key warning:

The vehicle was driven while the access

key fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive the

vehicle.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-26

(165,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Ding ——

Access key warning for engine start:

The push-button ignition switch was

pressed while the access key fob is not

inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press the

push-button ignition switch.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Access key takeout warning:

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key fob and closed the driver’s

door while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” (in CVT

models, when the select lever is in the “P”

position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding

Beep, beep, beep

(3 times)

—

Passenger access key takeout warn-

ing:

A fellow passenger exited the vehicle with

the access key fob and closed a door

other than the driver’s door while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside the

vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition

switch to “OFF”.

Long beep

(continuous)

Long beep

(continuous)

—

Access key takeout without P position

warning (CVT models):

The driver exited the vehicle with the

access key fob and closed the driver’s

door while the push-button ignition switch

is in a position other than “OFF” and the

select lever is in a position other than the

“P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Long beep

(continuous)

——

Select lever position warning (CVT

models):

The engine is turned off by pressing the

push-button ignition switch and the select

lever is in a position other than the “P”

position.

Start the engine, shift the select lever to

the “P” position, switch the push-button

ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the

vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-27

(166,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Inside warning

chime

Outside warning

chime

Operation indicator

on push-button igni-

tion switch

Status Action

Long beep

(continuous)

——

Select lever position warning (CVT

models):

The driver’s door was opened while the

push-button ignition switch is in a position

other than “OFF” and the select lever is in

a position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,

switch the push-button ignition switch to

“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Ding ——The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding —

Flashes in green

(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:

The engine start procedure was per-

formed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right and

left lightly, depress the brake pedal and

press the push-button ignition switch.

Ding —

Flashes in orange

(15 seconds max.)

System malfunction warning:

A malfunction was detected in the power

system or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately

and have the vehicle inspected.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-28

(167,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Security indicator light

This indicator light shows the status of the

alarm system. It also indicates operation of

the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operational

status of the alarm system. For detailed

information, refer to “Alarm system” F2-

24.

! Immobilizer system

The security indicator light starts blinking

in the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the push-button igni-

tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.

. Immediately after the driver’s door is

opened or closed when all of the following

conditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is in

the “ON” or “ACC” position.

– The access key fob is outside the

vehicle.

– The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key is

used (for example, the key is unregistered

or the ID code does not match), the power

is not switched to “ON” and the security

indicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

. Immediately after the key is pulled out.

. Approximately 60 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned from the “ON”

position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the indicator light does not blink in the

above conditions , it may indicate that

immobilizer system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (for

example, an unauthorized duplicate) is

used to start the engine, the securi ty

indicator light illuminates. For details about

the immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi-

lizer” F2-15.

NOTE

. The security indicator light remains

off in the following conditions. It means

that the matching of the ID code is

completed and the immobilizer system

is deactivated, and it does not indicate

a malfunction.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

– while the engine is running

– the push-button ignition switch

has been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC ” position and the driver’s

door has not been opened or closed

Models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”:

– while the engine is running

– when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

– for approximately 60 seconds

after the ignition switch is turned

from the “ON” position to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position

. Even if a malfunction occurs, such

as the security indicator light flashes

irregularly, it will not affect the func-

tionality of the immobilizer system.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-29

(168,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Select lever/gear position in-

dicator (CVT models)

Type A

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

Type B

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of the

select lever.

For models with manual mode, when the

manual mode is selected, the gear position

indicator (which shows the current gear

selection) and the upshift/downshift indi-

cator light up. Refer to “Continuously

variable transmission” F7-24.

& Turn signal indicator

lights

These lights show the operation of the turn

signal or lane change signal.

If the indicator lights do not blink or blink

rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned

out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-36.

& High beam indicator

light

This light shows that the headlights are in

the high beam mode.

This indicator light also illuminates when

the headlight flasher is operated.

& High beam assist indi-

cator light (green) (if

equipped)

This light illuminates when the high beam

assist function is activated. For details

about the high beam assist function, refer

to “High beam assist function” F3-69.

& High beam assist

warning indicator

(yellow) (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the

high beam assist function malfunctions.

When this warning indicator appears, have

your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU

dealer.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-30

(169,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Cruise control indicator

light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the cruise

control main button is pressed to activate

the cruise control function. For details,

refer to “To set cruise control” F7-48.

If this light blinks, do not use the cruise

control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,

contact your SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/

malfunction indicator light illumi-

nates, the cruise control indicator

light flashes at the same time. At this

time, avoid driving at high speed and

have your vehicle inspected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

& Cruise control set indi-

cator light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when vehicle speed

has been set to use the cruise control

function. Refer to “To set cruise control”

F7-48.

& Automatic headlight

beam leveler warning

light (models with LED

headlights)

This light illuminates when the automatic

headlight beam leveler does not operate

normally.

If this light illuminates during driving, have

your vehicle inspected at your SUBARU

dealer.

& LED headlight warning

light (models with LED

headlights)

This light illuminates if the LED headlights

malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected

at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light/

Steering Responsive

Headlight OFF indicator

light (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the Steering

Responsive Headlight OFF switch is

pressed to deactivate the Steering Re-

sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flashes

when a malfunction occurs in the Steering

Responsive Headlight. Refer to “Steering

Responsive Headlight (SRH)” F3-72.

& Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates while the

front fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicator

light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates under the

following conditions.

. when the light switch is turned to the

“

” or “ ” position

. when the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-

nate automatically

& Steering responsive fog

lights warning indicator/

Steering responsive fog

lights OFF indicator (if

equipped)

NOTE

For details about the steering respon-

sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-

ing responsive fog lights system” F3-

74.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-31

(170,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Steering responsive fog lights

warning indicator

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system malfunctions.

When this indicator appears while the

system is activated, contact your SUBARU

dealer for an inspection.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

& X-mode indicator (if

equipped)

This indicator appears while the X-mode is

activated. It will disappear when the X-

mode is deactivated. Refer to “To activate/

deactivate the X-mode” F7-39.

& Hill descent control in-

dicator (if equipped)

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in standby. It will

flash while the hill descent control function

is operating. It will disappear when the hill

descent control function is not available.

Refer to “Hill descent control function” F7-

40.

& BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

This warning indicator appears when the

BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case

the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be

shown on the combination meter display

(color LCD). When this indicator appears,

have your vehicle inspected by your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-

tor (if equipped)

The indicator appears when the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate

the BSD/RCTA. In this case the BSD/

RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA” F7-52.

& RAB warning

indicator (if equipped)

This indicator illuminates if the Reverse

Automatic Braking System malfunctions.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” F7-61.

& RAB OFF indicator light

(if equipped)

This indicator illuminates when the Re-

verse Automatic Braking System is turned

OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic

Braking System is suspended temporarily.

Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking

System” F7-61.

& Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator (if

equipped)

When the outside temperature is 378F

(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning

will illuminate to inform the driver that the

road surface may be frozen.

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature in the area

around the sensor. Therefore, the tem-

perature indication may differ from the

actual outside air temperature.

. The icy road surface warning screen

should be treated only as a guide. Be

sure to check the condition of the road

surface before driving.

. Once the icy road surface warning

screen appears, it will not disappear

unless the outside temperature has

increased to 418F(58C) or higher.

Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator

3-32

(171,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Combination meter display

(color LCD) (if equipped)

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

combinatio n meter display (color

LCD) while the vehicle is in motion.

When operation of the combination

meter display (color LCD) interferes

with your ability to concentrate on

driving, stop t he vehicle before

performing operations on the

screen. Also, do not concentrate on

the display while driving. Doing so

may cause you to look away from the

road and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on the

combination meter display (color LCD).

Also, a warning message will appear on

the di splay if a malfunc tion, etc. is

detected. In addition, several settings for

the displayed content can be performed.

Combination meter display (color LCD)

1) ECO gauge

2) Warning screen (refer to “War ning

screen” F3-35.)/Basic screen (refer to

“Basic screens” F3-36.)

3) EyeSight screen

4) Cruise control information display

5) Telltale screen (refer to “Telltale screen”

F3-35.)

6) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer

to “Select lever/gear position indicator

(CVT models) ” F3-30.)

7) X-mode indicator (if equipped) (refer to

“X-mode indicator” F3-32.)

8) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-9.)/

double trip meter (refer to “Double trip

meter” F3-9.)

9) Fuel gauge (refer to “Fuel gauge” F3-

10.)

A: Deactivating the Eyesight system or

models without the Eyesight system

B: Activating the Eyesight system

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-33

(172,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Basic operation

Control switch

(Up)

/SET (enter)

(Down)

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control

switch, the screens and selection items

can be switched. When the “

/SET”

switch is pulled toward you, the item can

be selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, such

as vehicle information, warning informa-

tion, etc., they will interrupt the current

screen, and appear on the display accom-

panied by a beep. If such a screen is

displayed, take proper action according to

the message shown on the screen.

The warning sc reen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. While

the “

” information reminder is shown on

the display, it may be possible to display

the warning screen again. To recall the

message marked with “

” on the display,

pull the “

/SET” switch on the steering

wheel toward you.

NOTE

When the multi-function display (color

LCD) is set to the setting screen, the

combination meter display (color LCD)

cannot be controlled pressing on the

“

”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the control

switch.

& Welcome screen and Good-

bye screen

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed after unlocking the door, the wel-

come screen will appear on the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD) for approxi-

mately 20 seconds.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination

meter display (color LCD) gradually turns

off (Good-bye screen).

NOTE

. Once the welcome screen appears, it

takes a certain period of time to display

it again.

. If the ignition switch is operated

after unlocking the driver’s door, the

welcome screen will not appear even

when the driver’s door is opened and

closed.

. The welcome screen will disappear

when you lock the driver ’s door by

using the remote keyless entry system

(all models) or the keyl ess access

function (if equipped) while the wel-

come screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen including the

multi-function display (color LCD) (if

equipped) and the audio/navigation

unit can be set to on or off. For details,

refer to “Welcome Screen” F3-41.

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-34

(173,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Warning screen

Example of warning

If there is a warning message or a

maintenance notification, it will appear on

this screen. Take the appropriate actions

based on the messages indicated.

& Telltale screen

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,

the following telltales will be displayed on

the telltale screen.

NOTE

When there is warning information to

display, it will be displayed in five

warning indicators, starting on the left

in ascending order of severity. If there

are six or more warning information

displayed, pull the “

/SET” switch and

check the item.

Mark Name Page

Door open indicator 3-22

LED headlight warning

indicator (if equipped)

3-31

High beam assist indi-

cator (green) (if

equipped)

3-30

Steering Responsive

Headlight warning light

(if equipped)

3-31

Engine low oil level

warning indicator

3-18

RAB warning indicator

(if equipped)

3-32

RAB OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-32

BSD/RCTA warning in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-32

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-

cator (if equipped)

3-32

Automatic headlight

beam leveler system

malfunction warning

(models with LED

headlights)

3-31

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-35

(174,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Mark Name Page

Steering responsive fog

lights OFF indicator (if

equipped)

3-31

High beam assist warn-

ing indicator (yellow) (if

equipped)

3-30

Windshield washer fluid

warning indicator

3-18

Hill descent control in-

dicator (if equipped)

3-32

Icy road surface warn-

ing indicator

3-32

& Basic screens

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can change the screen

that is always displayed.

Average fuel consumption screen:

: Average fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate of

fuel consumption since the trip meter was

last reset.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption

: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-36

(175,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Driving information screen:

: Journey time

: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (the

time that has elapsed since the ignition

switch was turned to the “ON” position)

and journey distance (the distance that

has been driven since the ignition switch

was turned to the “ON” position).

Digital speed screen:

1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)

2) Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehicle

speed.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

This screen displays each tire pressure.

When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire

and the tire pressure will be displayed on

the screen in yellow.

NOTE

The tire pressure values are displayed

several minutes after driving.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-37

(176,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull and hold

the “

/SET” switch to enter the menu

screen.

& Menu screens

Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter

the menu screens when all of the following

conditions are satisfied.

. The menu screen entering screen is

selected.

. The “

” information reminder is off.

NOTE

While driving, the setting items avail-

able on the combination meter display

(color LCD) are limited.

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-38

(177,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The menu list is as follows.

1st menu

2nd menu 3rd menu

Screen Settings Welcome Screen ―

Good-bye Screen ―

Gauge Initial Movement ―

Units ―

Tire Pressure Units (if equipped) ―

Languages ―

Warning Volume* (if equipped)

――

EyeSight (models with EyeSight system) Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound ―

Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function ―

Cruise Control Acceleration Characteristics* ―

RAB (if equipped) Sonar Audible Alarm ―

*: You can also set this while driving.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-39

(178,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1st menu

2nd menu 3rd menu

Vehicle Setting Keyless Entry System Audible Signal (if equipped)

Hazard Warning Flasher

Security Relocking (if equipped)

Driver Door Unlock (if equipped)

Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped)

Defogger ―

Interior Light ―

Auto Light Sensor (if equipped) ―

Welcome Lighting (if equipped) Approaching Time Set

Leaving Time Set

One-touch lane changer ―

Default Settings

――

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-40

(179,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the

steering wheel, you can select the menu.

Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

NOTE

If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the

system will return to the previous

screen.

! Screen Settings

After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Welcome Screen

The welcome screen can be activated or

deactivated.

! Good-bye Screen

The good-bye screen can be activated or

deactivated.

! Gauge Initial Movement

The movement of the meter needles and

gauge needles that occurs when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position can be activated or deactivated.

! Units

Changes the units displayed in the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD), the type

A multi-function display (black and white)

and the type B multi-function display (color

LCD).

! Tire Pressure Units (if equipped)

Changes the units displayed in the Tire

Pressure Monitoring system.

! Languages

Changes the language displayed in the

combination meter display (color LCD)

and the multi-function display (color LCD).

! Warning Volume (if equipped)

Sets the EyeSight warning volume, the

BSD/RCTA warning volume and the RAB

warning volume.

! EyeSight (models with EyeSight

system)

NOTE

For models with the EyeSight system,

refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

! RAB (models with EyeSight system)

The Sonar Audible Alarm can be set to on

or off.

NOTE

For models with Reverse Automatic

Braking system, refer to “Reverse

Automatic Braking System” F7-61.

! Sonar Audible Alarm

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

system is in operation, the warning sound

to notify that an obstacle is detected in the

rear can be activated or deactivated.

! Vehicle Setting

After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,

select one of the following menus.

! Keyless Entry System

Sets the settings used when the keyless

access function was operated.

. Audible Signal (if equipped)

Sets the electronic chirp that sounds when

the door is locked or unlocked.

. Hazard Warning Flasher

Sets the operation of the hazard warning

flasher that blinks when the door is locked

or unlocked.

. Security Relocking (if equipped)

The automatic locking operation period

can be se t or customized. Select the

preferred seconds to customize the opera-

tion period.

. Driver Door Unlock (if equipped)

Select only the driver’s door to unlock or all

doors to unlock simultaneously when the

driver’s door is unlocked.

. Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped)

Select only the rear gate to unlock or all

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Combination meter display (color LCD)

3-41

(180,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

doors to unloc k simulta neousl y when

accessing from the cargo area.

! Defogger

Sets and customizes the operation of the

defogger.

! Interior Light

Sets and customizes the interior light off

delay timer.

! Auto Light Sensor (if equipped)

Sets and customizes the sensitivity of the

auto light sensor.

! Welcome Lighting (if equipped)

Sets the leaving time and approaching

time.

. Approaching time set

Sets the illumination time of the headlights

that illuminate when you approach the

vehicle.

. Leaving time set

Sets the time until the headlights turn off

when you have moved away from the

vehicle.

! One-touch lane changer

Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.

! Default Settings

Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to

restore customized settings to the factory

default settings. Select “No” to return to the

previous screen without restoring to the

factory default settings.

Multi-function display (black

and white)

NOTE

For models with multi-function display

(color LCD), refer to “Mu lti-function

display (color LCD)” F3-47.

1) Outside temperature indicator

2) X-mode indicator (if equipped)

3) Driving information display

4) Clock

With the ignition switch in the “ACC”

position, the clock appears on the display.

With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion, the outside temperature indicator,

driving information display and clock all

appear on the display.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)

3-42

(181,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

NOTE

The indicated values vary in accor-

dance with changes in the vehicle’s

running conditions. Also, the indicated

values may differ slightly from the

actual values and should thus be

treated only as a guide.

& Driving information display

NOTE

You can set the units for both the multi-

function display (black and white) and

the c ombination meter a t the same

time. For details about setting the

language and units, refer to “Type A

combination meter” F3-11 or “Menu

screens” F3-38.

! How to change the information dis-

play

1) INFO button

Pressing the INFO button on the steering

wheel switches the display in the following

sequence.

*: models without combination meter dis-

play (color LCD)

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)

3-43

(182,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Driving range on remaining fuel

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH

2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

The driving range indicates the distance

that can be driven taking into account the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank and

the average rate of fuel consumption.

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH

2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

If the driving range is shown as “ ”, there

is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

! Average fuel consumption

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of

fuel

2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel

3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100

This display shows the average rate of fuel

consumption since the trip meter was last

reset.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)

3-44

(183,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) TRIP RESET switch

Press the TRIP RESET switch to switch

between the displays for the average fuel

consumption that corresponds to the A trip

meter mileage and the average fuel con-

sumption that corresponds to the B trip

meter mileage.

When the trip meter displays is reset, the

corresponding average fuel consumption

value is also reset.

NOTE

. When the trip meter display is reset,

the average fuel consumption corre-

sponding to that trip meter display is

not shown until the vehicle has subse-

quently covered a distance of 1 mile (or

1 km).

. The units for measuring average fuel

consumption cannot be changed.

! Current fuel consumption

1) Displays the driving range per gallon of

fuel

2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel

3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100

This indi cation shows the rate of fuel

consumption at the present moment.

! Journey time (models without com-

bination meter display (color LCD))

The journey time shows the time that has

elapsed since the ignition switch was

turned to the “ON” position.

The journey time indication flashes each

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)

3-45

(184,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

time a complete hour has elapsed. If the

display is giving a reading other than the

journey time, the display switches to the

journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and

returns to its original reading each time a

complete hour has elapsed.

NOTE

The journey time is reset when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

! Average vehicle speed

1) When units in miles is selected

2) When units in km is selected

This display shows the average vehicle

speed since the trip meter was last reset.

Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles

the display between the average vehicle

speed corresponding to the A trip meter

display and the average vehicle speed

corresponding to the B trip meter display.

When either of the trip meter displays is

reset, the corresponding average vehicle

speed value is also reset.

NOTE

When either trip meter display is reset,

the average vehicle speed correspond-

ing to that trip meter display is not

shown until the vehicle has subse-

quently covered a distance of 1 mile

(or 1 km).

! Turn off display of driving informa-

tion display

Select the blank space in the menu to exit

the driving information display selection.

NOTE

. The average fuel consumption and

average vehicle speed are calculated

even while the driving information dis-

play is not displayed.

. Even if you turn off the driving

information displa y, the display will

automatically turn on when the battery

voltage is disconnected and then re-

connected for battery replacement or

fuse replacement.

& Outside temperature indica-

tor

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Except U.S.-spec. models

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-

dication may differ from the actual

outside air temperature.

. The temperature unit cannot be

changed.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (black and white)

3-46

(185,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Road surface freeze warning indi-

cation

1) U.S.-spec. models

2) Except U.S.-spec. models

When the outside temperature drops to a

certain temperature or lower, the tempera-

ture indication flashes for 5 seconds to

show that the road surface may be frozen.

If the display is already indicating that the

outside tempera ture is low whe n the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, the indication does not flash.

NOTE

The outside temperature indication

may differ from the actual outside

temperature. The road surface freeze

warning indication should be treated

only as a guide. Be sure to check the

condition of the road surface before

driving.

& X-mode indicator (if

equipped)

This indicator will be shown while the X-

mode is activated. It will turn off when the

X-mode is deactivated.

& Clock

For details about clock setting, refer to

“Clock” F3-63.

Multi-function display (color

LCD) (if equipped)

NOTE

For models with multi-function display

(black and white), refer to “Multi-func-

tion display (black and white)” F3-42.

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention to

safe driving when operating the

multi-function display (color LCD)

while the vehicle is in motion. When

operation of the multi-function dis-

play (color LCD) is disturbing your

awareness and ability to concen-

trate on driving, stop the vehicle in

a safe place before performing op-

erations on the screen. Also, do not

concentrate on the display while

driving. Doing so may cause you to

look away from the road and could

result in an accident.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-47

(186,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Features

The multi-function display (color LCD) has

the following functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages, such

as notification, etc.

3-49

Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel

consumption screen, etc.)

3-50

Sets and adjusts maintenance

notification

3-61

Also, the multi-function display (color LCD)

can also be used to set and initialize the

multi-function display (color LCD) itself.

NOTE

. When the vehicle is in motion,

certain functions and selections may

not be available.

. You can set the language and units

for both the multi-function display

(color LCD) and the combination meter

at the same time. For details about

setting the language and units, refer to

“Menu screens” F3-38.

. The images displayed in this Own-

er ’s Manual are sample images. The

actual image may vary depending on

the market and vehicle specifications.

& Welcome screen

When the driver’s door is opened and

closed, the welcome screen will appear for

a short time.

NOTE

. The welcome screen will disappear

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position while the welcome

screen is displayed.

. The welcome screen can be set to on

or off. For de tails, refer to “Screen

Settings” F3-41.

. For a certain period of time after the

welcome screen has once appeared, it

may not appear again even when the

driver’s door is o pened and closed

again. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

& Self-check screen

NOTE

When the setting is “On”, the self check

screen appears. For details about this

setting, refer to “On/Off setting” F3-61.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will

be performed. The screens corresponding

to the following items will appear one after

another for several seconds each.

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine

oil replacement.

2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter

replacement.

3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.

4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

When the checks are performed, the color

of the icon corresponding to the checked

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-48

(187,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

item will change.

If there is a notification, the message will

be displayed. Take the appropriate actions

based on the message indicated.

After the self-check is completed, today’s

date, the stored birthday or the stored

anniversary is displayed.

NOTE

. After performing the maintenance,

change the setting of the correspond-

ing maintenance item. For details, refer

to “Maintenance settings” F3-61.

. The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed under either of the

following conditions.

– The period of time remaining until

the registered notification date is 15

days or less.

– The total driving distance remain-

ing until the registered notification

distance is approximately 311 miles

(500 km) or less.

. The maintenance notification screen

will be displayed until either of the

following conditions is satisfied.

– The period of time passed after

the registered notification date is 15

days or more.

– The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance is

approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

more.

& Interruption screen

Example

Useful messages, such as reminder in-

formation, weather information (if

equipped) and traffic information (if

equipped) may interrupt the current screen

and appear on the display accompanied

by a beep. Take proper action according to

the message.

The interruption screen will return to the

original screen after a few seconds. Also,

you can press the INFO button to skip the

interruption screen.

& Basic operation

Control switch

1) INFO button

3) /SET

Press the INFO button on the steering

wheel to switch the item displayed on the

basic screen. You can operate the items

on the setting screen by using the “

”,

“

” and “ /SET” switches.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-49

(188,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Basic screens

1) Clock

2) Climate control*

3) Outside temperature

4) Information screen

*: This is not displayed on the multi-function

display (color LCD) when the ignition switch

is in the “ACC” position.

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or

“ON” position, the basic screen will be

displayed.

! Outside temperature indicator

The outside temperature is displayed on

the multi-function display (color LCD).

NOTE

. The outside temperature indicator

shows the temperature around the

sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-

dication may differ from the actual

outside air temperature.

. The temperature unit cannot be

changed.

! Climate control screen

The climate control status is displayed on

the multi-function display (color LCD).

Climate control screen

1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)

2) FULL AUTO indicator

3) AUTO indicator

4) Airflow mode indicator

5) Set temperature indicator (right-hand

side)*

6) Air inlet selection indicator

7) SYNC indicator*

8) Fan speed indicator

9) Air conditioner ON indicator

*1: Models with the SYNC function only

When operating the climate control sys-

tem, the basic screen switches to the

climate control screen. For details about

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-50

(189,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

climate control operation, refer to “Climate

control panel” F4-2.

! Clock

The clock can be displayed in either 12-

hour display or 24-hour display. For details

about the setting, refer to“Clock” F3-63.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-51

(190,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Information screen

Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.

Content Description Page

Electric components operating status screen

Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 3-53

Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 3-53

EyeSight screen*

Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 3-54

Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 3-54

Weather information screen*

Displays weather information. 3-55

Traffic information*

/Navigation*

screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 3-55

Audio screen Displays audio system information. 3-56

Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 3-56

Clock screen Displays the clock. 3-56

Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen.

3-57

*1: Models with EyeSight system

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

*3: Models with navigation system

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-52

(191,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Electric components operation

screen

1) Lane Departure/Sway Warning indica-

tor*

2) Pre-Collision Braking System indicator*

3) Stop lights

4) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)*

5) BSD/RCTA*

6) Headlights*

7) Front fog lights*

8) Turn signals

9) Auto on/off headlights*

*1: If equipped

*2: The daytime running lights are not dis-

played.

This screen displays the electric compo-

nents operation status of the vehicle.

NOTE

. Indicators do not display for func-

tions that are not equipped to the

vehicle.

. The indicators of functions that are

not operating are displayed in grey.

. For models with auto on/off head-

lights; If the multi-function display

(color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse is

removed, the Auto on/off headlights

indicator turns off on the multi-function

display (color LCD). After reinstalling

the removed multi-funct ion display

(color LCD) unit, battery, or fuse to the

vehicle, the Auto on/off headlights

indicator will appear once more if the

light control switch is turned to the

“AUTO” position.

. The exterior lights indicators on the

screen do not notify the driver when the

bulbs burn out. The indicators on the

screen still illuminate.

! Prevention safety screen

1) Telltale screen

2) Steering angle

3) Vehicle posture

4) Running condition

This screen displays the driving status of

the vehicle and the operation status func-

tions. For functions that are operating, the

indicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE

. The vehicle posture indication may

differ from the actual vehicle posture.

. When X-mode has turned on, the

screen of the multi-function display is

switched to the prevention safety

screen.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-53

(192,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! EyeSight screen (models with

EyeSight system)

1) Lead vehicle indicator

2) Your own vehicle indicator

3) Stop lights

4) Road line indicator

5) Lane indicator

This screen displays the status of the

EyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-

tor moves forward and backward depend-

ing on the distance with the vehicle in front.

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual

supplement for the EyeSight system.

! Favorite screen

Favorite screen (display example)

This screen displays up to three optional

pieces of information that can be selected

from the following items.

Item Details

The engine coolant temperature is

displayed.

The engine oil temperature is

displayed.

The average vehicle speed is

displayed.

The accelerator opening ratio is

displayed.

The vehicle posture is displayed.

The current rate of fuel consump-

tion is displayed.

The direction of the vehicle is

displayed.*

The weather information is dis-

played.*

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-54

(193,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Item Details

The posted speed limit of the road

you are currently driving on is

displayed.*

The calender is displayed.

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped

*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTE

Some displayed items may be not

displayed depending on the model

and specifications.

The items shown in the favorite screen can

be changed. For details, refer to “Favorite

setting” F3-60.

! Weather information screen (if

equipped)

1) Weather information for the destination.*

2) Weather information for the current loca-

tion.

*: Only when a destination is set in the

navigation system

The weather information is displayed on

the screen.

NOTE

. When all of the following conditions

are satisfied, weather information is

displayed.

– The vehicle is equipped with an

audio and navigation system for

SiriusXM satellite radio.

– You have a current SiriusXM

satellite radio subscription.

. The weather f orecast for the set

destination remains displayed until a

new destination is set or until you reach

the destination.

. Depending on the reception timing

of XM, the display of weather informa-

tion may be delayed.

! Navigation screen (models with

navigation system)

The navigation system information to the

destination is displayed on the screen.

NOTE

When a destination is not set in the

navigation system, the compass orien-

tation, name, route sign and speed limit

of the road the vehicle is traveling on

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-55

(194,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

remain displayed on the screen.

! Audio screen

The screen of the currently selected audio

source is displayed.

For details about how to use the audio set,

refer to the s eparate navigati on/audi o

Owner’s Manual.

! Fuel consumption screen

1) Driving range on remaining fuel

2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter

3) Current fuel consumption

The fuel consumption information is dis-

played on the screen.

NOTE

The driving range on remaining fuel is

only a guide. The indicated value may

differ from the actual driving range on

remaining fuel, so you must immedi-

ately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

! Clock/date screen

The time and date are displayed.

You can adjust the time and date. For

details, refer to “ Clock” F3-63.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-56

(195,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Guidance screen

When the INFO button on the steering

wheel is pressed and held on this screen,

the setting screen can be displayed.

For details, refer to “Setting screen” F3-

57.

NOTE

When the combination meter display

(color LCD) is displaying the menu

screen entering screen, the system will

not move to the setting screen even if

the INFO button is pressed and held.

& Setting screen

1. Press and hold the INFO button on the

guidance screen. The top menu is dis-

played.

2. Op erate the “

” or “ ” switch to

select the preferred menu from the top

menu.

3. Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

4. Op erate the “

” or “ ” switch to

select the preferred menu from the 2nd

menu.

5. Pull the “

/SET” switch to enter the

selected menu.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-57

(196,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The menu list is as follows.

Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Time/Date

Time/Date* Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-59

Birthday Set a birthday. 3-59

Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-59

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Display/Beep

Screen Off* Turn the screen on or off. Yes or No 3-59

Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 3-60

Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-60

Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-60

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Maintenance

Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-61

Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-61

Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-61

Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-61

ON/OFF

Turn on or off the self-check screen that is

activated when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

On or Off 3-61

Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-61

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Initialize

— Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-62

Go Back

— Return to the setting screen.

—

*: You can also set this while driving.

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-58

(197,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Date and time settings

You can set the date, time and 12h or 24h

format settings.

! Current date and time setting

For details about clock setting, refer to

“Clock” F3-63.

! Birthday setting

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,

a message will be displayed when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position. This function can be set to on or

off. For details, refer to “Bypass screen

setting” F3-60.

1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu in

the setting screen. Refer t o “Setting

screen” F3-57.

2. Select from the list the number that you

want to register.

3. Enter the date and the text by using the

control switches.

4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

You can store a maximum of 5 birth-

days.

! Anniversary setting

1. The procedure for setting an anniver-

sary is the same as “Birthday setting” F3-

59, except that in step 1 “Anniversary” is

selected.

NOTE

You can store a maximum of 5 anniver-

saries.

! Display/Beep settings

You can set the display settings and

volume settings.

! Screen OFF setting

1. Select “ Screen Off” from the 2nd menu

in setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”

F3-57.

2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.

Select “No” to return to the previous

screen.

Restoring the screen

When the INFO button is operated after

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-59

(198,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position, the screen will be restored.

The screen will be restored with the basic

screen that was d isplayed when the

screen was turned off.

NOTE

While the screen is off, the screen

switches to the climate control screen

only when the climate control system is

operated.

! Favorite setting

1. Select the “Favo rite” from the 2nd

menu in setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” F3-57.

2. Set the desired items by using the

control switches. For details about items,

refer to “Favorite screen” F3-54.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

. You can display a maximum of the 3

items.

. The same item cannot be selected

for the left, center or right location.

. Weather informatio n for 3 hours

later or 6 hours later can be displayed.

! Bypass screen setting

1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2nd

menu in the setting screen. Refer to

“Setting screen” F3-57.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the display

of items on or off by using the control

switches.

3. Select “Set ” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

Traffic information setting is only dis-

played for the audio unit with SiriusXM

satellite radio.

! Beep setting

1. Select “Beep” from the 2nd menu in the

setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”

F3-57.

2. Set the beep volume by using the

control switches.

3. Select “Set ” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-60

(199,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

without applying the setting changes.

! Maintenance settings

You can set maintenance reminders.

! Engine oil setting

1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menu

in the setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” F3-57.

2. Set the date and distance of the

reminder by using the control switches.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select

“Update” to change the notification dis-

tance to the default value. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

NOTE

. The reminder will be displayed by

either date or distance in accordance

with the setting.

. Even when either “Day” or “Dis-

tance” are displayed as “__” a pop-up

screen will appear.

. The reminder will be displayed until

either of the following conditions is

satisfied.

– The period of time passed after

the registered notification date is 15

days or more.

– The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance is

approximately 311 miles (500 km) or

more.

! Oil filter setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” F3-61, but select the

“Oil Filter” item in step 1.

! Tires setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” F3-61, but select the

“Tires” item in step 1.

! Maintenance schedule setting

The setting procedure is the same as

“Engine oil setting” F3-61, but select the

“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.

! On/Off setting

1. Select “On/Off” from the 2nd menu on

the setting screen. Refer to “Setting

screen” F3-57.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the opening

screen on or off by using the control

switches.

3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “Go

Back” to return to the previous screen

without applying the setting changes.

! Clear setting

1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2nd

menu on the setting screen. Refer to

“Setting screen” F3-57.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-61

(200,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.

! Initialize

You can initialize the items that have been

set to your preference.

1. Select “Initialize” from the 2nd menu on

the setting screen. Refer t o “Setting

screen” F3-57.

2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using the

control switches.

& How to get the source code

using the open source

Free/Open Source Software Information

This product contains Free/Open Source

Software (FOSS).

The license information and/or the source

code of such FOSS can be found at the

following URL.

http://www.g lobaldenso.com/en/open-

source/ivi/subaru/

Instruments and controls/Multi-function display (color LCD)

3-62

(201,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Clock

For models with a SUBARU genuine

navigation and/or audio system, the clock

can be adjusted using either auto mode or

manual mode.

. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment

. Manual mode: manual clock adjust-

ment

& Setting the clock manually

! Type A multi-function display (black

and white)

1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.

4. Select “Vehicle”.

5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then

select “Manual”.

6. Press the “+” button or the “−” button

beside the clock.

! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-

play

The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour

display. Perform the following procedure to

switch the display format.

1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

2. Press and hold the “−” button located

near the clock display for approximately 5

seconds. The clock display will then start

to flash.

3. While the clock display is flashing,

press and hold the “+” button for approxi-

mately 2 seconds. The clock format will

then change.

4. The clock display will continue to flash

for approximately 3 seconds to indicate

that the clock display has been changed.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Clock

3-63

(202,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Type B multi-function display (color

LCD)

NOTE

When the combination meter display

(color LCD) is displaying the menu

screen entering screen, the system will

not move to the selection screen even if

the “INFO” button is pressed and held.

Before adjusting the clock, be sure to

change the combination meter display

(color LCD) to a screen other than the

menu screen entering screen.

1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Press the button.

3. Select “Settings”.

4. Select “Vehicle”.

5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then

select “Manual”.

1) “INFO” button

6. Press the “INFO” button on the steer-

ing wheel to display the guidance screen.

7. While displaying the guidance screen,

press and hold the “INFO” button on the

steering wheel. The screen goes to the

selection screen.

Instruments and controls/Clock

3-64

(203,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

2) /SET

8. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switch to select the

item.

9. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET

switch.

10. Select “Time/Date” and pull the /SET

switch.

NOTE

If “Clock adjustment” is not in manual

mode, “Time/Date” cannot be selected.

Be sure to perform steps 2 through 5.

11. Pull the “ ”, “ ” switches to scroll

through to the items you can set.

(1) Use the

/ SET switch to choose

the item you would like to change.

(2) Pull the “

”, “ ” switches to

adjust the items.

12. Select “Set” and pull the

/SET switch

to complete the clock setting.

Select “Go Back” to return to the previous

screen without saving settings.

NOTE

The Birthday/Anniversary and mainte-

nance reminder system function are

based on the time and date on the

multifunction display (color LCD).

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Clock

3-65

(204,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Setting the clock automati-

cally

1. Press the button.

2. Select “Settings”.

3. Select “Vehicle”.

4. Select “Clock adjustment” and then

select “Auto”.

5. Press the

button again to complete

the setting.

! Models with navigation system

The clock will be set automatically where a

GPS signal is available.

! Models without navigation system

The clock will be set and adjusted auto-

matically when a smartphone is connected

via Bluetooth

for transferring phonebook

data.

1. Register the smartphone to the audio

system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth

SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-

tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-

TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s

Manual for the audio/navigation system.

The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTE

Depending on the model of smart-

phone, the settings of the connected

smartphone may need to be changed.

(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-

tion settings may need to be activated.)

For details, check the instructions on

connecting smartphones.

& Regulatory information

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc.

Light control switch

& Precautions and tips

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long period

of time while the engine is not

running can cause the battery to

discharge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, make

sure that the lights are turned off.

If the vehicle is left unattended

for a long time with the lights

illuminated, the battery may be

discharged.

NOTE

. Even if the key is removed from the

ignition switch, the lights can be illumi-

nated by operating the light control

switch from the “

” (off) position to the

“

” or “ ” position.

. If the driver’s door is opened while

the lights are illuminated and the key is

removed from the ignition switch, the

chirp sound will inform the driver that

the lights are illuminated.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

3-66

(205,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on

the end of the turn signal lever.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, headlights,

parking lights, front side marker lights, rear

side marker lights, tail lights and license

plate lights are on.

“

” position:

Instrument panel illumination, parking

lights, front side marker lights, rear side

marker lights, tail lights and license plate

lights are on.

“

” position (if equipped):

. Auto on/off headlights

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, the instrument panel illumination,

headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are automatically

on or off depending on the level of the

ambient light.

NOTE

The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-

lights can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer

for details. Also, for models with a

combination meter display (color

LCD), the setting can be changed using

the display. For details, refer to “Vehicle

Setting” F3-41.

. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights

While the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-

matically turn on when the windshield

wipers operate several times. The head-

lights will automatically turn off when the

wipers stop.

NOTE

The ON/OFF setting of this function can

be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

“

” position:

The headlights are all off.

! Welcome lighting function (if

equipped)

The welcome lighting function turns on the

low beam headlight for smooth approach-

ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or

in a dark place.

The function is activated while all of the

following conditions are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/

off headlights

When approaching:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

automatically illuminate when unlocking

the doors and the rear gate by using the

remote keyless entry system.

The low beam headlights will remain

illuminated for 30 seconds

and then turn

off. However, if any of the fo llowing

operations is done, the low beam head-

lights will turn off.

. The doors are locked.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

3-67

(206,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

When exiting:

While the welcome lighting function is

activated, the low beam headlights will

remain illuminated even when either of the

following operation is done.

. T he push- button i gnition s witch is

turned to the “OFF” status (models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system”)

. The key is pulled out from the ignition

switch (models without “keyless access

with push-button start system”)

The low beam headlights will turn off under

any of the following conditions.

. 3 minutes have passed since the low

beam headlights were illuminated by the

welcome lighting function.

. 30 seconds have passed since the door

is opened and closed.

. The light control switch is turned to a

position other than “AUTO”.

. The locking procedure is performed

twice. When performing the unlocking

proce dure after performing the locking

procedure, perform the locking procedure

twice again.

*1: The setting for the period of time in which the

low beam headlights remain on by the welcome

lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-

tails.

! Sensor for the auto on/off head-

lights (if equipped)

The sensor is on the instrument panel as

shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near the

sensor, the sensor may not detect

the level of the ambient light cor-

rectly and the auto on/off headlights

may not operate properly.

& High/low beam change

(dimmer)

1) High beam

2) Low beam

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter is also on.

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

3-68

(207,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashing

position for more than just a few

seconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

toward you and then release it. The high

beam will stay on for as long as you hold

the lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, the

high beam indicator light “

” on the

combination meter also illuminates.

& High beam assist function (if

equipped)

NOTE

. The high beam assist function uti-

lizes the stereo camera installed at the

position of the front map lights.

. For details on how to handle the

stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s

Manual supplement for the EyeSight

system.

The high beam assist function automati-

cally changes the headlight from high

beam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions are

met, the headlight will change to high

beam.

. When the vehicle speed increases to or

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

. There is no preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.

. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions is

met, the headlight will change to low beam.

. When the vehicle speed decreases to

or below 10 mph (16 km/h).

. When the forward area of the vehicle is

bright.

. When there is a preceding or oncoming

vehicle.

. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-

tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE

The factory setting (default setting) for

this function is set as “operational”.

This setting can be changed to OFF

(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.

For more details, contact a SUBARU

dealer.

! How to use the high beam assist

function

The high beam assist function will be

activated when all the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

position and the low beam headlights are

on automatically.

. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

3-69

(208,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

High beam assist indicator

When the high beam assist function is

activated, the high beam assist indicator

light (green) on the combination meter will

illuminate.

NOTE

If the high beam assist function is

malfunctioning or is temporarily

stopped, the headlight will be fixed at

low beam.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-

tivity of the high beam assist func-

tion

The sensitivity of the high beam assist

function can be lowered by performing the

following operations.

1. Before turning the ignition switch to the

“ON” position, set the light control switch to

the “AUTO” position and push the signal

lever forward (high beam position).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and within approximately 15 sec-

onds, press the “

/ ” (following distance

setting) switch more than 10 times con-

secutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beam

assist function is lowered, the high beam

assist indicator light “

” (yellow) on the

combination meter will flash.

NOTE

. The sensitivity of the high b eam

assist function cannot be lowered in

the following conditions.

– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise

Control is in operation

– The EyeSight warning indicator

(yellow) is illuminated

. The sensitivity of the high b eam

assist function returns to normal level

the next time the ignition switch is

turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position

and the engine is restarted.

! How to change the headlight mode

manually

Change to the low beam:

When you return the turn signal lever to the

center position, the high beam assist

function will turn off and the high beam

assist indicator light (green) will turn off.

Change to the high beam:

When you turn the light control switch to

the “

” position, the headlight mode will

be changed to the high beam.

At this time, the high beam assist function

will turn off, the high beam assist indicator

(green) will turn off and the high beam

indicator light will turn on.

NOTE

. After manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

on the high beam assist function,

return the light control switch to the

“AUTO” position.

. When manually changing the head-

light mode to the high beam, if you turn

the light control switch to the “

”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, parking lights, front side marker

lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

3-70

(209,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

and license plate lights will be on.

! Tips for the high beam assist sys-

tem

. The high beam assist function recog-

nizes the conditions surrounding the ve-

hicle based on the brightness of illumina-

tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore,

the headlight mode may switch in some

situations that do not match to the driver ’s

sense.

. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be

detected.

. Under the fo llowing situati ons, the

brightness of ambient illumination may

not be detected correctly and the high

beam assist function may not work prop-

erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam

maydisturbtheoncomingvehicleor

vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode

may continue although there are no

oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.

In the such cases, change the headlight

mode manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand

storm, heavy rain, etc.).

– When the windshield glass is dirty or

fogged.

– When the windshield is cracked or

damaged.

– Whenthestereocameraisde-

formed or the stereo camera lenses

are dirty.

– If there are lights similar to the

headlights or the tail ligh ts in the

surrounding area.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead is driven without its head-

lights and tail lights on.

– If the headlights of an oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the

light beams are not aimed correctly.

– When a rapid change of brightness

continues while driving.

– When driving on a road with many

ups and downs or uneven surfaces.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When there are some objects that

reflect light strongly, such as a road

sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.

– When the rear part of the vehicle

ahead, such as a container, reflects

light strongly.

– When the headlights of your vehicle

are damaged or dirty.

– When your vehicle is tilted, such as

in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is

being towed.

– Immediately after the engine has

started.

. In the following conditions, the head-

light mode will not be automatically chan-

ged from the high beam to the low beam.

– When your vehicle passes an on-

coming veh icle suddenly in a blind

curve.

– When another vehicle passes in

front of your vehicle.

– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-

hicle ahead comes in and out of view

because of continuous curves, median

strips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light of

the front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,

the headlight mode may change from the

high beam to the low beam automatically.

. The headlight mode may change from

the high beam to the low beam, or the low

beam mode may continue, when affected

by a street light, traffic signal, illumination

of an advertisement board, or a reflective

object such as a road sign and signboard.

. The timing of the change of headlight

mode may differ due to the following

factors.

– Color or brightness of the headlights

of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights

of a vehicle ahead.

– The headlights of the oncoming

vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle

ahead are covered with mud, snow,

etc.

– Movement and direction of an on-

coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Light control switch

3-71

(210,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

– When the headlights of an oncom-

ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle

ahead illuminate on only one side.

– When the oncoming vehicle or

vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.

– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,

road surface, etc.).

– Number of passengers and weight

of loaded cargo.

– Limitation of the detection ability of

the stereo camera.

& Daytime running light system

WARNING

When the daytime running lights are

illuminated, the tail lights do not

illuminate. When it becomes dark

outside, turn the light switch to the

“

” position to illuminate the head-

lights and tail lights. This will im-

prove visibility and allow other dri-

vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-

cally illuminate when the following condi-

tions are fulfilled.

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”

(if equipped), “

” or off position.

. For CVT models, the select lever is in a

position other than the “P” position.

NOTE

When the light switch is in the “ ”

position, the instrument panel illumina-

tion, front side marker lights, tail lights

and license plate lights are also illumi-

nated.

Steering Responsive Head-

light (SRH) (if equipped)

1) The target area of illumination when SRH

is activated

2) The target area of illumination when SRH

is not activated

SRH is a function that automatically moves

the headlight beam to the left or right in

accordance with the steering angle and

vehicle speed. This function helps to

improve the visibility at night by illuminat-

ing the road ahead at corners and inter-

sections.

Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)

3-72

(211,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

You can turn the SRH function on or off by

pressing the SRH OFF switch.

1) SRH OFF indicator

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

tion meter turns off when SRH is turned on.

The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-

tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned

off.

If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF

indicator on the combination meter flashes

when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position. It indicates that SRH has been

deactivated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for

an inspection.

NOTE

. If you turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position with SRH turned off and

then start the engine again, SRH will

automatically turn on.

. When you turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-

cator will illuminate and turn off after

several seconds.

. SRH only activates when the vehicle

is traveling forward at the speed of

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

. SRH may not activate when the shift

lever (MT models) is selected in 1st

gear.

Headlight beam leveler

(models with LED headlights)

The LED headlights produce more light

than conventional halogen headlights.

When the vehicle is carrying a heavy load

and the headlight beams are angled

upwards, the driver of an oncoming vehicle

may experience glare.

To prevent this, the automatic headlight

beam leveler adjusts the headlights to the

optimum height automatically depending

on the load the vehicle is carrying.

Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)

3-73

(212,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fog light switch (if equipped)

1) Headlight switch

2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when the

fog light switch is placed in the “

” position

while the headlights are in the following

condition.

. while the headlight switch is in the “

”

position

. for models with the auto on/off head-

lights, while the headlight switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights turn on automatically

To turn off the front fog lights, turn the

switch back down to the “

” position.

The indicator light on the combination

meter will illuminate when the front fog

lights are illuminated.

& Steering responsive fog

lights system (if equipped)

The steering responsive fog lights system

automatically turns the front fog light on

and off based on the steering angle and

vehicle speed when entering a curve or

driving on curved roads. The system is

intended to help prevent accidents by

enabling better visibility of curves ahead

and early recognition of any disabled

vehicles or other obstacles.

The front fog light on the inside of a curve

will turn on if all of the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in the “

”

position, or the light control switch is in the

“AUTO” position and the low beam head-

lights are turned on automatically

. The fog light switch is in the “

” position

. The low beam mode is selected

. The select lever is in the “D” position or

the manual mode is selected.

. The steering response fog lights sys-

tem has not been deactivated

. The operating conditions such as the

steering angle and vehicle speed are met

The front fog lights on both sides will turn

on as usual if all of the following conditions

are met.

. The light control switch is in either of the

following conditions.

– in the “

” position

– in the “AUTO” position and the low

beam headlights turn on automatically

. The fog light switch is in t he “

”

position

. The low beam mode is selected

Instruments and controls/Fog light switch

3-74

(213,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

switch

Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch

Press this switch to deactivate the steering

responsive fog lights system. Press the

switch again to activate the system.

! Steering responsive fog lights OFF

indicator

Steering responsive fog lights OFF indi-

cator

This indicator appears when the steering

responsive fog lights system is deacti-

vated. This indicator disappears when the

system is activated.

Turn signal lever

1) Right turn

2) Lane change right signal

3) Lane change left signal

4) Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering,

return the lever to the neutral position by

hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and hold it

during the lane change. The lever will

return automatically to the neutral position

when you release it.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever

3-75

(214,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& One-touch lane changer

To flash the turn signal and turn signal

indicator light three times, push the turn

signal lever up or down slightly and

immediately release it.

NOTE

The operational/non-operational

setting of the one-touch lane changer

can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.

Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer for

details. For models with the combina-

tion meter display (color LCD), the

setting can also be changed by operat-

ing the combination meter display

(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-

cle Setting” F3-41.

Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use the

windshield washer until the wind-

shield is sufficiently warmed by the

defroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid can

freeze on the windshield, blocking

your view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 10 sec-

onds, or when the washer fluid

tank is empty. This may cause

overheating of the washer motor.

Check the washer fluid level fre-

quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers when

the windshield or rear window is

dry. This may scratch the glass,

damage the blade rubbers and

might cause the wiper motor to

fail. Before operating the wiper

on a dry windshield or rear win-

dow, always use the windshield

washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure that

the blade rubbers are not frozen

to the windshield or rear window

before switching on the wipers.

Attempting to operate the wiper

withthebladesfrozentothe

window glass could cause not

only the blade rubbers to be

damaged but also might cause

the wiper motor to fail. If the blade

rubbers are frozen to the window

glass, be sure to operate the

defroster, windshield wiper dei-

cer (if equipped) or rear window

defogger before turning on the

wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-

tion because of ice or some other

obstruction on the window, this

might cause the wiper motor to

fail even if the wiper switch is

turned off. If this occurs,

promptly stop the vehicle in a

safe place, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-

sition and clean the window glass

to allow proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshield

washer fluid is una vailable . In

areas where water freezes in

winter, use SUBARU Windshield

Washer Fluid or the equivalent.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

3-76

(215,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Refer to “ Windshield washer

fluid” F11-28.

. Do not clean the blade rubbers

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

blade rubbers.

NOTE

. The windshield wiper motor is pro-

tected against overloads by a circuit

breaker. If the motor operates continu-

ously under an unusually heavy load,

the circuit breaker may trip to stop the

motor temporarily. If this happens, park

your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the

wiper switch, and wait for approxi-

mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker

will reset itself, and the wipers will

again operate normally.

. Clean your blade rubbers and win-

dow glass periodically with a washer

solution to prevent streaking, and to

remove accumulations of road salt or

road film. Operate the windshield

washer for at least 1 second so that

washer solution will be sprinkled all

over the windshield or rear window.

. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-

rial on th e w indshield or the blade

rubbers results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If you

cannot remove those streaks after

operating the washer or if the wiper

operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-

face of the windshield or rear window

and the blade rubbers using a sponge

or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or

mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,

rinse the window glass and blade

rubbers with clean water. The glass is

clean if no beads form on the glass

when you rinse with water.

. If you cannot eliminate the streaking

even after following this procedure,

replace the blade rubbers with new

ones. For replacement instructions,

refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”

F11-29.

& Windshield wiper and washer

switches

The wiper operates only when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

! Operating the wiper lever

: Mist operation (for a single wipe)

: Off

: Intermittent operation

: Low speed operation

High speed operation

For a single wipe of the wipers, push the

lever up. The wipers operate until you

release the lever.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

3-77

(216,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Wiper intermittent time control

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”

position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-

ing interval of the wiper. The operating

interval can be adjusted in several steps

from the shortest interval to the longest.

! Windshield washer

To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid

sprays until you release the lever. The

wipers operate while you pull the lever.

NOTE

Windshield washer fluid warning light

The windshield washer fluid warning

light illuminates when the washer fluid

level in the tank has dropped to the

lower limit. If the warning light illumi-

nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the

refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-

shield washer fluid” F11-28.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

3-78

(217,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Rear window wiper and

washer switch

Washer operation (accompanied by

wiper operation)

: Continuous operation

: Intermittent operation

:Off

Washer operation (accompanied by

wiper operation)

! Rear wiper

With the switch turned to the “

” position,

the rear wiper will operate intermittently at

intervals corresponding to the vehicle

speed. In this position, when you move

the select lever to the “R” position (CVT

models) or the shift lever to the reverse

position (MT models), the rear wiper will

switch to continuous operation. When you

move the select lever/shift lever from the

“R” (reverse) position to another position,

the rear wiper will return to intermittent

operation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:

Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off

“

” position, if the front windshield wiper is

operating continuously, the rear wiper will

operate intermittently when you move the

select lever/shift lever to the “R” (reverse)

position.

The factory setting (default setting) of the

reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as

follows.

. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational

. Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for

details.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbs

the rear wiper operation on the rear

gate. Doing so may damage the rear

wiper when it operates.

! Washer

To wash the rear window, turn the knob to

the “

” position. The washer fluid sprays

and the wiper operates until you release

the knob.

Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer

3-79

(218,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outside

mirrors are properly adjusted before you

start driving.

& Inside mirror

1) Normal position

2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.

To reduce glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the

antiglare position.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass (if equipped)

1) Display

2) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

Press the “

” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

Compass calibration zones

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-80

(219,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass direc-

tion.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “

” switch for more than 9 seconds or

until a “C” appears in the display. Once a

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-

pass with HomeLink

(if

equipped)

1) Display

2) HomeLink Buttons

3) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming

feature senses distracting glare from

vehicle headlights behind you and auto-

matically dims to eliminate the glare and

preserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-

ture

Press the “

” switch to turn the auto-

dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming

feature is enabled when the switch’s green

LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming

feature will default to on with each ignition

cycle.

! To Operate the Compass Feature

1. To turn the compass feature on/off,

press and hold the “

” switch for more

than 3 seconds or until the display turns

on/off. The compass feature will default to

on with each ignition cycle.

2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-81

(220,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Compass calibration zones

3. To adjust for compass zone variance:

(1) Find your current location and

zone number on the map.

(2) Press and hold the “

” switch for

more than 6 seconds or until a zone

number appears in the display.

(3) Once the zone number appears in

the display, toggle the “

” switch

again until your current location zone

number appears. After you stop press-

ing the switch, your new zone number

will be saved. Within a few seconds,

the display will show a compass direc-

tion.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-

ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,

recalibrate the compass. Press and hold

the “

” switch for more than 9 seconds or

until a “C” appears in the display. Once a

“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the

vehicle in circles until compass is cali-

brated.

! HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem

The HomeLink

Wireless Control System

provides a convenient way to replace up to

three hand-held radio-frequency remotes

used to activate devices such as gate

operators, garage door openers, entry

door locks, security systems, even home

lighting. The below steps are generic

programming instructions; for Genie and

Sommer garage door openers please go

directly to the HomeLink website. Addi-

tional information and programming vi-

deos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the device to prevent potential

harm or damage.

. When programming a garage

door opener, it is advised to park

outside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks

safety stop and reverse features

as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-

age door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982). A

garage door that cannot detect

an object signaling the door to

stop and reverse does not meet

current U.S. federal safety stan-

dards.

. It is also recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-

held remote (garage door opener

remote) of the device for quicker

and more accurate training.

. Some vehicles may require the

ignition switch to be turned to the

“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-

gramming and/or operation of

HomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-

age door opener remote) of the

device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as

for future HomeLink program-

ming. It is also suggested that

upon the sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink buttons

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-82

(221,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

be erased for security purposes.

Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-

tons” F3-85.

! Programming a New HomeLink

Button

1) Indicator Light

2) HomeLink Buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink but-

ton that you would like to program. The

HomeLink indicator light will flash orange

slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLink

Buttons” F3-85).

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garage

door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink button that

you would like to program.

NOTE

Some hand-held remotes (garage door

opener remotes) may actually train

better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches

(15 to 20 cm). Keep this in mind if you

have difficulty with the programming

process.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and hold the hand-

held remote button. Continue pressing the

hand-held remote button until the

HomeLink indicator light changes from

orange to green. You may now release

the hand-held remote button.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to re-

place this “ Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 3 with proce-

dures noted in the “Gate Operator /

Canadian Programming” section. Refer

to “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-

ming” F3-85.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-83

(222,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Indicator Light

4. Press the HomeLink button that you

would like to program and observe the

indicator light.

. If the indicator light remains constant

green, your device should operate

when the HomeLink button is pressed.

At this point, if your device operates,

programming is complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes

green, firmly press, hold for two sec-

onds and release the HomeLink button

up to three times to complete the

programming process. At this point if

your device operates, programming is

complete. If the device does not

operate, continue with the next step

of the programming instructions.

1) “Learn” button

5. At the gara ge door opener motor,

(security gate motor, etc...) locate the

“Learn”, “Smart”,or“Program” button. This

can usually be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the motor-head

unit (see the device’s manual to identify

this button). The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

NOTE

A ladder and/or second person may

simplify the following steps.

6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,

“Smart”,or“Program” button. You now

have 30 seconds in which to complete step

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release t he

HomeLink button up to three times. At this

point programming is complete and your

device should operate when the HomeLink

button is pressed and released.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-84

(223,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Status Indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear next

to the indicator light, plea se refer to

“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”

F3-86.

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For

Genie and Sommer garage door openers

please go directly to the HomeLink web-

site.

! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter remote signals to “time-out”

(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-

sion, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

The indicator LED on the hand-held

remote will go off when the device times

out, indicating that it has finished transmit-

ting.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the program-

ming procedures, replace “Programming a

New HomeLink Button” step 3 with the

following:

While the HomeLink indicator light is

flashing orange, press and release (“cy-

cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every

two seconds until the HomeLink indicator

light changes from orange to green. You

may now release the hand-held remote

button.

NOTE

If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug

the device during the “cycling” process

to prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “ Programming a New

HomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed HomeLink button. Activation

will now occur for the trained device (i.e.

garage door opener, gate operator, secur-

ity system, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-

held remote of the device may also be

used at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink Buttons

To erase programming from the three

buttons (individual buttons cannot be

erased but can be “reprogrammed” as

outlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLink

buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED

indicator will change from continuously lit

to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.

Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

HomeLink is now ready to be programmed

at any time beginning with “Programming a

New HomeLink Button” - step 1.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-85

(224,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Reprogramming a Single

HomeLink Button

To program a previously trained button,

follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to slowly

flash orang e after 20 seconds. The

HomeLink button can be released at this

point. Proceed with “Programming a New

HomeLink Button” - step 3.

3. If you do not complete the program-

ming of a new device to the button, it will

revert to the previously stored program-

ming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-

nication

HomeLink has the capability of commu-

nicating with your garage door opener.

HomeLink can receive and display “clos-

ing” or “opening” status messages from

compatible garage door opener systems.

At any time, HomeLink can also recall and

display the last recorded status commu-

nicated by the garage door opener to

indicate your garage door being “closed”

or “opened”.

HomeLink has the capability of receiving

this communication from the garage door

opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles such

as houses or trees. You may have to slow

your vehicle speed to successfully receive

the garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-

nication

1) Status Indicators

Within five seconds after programming a

new HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’s

garage door status indicators will flash

rapidly green indicating that the garage

door two-way communication has been

enabled. If your garage door status in-

dicators flashed, two-way communication

programming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do not

flash, additional HomeLink information

and programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com and

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way Communication

1) Status Indicators

Recall and display (at any time) the last

recorded garage door status message

communicated to HomeLink by simulta-

neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and

2 for two seconds. HomeLink will display

the last recorded status for three seconds.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-86

(225,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking

Orange)

2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid

Green)

3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-

ing Orange)

4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid

Green)

If two-way communication programming is

successful, HomeLink will display the

status of your garage door opener with

arrow indicators.

! Certification

In the event that there are still program-

ming difficulties or questions, additional

HomeLink information and programming

videos can be found at

www.HomeLink.com,

www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or

by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline

at 1-800-355-3515.

. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference receiv ed, inclu din g

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

. Canada-spec. models

HomeLink

and the HomeLink

house are

registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-

tion.

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-87

(226,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

. When programming the

HomeLink

Wireless Control Sys-

tem, you may be operatin g a

garage door opener or other

device. Make sure that people

and objects are out of the way of

the garage door or other device

to prevent potential harm or da-

mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink

Wire-

less Control System with a gar-

age door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature

as required by applicable safety

standards. A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object,

signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet these

safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these fea-

tures increases risk of serious

injury or death. For more infor-

mation, consult the HomeLink

website at www.homelink.com or

call 1-800-355-3515.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convex

mirror and farther away than when

viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the

convex mirror to judge the distance

of vehicles behind you when chan-

ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or

glance backwards) to determine the

actual size and distance of objects

that you view in convex mirror.

! Remote control mirror switch

: Select side to adjust

: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate only

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

1. Turn the control switch to the side that

you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,

“R” is for the right mirror.

2. Move the control switch in the direction

you want to move the mirror.

3. Return the control switch to the neutral

position to prevent unintentional opera-

tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-

ally.

Instruments and controls/Mirrors

3-88

(227,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Defogger and deicer (if

equipped)

1) Rear window defogger

2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)

3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with the defogger

and the deicer (if equipped) system. The

defogger and deicer system is activated

only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position.

Climate control system type A

1) Models without outside mirror defogger

2) Models with outside mirror defogger

Climate control system type B and C

1) Models without outside mirror defogger

2) Models with outside mirror defogger

To activate simultaneously the rear win-

dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (if

equipped) and windshield wiper deicer (if

equipped), press the control switch that is

located on the climate control panel. The

indicator light on the control switch illumi-

nates while the def ogger and deicer

system is activated.

To turn them off, press the control switch

again. They also turn off when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ACC ” or “ LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

The defogger and deicer system will

automatically shut off after approximately

15 minutes. If the rear window and the

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer

3-89

(228,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

outside mirrors have been cleared and the

windshield bla de rubbers have bee n

deiced completely before that time, press

the control switch to turn them off.

For climate control system (type B and

C), it is possible for the defogger and

deicer system to be set to continuous

operation mode by a SUBARU dealer.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Also, for models with a combination meter

display (color LCD), it is possible to set the

defogger and deicer system for the con-

tinuous operation mode. For details, refer

to “Vehicle Setting” F3-41.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not operate the

defogger and deicer system con-

tinuously for any longer than

necessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may da-

mage the conductors printed on

the window.

NOTE

. Turn on the defogger and deicer

system if the wipers are frozen to the

windshield.

. If the windshield is covered with

snow, remove the snow so that the

windshield wiper deicer works effec-

tively.

. While the defogger and deicer sys-

tem is in the continuous operation

mode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9

mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15

minutes, the windshield wiper dei-

cer system automatically stops op-

erating. However, the rear window

defogger system and outside mirror

defogger system maintain continu-

ous operation in this condition.

– If the veh icle battery vol tage

drops below the permissible level,

continuous operation of the defog-

ger system and deicer system is

canceled and the system stops

operating.

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel

tilt/telescopic position while driv-

ing. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to the

fixed position, adjust the steering

wheel again. It is dangerous to

drive without locking the steering

wheel. This may cause loss of

vehicle control and result in per-

sonal injury.

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

3-90

(229,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Tilt adjustment

2) Telescopic adjustment

3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front

seats” F1-5.

2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired

level.

4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel is

securely locked by moving it up and down,

and forward and backward.

& Heated Steering Wheel sys-

tem (if equipped)

The Heated Steering Wheel system

warms the steering wheel at a constant

temperature.

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch

2) Indicator light

3) Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel

system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel

switch when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steering

wheel will be warmed and the indicator

light on the switch will illuminate. To turn off

the Heated Steering Wheel system, pull

the switch again. Then the indicator light

will turn off.

CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheel

system with the engine running.

Otherwise, the battery voltage

may drop below the permissible

level and it may not be possible to

start the engine.

. There is a possibility that people

with delicate skin may suffer

slight burns even at low tempera-

tures if they use the Heated

Steering Wheel for a long period

of time. When using the Heated

Steering Wheel, always be sure to

warn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated Steering

Wheel with an object such as a

steering wheel cover. Doing so

may cause the Heated Steering

Wheel to overheat.

NOTE

. If the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is approximately above

1048F (408C) when the switch is turned

on, the system will not heat the steering

wheel. Then, the indicator light will

continue to illuminate.

. The Heated Steering Wheel system

will automatically turn off approxi-

– CONTINUED –

Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

3-91

(230,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

mately 30 minutes after the system has

been turned on.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Instruments and controls/Horn

3-92

(233,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2

Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2

Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2

Climate control panel ............................................. 4-2

Type A ................................................................... 4-3

Type B ................................................................... 4-4

Type C ................................................................... 4-5

Automatic climate control operation

(type B and C) ...................................................... 4-6

Sensors ................................................................. 4-6

Manual climate control operation.......................... 4-7

Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-7

MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) .......................... 4-8

Temperature control............................................... 4-8

Fan speed control.................................................. 4-9

Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-9

Air inlet selection ...................................................4-9

To turn off the climate control system..................... 4-9

Defrosting.............................................................. 4-10

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner .... 4-10

Cleaning ventilation grille ..................................... 4-10

Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight ... . 4-10

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant

circuit................................................................ 4-11

Checking air conditioning system before summer

season .............................................................. 4-11

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity

and low temperature weather conditions............ 4-11

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when

engine is heavily loaded .................................... 4-11

Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-11

Air filtration system...............................................4-11

Replacing a cabin air filter .................................... 4-12

Climate control

(234,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Ventilator control

& Center ventilators

Center ventilators

To adjust the airflow direction, move the

tab. To close the ventilator, move the tab all

the way down.

& Side ventilators

Side ventilators

1) Close

2) Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

Climate control panel

WARNING

. The cooling function operates

only when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the

support of others alone in your

vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high en-

ough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

Climate control/Ventilator control

4-2

(235,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Type A

1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-7.)

2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” F4-9.)

3) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-

perature control” F4-8.)

4) Air condi tioner button (Refe r to “Air

conditioner control” F4-9.)

5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-9.)

6) Rear window defogger button and out-

side mirror defogger button (if equipped)

(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-89.)

– CONTINUED –

Climate control/Climate control panel

4-3

(236,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Type B

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B

and C)” F4-6 and/or “Temperature con-

trol” F4-8.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation (type B and C)”

F4-6.)

3) Air condi tioner button (Refe r to “Air

conditioner control” F4-9.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-9.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C

mode (for type B and C)” F4-8.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

F4-10.)

7) Rear window defogger button and out-

side mirror defogger button (if equipped)

(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-89.)

8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-7.)

9) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” F4-9.)

10) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Auto matic

climate control operation (type B and

C)” F4-6.)

NOTE

The climate control screen is displayed

on the multi-function display (col or

LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”

F3-50.

Climate control/Climate control panel

4-4

(237,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Type C

1) Driver’s side temperature control dial

(Refer to “Automatic climate control

operation (type B and C)” F4-6 and/or

“Temperature control” F4-8.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-

mate control operation (type B and C)”

F4-6.)

3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control” F4-9.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” F4-9.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/C

mode (for type B and C)” F4-8.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”

F4-10.)

7) Rear window defogger button and out-

side mirror defogger button (if equipped)

(Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-89.)

8) Passenger’s side temperature control

dial (Refer to “Temperature control” F4-

8.)

9) SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode

(type C)” F4-8.)

10) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” F4-9.)

11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-7.)

12) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Auto matic

climate control operation (type B and

C)” F4-6.)

NOTE

The climate control screen is displayed

on the multi-function display (col or

LCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”

F3-50.

Climate control/Climate control panel

4-5

(238,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Automatic climate control

operation (type B and C)

When this mode is selected, the fan speed,

airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and air

conditioner compressor operation are

automatically controlled. To activate this

mode, perform the following.

1. Press the AUTO button. The indicator

light “FULL AUTO” on the multi-function

display (color LCD) illuminates.

2. Set the preferred temperature using

the temperature control dial.

NOTE

. Operate the automatic climate con-

trol system when the engine is running.

. Even when cooling is not necessary,

the air conditioner compressor will

automatically turn on if the temperature

is set much lower than the current

outlet air temper ature. Even in thi s

case, the “A/C” indicator light on the

control panel illuminates.

. The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

. If you operate any of the buttons on

the control panel other than the ON/

OFF button, rear window defogger

button, SYNC button and temperature

control dial(s) during FULL AUTO mode

operation, the “FULL” indicator light on

the multi-function display (color LCD)

will turn off and the “AUTO” indicator

light will remain illuminated. You can

then manually control the system as

desired using the button you operated.

To change the system back to the FULL

AUTO mode, press the AUTO button.

To turn off the climate control system,

press the ON/OFF button. Then the air

inlet selection will be set to the following.

. When the air inlet selection is set to

auto mode: Outside air circulation

. When the air inlet selection is set to

manual mode: No change

& Sensors

The sensors are located as follows.

1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control system

employs several sensors. These sensors

Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B and C)

4-6

(239,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

are delicate. If they are not treated properly

and become damaged, the system may

not be able to control the interior tempera-

ture correctly. To avoid damaging the

sensors, observe the following precau-

tions.

. Do not subject the sensors to impact.

. Keep water away from the sensors.

. Do not cover the sensors.

Manual climate control op-

eration

& Airflow mode selection

Select the airflow mode by using the

airflow mode selection dial (type A and B)

or the airflow mode selection button (type

C).

Airflow modes are as follows.

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

Ventilation 2 for type B and C: Instru-

ment panel outlets and foot outlets

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

outlets

– CONTINUED –

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

4-7

(240,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the

instrument panel and some through wind-

shield defroster outlets (A small amount of

air flows to the windshield and both side

windows to prevent fogging.)

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,

foot outlets and both side outlets of the

instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”

F4-10.)

Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and

both side outlets of the instrument panel

(Refer to “Defrosting” F4-10.)

& MAX A/C mode (for type B and

For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/C

button.

When the MAX A/C mode is on, the

following settings will be changed auto-

matically.

. The air conditioner will turn on.

. The temperature will be set on the

lowest.

. The fan speed will be set on the

maximum speed.

. The air inlet will be set to recirculation.

. The air flow mode setting will be set to

ventilation mode.

To turn off MAX A/C mode and return the

previous setting, press the MAX A/C

button again.

& Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

preferred interior temperature.

NOTE

The controllable temperature range

may vary depending on the regional

specifications of the vehicle.

! SYNC mode (type C)

When the SYNC mode is turned on, both

the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-

peratures are synchronized using the

driver’s side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button to turn on the

SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator

will illuminate.

Press the SYNC button again or turn the

passenger’s side temperature control dial

to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC

button indicator will not illuminate. In this

case, temperature control on the driver’s

side and passenger’s side is separated.

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

4-8

(241,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The temperature will be controlled indivi-

dually using the driver’s and passenger’s

temperature control dials.

& Fan speed control

Select the preferred fan speed by turning

the fan speed control dial.

& Air conditioner control

The air conditioner operates only when the

engine is running.

Press the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on th e air

conditioner. When the air conditioner is

on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.

To turn off the air conditioner, press the

button again.

NOTE

For efficient defogging or dehumidify-

ing in cold weather, turn on the air

conditioner. If the ambient temperature

decreases to approximately 328F(08C),

the air conditioner and dehumidifica-

tion system may not operate properly.

& Air inlet selection

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

. Recirculation:

When the indicator light on the air inlet

selection button illuminates, interior air is

recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the

air inlet selection button to the ON position

for fast cooling with the air conditioner or

when driving on a dusty road.

. Outside air circulation:

When the indicator light on the air inlet

selection button does not illuminate, out-

side air is drawn into the passenger

compartment. Press the air inlet selection

buttontotheOFFpositionwhenthe

interior has cooled to a comfortable tem-

perature and the road is no longer dusty.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-

tion may fog up the windows. Switch

to the OFF position as soon as the

outside conditions are no longer

dusty.

& To turn off the climate control

system

To turn off the climate control system:

. Type A: select the “OFF” position using

the fan speed control dial.

. Type B and C: press the ON/OFF

button.

Climate control/Manual climate control operation

4-9

(242,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Defrosting

Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost or

dehumidify the windshield and front door

windows.

NOTE

. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is

selected, the air conditioner compres-

sor operates automatically regardless

of the position of the air conditioner

button to defrost the windshield more

quickly. However the indicator on the

air conditioner button will not illumi-

nate. At the same time, the air inlet

selection is automatically set to the

outside air mode.

For type A climate control system, in

this state:

– You cannot stop the air condi-

tioner compressor by pressing the

air conditioner button.

– You cannot select the recircula-

tion mode by pressing the air inlet

selection button.

. For types B and C climate control

system, after defrosting the windshield

by pressing the defroster button “

”,

pressing the button again returns the

system to the setting that had been

selected before the defroster was acti-

vated.

Operating tips for heater and

air conditioner

& Cleaning ventilation grille

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille

free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions

to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.

Since the condenser is located in front of

the radiator, this area should be kept clean

because cooling performance is impaired

by any accumulation of insects and leaves

on the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parking

in direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes to

Climate control/Defrosting

4-10

(243,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

allow outside air to circulate into the

heate d interior. This results in quicker

cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the

windows closed during the operation of the

air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-

ciency.

& Lubrication oil circulation in

the refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor at

a low engine speed (at idle or low driving

speeds) a few minutes each month during

the off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioning

system before summer sea-

son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-

ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper

operation each spring. Have the air con-

ditioning system checked by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying in

high humidity and low tem-

perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (high

relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a

small amount of water vapor emission

from the air outlets may be noticed. This

condition is normal and does not indicate

any problem with the air c ondition ing

system.

& Air conditioner compressor

shut-off when engine is

heavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,

the air conditioner compressor is designed

to temporarily shut off during air condi-

tioner operation whenever the accelerator

is fully depressed such as during rapid

acceleration or when driving on a steep

upgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climate

control system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly

refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-

od of adding, changing or checking the

refrigerant is different from the method for

CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU

dealer for service. Repairs needed as a

result of using the wrong refrigerant are not

covered under warranty.

Air filtration system

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is

equipped with an air filtration system.

Replace the cabin air filter according to

the replacement schedule found in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This

schedule should be followed to maintain

the filter’s dust collection ability. Under

extremely dusty condition s, the filter

should be replaced more frequently. Have

your filter checked or replaced by your

SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use

only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if the

following occurs, even if it is not yet

time to change the filter:

. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.

. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTE

The filter can influence the air condi-

tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

mance if not properly maintained.

– CONTINUED –

Climate control/Air filtration system

4-11

(244,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Replacing a cabin air filter

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTE

We recommend that you take measures

to protect the center console with

masking tape first, so that you avoid

scratching the center console with the

glove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from the

glove box.

(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then

pull down the glove box as far as it will

go.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. When

doing this, be careful not to damage

the hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according to

the following procedure in order to prevent

dust on the air cleaner from falling to the

inside of its housing.

(1) Pinch both tabs and remove the

filter cover.

(2) Gently tilt down the end of the filter

and slowly pull it out 0.4 in (1 cm).

(3) Slowly pull out the rest of the filter.

Climate control/Air filtration system

4-12

(245,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

3. Replace the cabin air filter with a new

one and then reinstall the cover.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter must

point UP.

4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.

5. Close the glove box.

Climate control/Air filtration system

4-13

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(247,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Antenna ................................................................... 5-2

Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................... 5-2

Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ........................... 5-2

Audio set ................................................................. 5-3

Audio

(248,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Antenna

& Roof antenna (for Rod type)

CAUTION

. Be sure to remove the antenna

rod before entering garages,

parking towers and other loca-

tions with low ceilings.

. Remove the antenna rod before

washing your car at a car wash. If

the antenna rod remains at-

tached, it may scratch the roof.

. When reinstalling the removed

antenna rod, be sure to fully

tighten it.

1) Unscrew

2) Remove

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

The antenna rod ca n be removed by

unscrewing it from its base.

& Roof antenna (for Shark fin

type)

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

Audio/Antenna

5-2

(249,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Audio set

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine

SUBARU navigation system or audio

system, refer to the separate navigation/

audio Owner’s Manual for details.

Audio/Audio set

5-3

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(251,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Interior lights ........................................................... 6-2

Map lights.............................................................. 6-2

Dome light ............................................................. 6-2

Cargo area light ..................................................... 6-3

OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3

Sun visors ............................................................... 6-3

Sun visor extension plate (if equipped) .................. 6-4

Vanity mirror.......................................................... 6-4

Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................... 6-5

Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5

Glove box .............................................................. 6-5

Center console ...................................................... 6-6

Cup holders........................................................... 6-6

Bottle holders ........................................................ 6-6

Accessory power outlets ....................................... 6-7

Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) .. ............ 6-8

Ashtray (dealer option) .......................................... 6-9

Floor mat ............................................................... 6-10

Coat hook.............................................................. 6-10

Shopping bag hook ...............................................6-11

Cargo area cover (if equipped).............................6-11

Using the cover .................................................... 6-11

To remove the cover housing................................6-12

Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-12

To install the cover housing.................................. 6-13

Cargo tie-down hooks (if equipped) ................... 6-13

Interior equipment

(252,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Interior lights

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, make

sure the lights are turned off to

avoid battery discharge.

& Map lights

1) Door interlock switch

To turn on the map light, push the lens.

To turn it off, push the lens again.

! Automatic illumination

When the door interlock switch is in the

“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminate

automatically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors other than the rear

gate (if equipped) is opened.

. The doors are unlocked using the

keyless access function (if equipped).

Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holding

the access key fob” F2-6.

. The doors are unlocked using the

remote keyless entry system. Refer to

“Remote keyless entry system” F2-17.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

& Dome light

1) ON

2) DOOR

3) OFF

The dome light switch has the following

positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.

OFF: The light remains off.

DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-

matically in the following cases.

. Any of the doors or the rear gate is

opened.

. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

using the keyless access function (if

equipped). Refer to “Locking and unlock-

ing by holding the access key fob” F2-6.

. The doors or the rear gate are unlocked

Interior equipment/Interior lights

6-2

(253,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

using the remote keyless entry transmitter.

Refer to “Remote keyless entry system”

F2-17.

. The ignition switch is turned from the

“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion.

& Cargo area light

1) DOOR

2) OFF

DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear

gate is opened. The light remains illumi-

nated for several seconds and gradually

turns off after the rear gate is closed.

OFF: The light remains off.

& OFF delay timer

The following lights have an automatic

illumination function.

. dome light

. map light

. cargo area light

When the interior light switch is set to the

“DOOR” position, the light will automati-

cally turn on and turn off depending on the

locking and unlocking of the doors, the

opening and closing of the doors, as well

as the position of the ignition switch.

NOTE

The setting for the period of time in

which the lights remain on (OFF delay

timer) can be changed by a SUBARU

dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for details. For models with the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD), the

setting can also be changed by operat-

ing the combination meter display

(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-

cle Setting” F3-41.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.

To use the sun visor at a side window,

swing it down and move it sideways.

– CONTINUED –

Interior equipment/Sun visors

6-3

(254,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Sun visor extension plate (if

equipped)

With the sun visor positioned over the side

window, you can use the sun visor exten-

sion plate to prevent glare through the gap

between the sun visor and center pillar. To

use the extension plate, pull it toward the

rear of the vehicle. When you have

finished using it, stow it by pushing it

toward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension plate

with the sun visor positioned over

the windshield. The extension plate

would o bstruct your view o f the

rearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being temporarily blinded by the

glare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

Interior equipment/Sun visors

6-4

(255,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Vanity mirror with light (if

equipped)

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closed

while the car is being driven to avoid

being distracted by the light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-

nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTE

Use of the vanity mirror light for a long

period of time while the engine is not

running can cause battery discharge.

Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-

partment closed while driving to

reduce the risk of injury in the

event of a sudden stop or an

accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-

ers with flammable or corrosive

liquids or any other dangerous

items in the storage compart-

ment.

& Glove box

1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.

2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-

lock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE

. The emergency key is directional. If

the key cannot be inserted, change the

direction that the grooved side is facing

and insert it again.

. For models with the “keyless access

with push-button start system”, use the

emergency key to lock or unlock the

glove box.

– CONTINUED –

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

6-5

(256,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Center console

The center console box provides a storage

space.

1) Card holder

The top of the console can be used as an

armrest.

& Cup holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cup

holder or put a cup in the holder

while you are driving, as this may

distract you and lead to an acci-

dent.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-

erages, if hot, might scald you

and/or your passengers. Spilled

beverages may also damage up-

holstery or carpets.

. When a cup in the rear passen-

ger’s cup holder contains a bev-

erage, do not fold down the rear

seatback. Otherwise, the bever-

age could spill and, if the bev-

erage is hot, it could scald you

and/or your passengers.

Front passenger’s cup holder

A dual cup holder is built into the center

console.

Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped)

A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

& Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from the

bottle holder or put a bottle in the

holder while you are driving, as

this may distract you and lead to

an accident.

. When placing a beverage in a

bottle holder, make sure it is

capped. Otherwise, the beverage

could spill when opening/closing

the door or while driving and, if

the beverage is hot, it could scald

you and/or your passengers.

Interior equipment/Storage compartment

6-6

(257,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

The bottle holder equipped on each door

trim can be used to hold beverage bottles

and other items.

Accessory power outlets

Electrical power (12V DC) is available at

any of the accessory power outlets when

the ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or

“ON” position. Accessory power outlets

are located in the following places.

Power outlet below the climate control

dials

Power outlet in the center console

You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-

ance by connecting it to an outlet.

The maximum power rating of an appli-

ance that can be connected is 120W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarette

lighter in the accessory power

outlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects,

especially metal ones such as

coins or aluminum foil, into the

accessory power outlet. That

could cause a short circuit. Al-

ways put the cap on the acces-

sory power outlet when it is not in

use.

– CONTINUED –

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

6-7

(258,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Use only electrical appliances

which are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of an

appliance that can be connected

is 120W. Do not use an appliance

which exceeds the indicated wat-

tage for each outlet.

. When using appliances con-

nected to two outlets simulta-

neously, the total power con-

sumed by them must not exceed

120W. Overloading the accessory

power outlet can cause a short

circuit. Do not use double adap-

ters or more than one electrical

appliance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-

ance is either too loose or too

tight for the accessory power

outlet, this can result in a poor

contact or cause the plug to get

stuck. Only use plugs that fit

properly.

. Use of an electric appliance in the

accessory power outlet for a long

period of time while the engine is

not running can cause battery

discharge.

. Before driving your vehicle, make

sure that the plug and the cord on

your electrical appliance will not

interfere with your shifting gears

and operating the accelerator

and brake pedals. If they do, do

not use the electrical appliance

while driving.

NOTE

When the lid of the center console is

closed, an opening remains between

the center console and the lid to allow

the power outlet in the center console

to be used. Pass the cord of the

electrical appliance through this open-

ing.

& Use with a cigarette lighter

(dealer option)

To use the accessory power outlet as a

cigarette lighter socket, purchase the

cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional

accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is

available from your SUBARU dealer.

The cigarette lighter operates only when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”

position.

To use the cigarette lighter, push in the

knob and wait a few moments. It will

automatically spring up when ready for

use.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never grasp

the lighter by the end with the

heating element. Doing so could

result in injury and could also da-

mage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,

because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket is

originally designed to use a gen-

uine SUBARU cigarette lighter

plug. Do not use a non-genuine

Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets

6-8

(259,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

cigarette lighter plug in the sock-

et. Doing so may cause a short-

circuit and overheating, resulting

in a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for a

plug-in accessory such as a cell

phone, that may damage the

portion of the socket’s internal

mechanism that causes a cigar-

ette lighter plug to “pop out” after

its lighter el ement is h eated.

Therefore, do not place a cigar-

ette lighter plug in a socket that

has been used, even once, to

power a plug-in accessory. Doing

so may cause the plug to stick

and overheat, creating a potential

fire hazard.

Ashtray (dealer option)

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as waste

receptacles or leave a lighted

cigarette in an ashtray. This could

cause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches and

cigarettes before putting them

into the ashtray, and then close

the ashtray securely. If you keep

the ashtray open, the fire of the

cigarette may spread to another

cigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material in

the ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarette

butts in the ashtray.

NOTE

Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-

mulate around the hinges of the ash-

tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a

toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended

implement.

The portable ashtray can be installed in

each cup holder or bottle holder. For the

locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup

holders” F6-6. For the locations of the

bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-

When using the ashtray, open the lid of the

ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the

ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

Interior equipment/Ashtray (dealer option)

6-9

(260,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Floor mat

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward and

interferes with the movement of the

pedals during driving, it could cause

an accident. Observe the following

precautions to prevent the floor mat

from slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-

lent designed with grommets in

the correct locations.

. Make sure that the driver’s floor

mat is placed in its proper loca-

tion and is correctly secured on

its retaining pins.

. Do not use more than one floor

mat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’s

side floor.

The floor mat should be properly secured

using the built-in grommets, by placing the

grommets over the pins and pushing them

downward.

Coat hook

A coat hook is attached to the rear

passenger’s hand grip.

Interior equipment/Floor mat

6-10

(261,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

Obey the following instructions.

. Do not hang coat hangers or

other hard or pointed objects on

the coat hooks. Hang clothing

directly on the coat hooks with-

out using hangers.

. Before hanging clothing on the

coat hooks, make sure there are

no pointed objects in the pock-

ets.

If these instructions are ignored, the

following may occur in sudden

stops or in a collision.

. serious injuries by the items

thrown through the cabin.

. incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-

ployment

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coat

hook that might obstruct the driver’s

view or that could cause injury in

sudden stops or in a collision. And

do not hang items on the coat hook

that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.

Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shopping

bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or

more.

A shopping bag hook is attached to each

side of the cargo area.

Cargo area cover (if

equipped)

The cargo area cover is provided for

covering the cargo area and to protect its

contents from direct sunlight. This cover is

detachable to make room for additional

cargo.

& Using the cover

To extend the cover, pull the end of the

cover out of the housing, then insert its

hooks into the catches as shown. To

rewind it, unhook it from the catches and

it will rewind automatically. You should

hold on to the cover and guide it back into

the cover housing while it is rewinding.

– CONTINUED –

Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook

6-11

(262,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-

tended cover. Putting excessive

weight on the extended cover can

break it and an object on the cover

could tumble forward in the event of

a sudden stop or collision. This

could cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the rear

gate stays while extending and re-

winding the cover.

Scratches on the stays could cause

leakage of gas from the stays, which

may result in their inability to hold

the rear gate open.

& To remove the cover housing

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the right

side and shorten it.

3. Take it off the retainer.

& Stowage of the cargo area

cover

The cargo area cover can be stowed in

under the cargo floor.

1. Raise and fold the rear end of the cargo

floor board.

Interior equipment/Cargo area cover

6-12

(263,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo

area end.

3. Put the cargo floor board back while

hanging two retaining straps on the hooks

that are located on the rear wall of cargo

area.

& To install the cover housing

1. Shorten the cover housing.

2. Insert both ends of the cover housing

into the recesses of the retainers.

Cargo tie-down hooks

(if equipped)

The cargo area is equipped with two or

four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be

secured with a cargo net or ropes.

When using the front tie-down hooks, turn

them down out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-

signed only for securing light cargo.

Never try to secure cargo that ex-

ceeds the capacity of the hooks. The

maximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10

kg) per hook.

Interior equipment/Cargo tie-down hooks

6-13

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(267,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fuel .......................................................................... 7-3

Fuel requirements .................................................. 7-3

Fuel filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-4

State emission testing (U.S. only) ......................... 7-7

Preparing to drive ................................................... 7-8

Starting and stopping the engine

(models without push-button start system) ...... 7-9

Starting engine ...................................................... 7-9

Stopping the engine.............................................. 7-11

Starting and stopping engine

(models with push-button start system) .......... 7-11

Safety precautions ................................................ 7-11

Operating range for push-button start system ....... 7-11

Starting engine ..................................................... 7-11

Stopping engine....................................................7-13

When access key fob does not operate properly ...7-14

Remote engine start system (dealer option) ...... 7-14

Remote engine starter transceiver (fob).................7-15

Alternate operation method for models with

“keyless access with push-button start

system” ..............................................................7-18

Entering the vehicle while it is running via

remote start ........................................................7-18

Entering the vehicle following remote engine

start shutdown.................................................... 7-19

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of

the vehicle ..........................................................7-19

Remote transmitter program

(Remote engine starter transceiver)..................... 7-19

System maintenance.............................................7-19

Certification for remote engine starter ...................7-21

Manual transmission ............................................ 7-21

Shifting speeds .................................................... 7-22

Driving tips........................................................... 7-23

Continuously variable transmission ................... 7-24

Continuously variable transmission features .........7-24

Select lever .......................................................... 7-25

Selection of manual mode (if equipped) ................7-26

Selection of “L” (if equipped)................................7-28

Shift lock function ................................................ 7-28

Driving tips........................................................... 7-30

Power steering...................................................... 7-30

Power steering warning light ................................7-30

Power steering system features ............................7-30

Braking .................................................................. 7-31

Braking tips..........................................................7-31

Brake system ....................................................... 7-31

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators................7-32

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)............................. 7-33

ABS self-check .....................................................7-33

ABS warning light.................................................7-33

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

system ................................................................ 7-34

Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions............. 7-34

Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...................... 7-35

Safety precautions................................................7-35

System features....................................................7-36

Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor ............7-37

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch...................7-37

X-mode (if equipped)............................................ 7-38

To activate/deactivate the X-mode .........................7-39

Starting and operating

(268,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Hill descent control function .................................7-40

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models)............................................ 7-41

Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-43

Parking brake .......................................................7-43

Parking tips ..........................................................7-43

Hill start assist system......................................... 7-45

To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist

system................................................................ 7-46

Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist

OFF indicator light ..............................................7-47

Cruise control (if equipped) ................................. 7-48

To set cruise control .............................................7-48

To temporarily cancel the cruise control................7-49

To turn off the cruise control................................. 7-50

To change the cruising speed ...............................7-50

Cruise control indicator light.................................7-52

Cruise control set indicator light ...........................7-52

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)....................................... 7-52

System features....................................................7-52

System operation ................................................. 7-55

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning

buzzer ............................................................... 7-56

BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................7-58

BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-59

Certification for the BSD/RCTA .............................7-60

Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-60

Reverse Automatic Braking System

(if equipped) ....................................................... 7-61

Reverse Automatic Braking System overview........7-62

Operating conditions ............................................ 7-62

Reverse Automatic Braking System operation....... 7-65

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking

system operation...............................................7-67

Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF

setting............................................................... 7-68

RAB warning indicator..........................................7-69

Handling of the sonar sensors ..............................7-69

Starting and operating

(269,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in quality

or use of an inappropriate fuel

additive may cause damage to the

engine and/or fuel system.

& Fuel requirements

The engine is designed to operate using

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating

of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

! Mexico only

Add a bottle of genuine SUBARU fuel

additive to the fuel every 15,000 km (9,000

miles). Refer to an authorized SUBARU

dealer for details.

! Fuel octane rating

Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating

can cause persistent and heavy knocking,

which can damage the engine. Do not be

concerned if you r vehicle somet imes

knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or

when you accel erate. Contact your

SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with the

specified octane rating and your vehicle

knocks heavily or persistently.

! RON

This octane rating is the Research Octane

Number.

! AKI

This octane rating is the average of the

Research Octane and Motor Octane num-

bers and is commonly referred to as the

Anti Knock Index (AKI).

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed

to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used because it will

damage the emission control system and

may impair driveability and fuel economy.

! Gasoline for California-certified

LEV

If your vehicle was certified to California’s

low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as

indicated on the underhood tune-up label,

it is designed to optimize engine and

emission performance with gasoline that

meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-

fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in

any other state than California, your

vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting

Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-

side California is permitted to have higher

sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-

mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter

and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or

smell. SUBARU recommends that you try

a different brand of unleaded gasoline

having lower sulfur to determine if the

problem is fuel related before returning

your vehicle to an authorized dealer for

service.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-

cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-

pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission control

system performance may deteriorate and

the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-

function indicator light may turn on. If this

happens, return to your authorized

SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is

determined that the condition is caused

by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be

covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-

ditives will help prevent deposits from

forming in your engine and fuel system.

This helps keep your engine in tune and

your emission control system worki ng

properly, and is a way of doing your part

for cleaner air. If you continuously use a

high quality fuel with the proper detergent

and other additives, you should never

need to add any fuel system cleaning

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Fuel

7-3

(270,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

agents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended with

materials called oxygenates. Use of these

fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.

Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol

(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your

vehicle, but should contain no more than

10% ethanol for the proper operation of

your SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that contains

more than 10% ethanol, including from any

pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which

are only some examples of fuel containing

more than 10% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers are

now producing reformulated gasolines,

which are desi gned to reduce vehicle

emissions. SUBARU approves the use of

reformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,

you should ask your service station op-

erators if their gasolines contain deter-

gents and oxygenates and if they have

been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-

sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuels

suited for your vehicle as explained in the

following description.

. Fuel should be unleaded and have an

octane rating no lower than that specified

in this manual.

. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is

sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicle

ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel

mixture AND if it is accompanied by

sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-

vents and corrosion inhibitors required to

prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not

use fuel containing metha nol EXCEPT

under these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems are

experienced and you suspect they may be

fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-

line before seek ing service at your

SUBARU dealer.

. Fuel system damage or dr ivea bi lity

problems which result from the use of

improper fuel are not covered under the

SUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because fuel

may damage the paint, be sure to

wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.

Paint damage caused by spilled fuel

is not covered under the SUBARU

Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Locations of the fuel filler lid and the

lid release lever

Fuel filler lid

Fuel filler lid release lever

Starting and operating/Fuel

7-4

(271,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved in

refueling. Do not allow others to approach

the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler

pipe while refueling is in progress.

Be sure to observe any other precautions

that are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and

turn off all the other electrical components.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid

release lever up. The lever is on the floor at

the left of the driver’s seat.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,

first touch the vehicle body or a

metal portion of the fuel pump or

similar object to discharge any sta-

tic electricity that may be present on

your body. If your body is carrying

an electrostatic charge, there is a

possibility that an elec tric spark

could ignite the fuel, which could

burn you. To avoid acquiring a new

static electric charge, do not get

back into the vehicle while refueling

is in progress.

1) Open

2) Close

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

slowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-

mable. Before refueling, always

turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and

then close all vehicle doors and

windows. Make sure that there

are no lighted cigarettes, open

flames or electrical sparks in the

adjacent area. Only handle fuel

outdoors. Quickly wipe up any

spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp it

firmly and turn it slowly to the left.

Do not remove the cap quickly.

Fuel may be under pressure and

spray out of the fuel filler neck,

especially in hot weather. If you

hear a hissing sound while you

are removing the cap, wait for the

sound to stop and then slowly

open the cap to prevent fuel from

spraying out and creating a fire

hazard.

4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder

inside the fuel filler lid.

WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuel

nozzle securely into the fuel filler

pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Fuel

7-5

(272,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

fully inserted, its automatic stop-

ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow the

tank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stoprefuelingwhentheauto-

matic s top mechanism on the

fuel nozzle activates. If you con-

tinue to add fuel, temperature

changes or other conditions

may cause fuel to overflow from

the tank and create a fire hazard.

5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler

pump automatically stops. Do not add any

more fuel.

6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise

until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain

not to catch the tether under the cap while

tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tightened

until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage

in the event of an accident.

7. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the painted

surface, rinse it off immedia tely.

Otherwise, the painted surface

could be damaged.

NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel

gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler

door (lid) is located on the right side of

the vehicle.

. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened

until it clicks or if the tether is caught

under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE

warning light/malfunction indicator

light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK

ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-

dicator light” F3-15.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents to

the fuel tank. The addition of a

cleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to the

right until it clicks to ensure that

it is fully tightened. If the cap is

not securely tightened, fuel may

leak out while the vehicle is being

driven or fuel spillage could oc-

cur in the event of an accident,

creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Because

fuel may damage the paint, be

sure to wipe off any spilled fuel

quickly. Paint damage caused by

spilled fuel is not covered under

the SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARU

fuel filler cap. If you use the

wrong cap, it may not fit or have

proper venting and your fuel tank

and emission control system

may be damaged. It could also

lead to fuel spillage and a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tank

whenever the low fuel warning

light illuminates. Engine misfires

as a result of an empty tank could

cause damage to the engine.

Continuing to operate your vehi-

cle at an extremely low fuel level

may result in a reduction of

engine performance.

Starting and operating/Fuel

7-6

(273,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

State emission testing

(U.S. only)

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometer

when testing an All-Wheel Drive

(AWD) model.

Testing of an AWD model must

NEVER be performed on a single

two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-

ing to do so will result in uncon-

trolled vehicle movement and may

cause an accident or injuries to

persons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-

ber to tell your inspection or

service station in advance not to

place your SUBARU AWD vehicle

on a two-wheel dynamometer.

Otherwise, serious transmission

damage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due to

improper testing is not covered

under the SUBARU Limited War-

ranty and is the responsibility of

the state inspection program or

its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal states

have Inspection/Maintenance programs to

inspect your vehicle’s em ission control

system. If your vehicle does not pass this

test, some states may deny renewal of

your vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer

that monitors the performance of the

engine’s emission control system. Certi-

fied emission inspectors will inspect the

On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as

part of the state emission inspection

process. The OBDII system is designed

to detect engine and transmission pro-

blems that might cause the vehicle emis-

sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII

inspections apply to all 1996 model year

and newer passenger cars and trucks.

Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-

bia have implemented emission inspection

of the OBDII system.

. The inspection of the OBDII system

consists of a visual operational check of

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-

function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-

amination of the OBDII system with an

electronic scan tool.

. A vehicle passes the OBDII system

inspection if proper operation of the

“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostic

trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness

monitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if

the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not

properly operating (light is illuminated or is

not working due to faulty LED [Light

Emitting Diode]) or there is one or more

diagnostic trouble codes sto red in the

vehicle’s computer.

. A state emission inspection may reject

(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of

OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT

READY” is greater than one. If the

vehicle’s battery has been recently re-

placed or disconnected, the OBDII system

inspection may indicate that the vehicle is

not ready for the emission test. Under this

condition, the vehicle driver should be

instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a

few days to reset the readiness monitors

and return for an emission re-inspection.

. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles

should contact their SUBARU Dealer for

service.

Some states still use dynamometers in

their emission inspection program. A

dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like

testing device that allows your vehicle’s

wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in

one place. Prior to your vehicle being put

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)

7-7

(274,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

on a dynamometer, tell your emission

inspector not to place your SUBARU

AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-

ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-

sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental Protection

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel

dynamometers in their emission testing

program have EXEMPTED SUBARU

AWD vehicles from t he portion of the

testing program that involves a two-wheel

dynamometer. There are some states that

use four-wheel dynamometers in their

testing program. When properly used, this

equipment should not damage a SUBARU

AWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rear

wheels be jacked off the ground, nor

should the driveshaft be disconnected in

an attempt to bypass AWD for state

emission testing. An AWD vehicle must

be tested using an AWD dynamometer

with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checks

and adjustments every day before you

start driving.

1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and

lights are clean and unobstructed.

2. Check the appearance and condition

of the tires. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.

4. Check that no small animals enter the

engine compartment.

5. Check that the hood and rear gate are

fully closed.

6. Check the adjustment of the seat.

7. Check the adjustment of the inside and

outside mirrors.

8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your

passengers have fastened their seatbelts.

9. Check the operation of the warning

and indicator lights when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-

ing lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-

ing fan and belts of the engine may

result in a malfunction. Check that

no small animal enters the engine

compartment and under the vehicle

before starting the engine.

NOTE

. Engine oil , eng ine coolant, brake

fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels

should be checked daily, weekly or at

fuel stops.

. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-

ler hitch (dealer option)” F8-14

Starting and operating/Preparing to drive

7-8

(275,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Starting and stopping the en-

gine (models without push-

button start system)

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motor

continuously for more than 10 sec-

onds. If the engine fails to start after

operating the starter for 5 to 10

seconds, wait for 10 seconds o r

more before trying again.

NOTE

It may be difficult to start the engine

when the battery has been discon-

nected and reconnected (for mainte-

nance or other purposes). This diffi-

culty is caused by the electronically

controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis

function. To overcome it, keep the

ignition switch in the “ON” position

for approximately 10 seconds before

starting the engine.

& Starting engine

! General precautions when starting

engine

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-

side the vehicle (except w hen

using the remote engine start

system). It may result in an acci-

dent.

. Do not leave the engine running

in locations with poor ventilation,

such as a garage and indoors.

The exhaust gas may enter the

vehicle or indoors, and it may

result in carbon monoxide poi-

soning.

. Do not start the engine near dry

foliage, paper, or other flammable

substances. The exhaust pipe

and exhaust emissions can cre-

ate a fire hazard at high tempera-

tures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped during

driving, the catalyst may over-

heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sure

to sit in the driver’s seat (except

when using the remote engine

start system).

NOTE

. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-

eration immediately after the engine

has started.

. For a short time after the engine has

started, the engine speed is kept high.

When the warm-up is completed, the

engine speed lowers automatically.

. On rare occasions, it may be difficult

to start the engine depending on the

fuel and the usage condition (repeated

driving of a distance in which the

engine has not warmed up sufficiently).

In such a case, it is recommended that

you change to a different brand of fuel.

. On rare occasions, transient knock-

ing may be heard from the engine when

the accelerator is operated rapidly such

as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-

eration. This is not a malfunction.

. The engine starts more easily when

the headlights, air conditioner and rear

window defogger are turned off.

. Do not shift the select lever (CVT

models) or shift lever (MT models)

while the starter is cranking.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)

7-9

(276,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! MT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor

and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold

the clutch pedal to the floor while starting

the engine.

The starter motor will only operate when

the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the

floor.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator” F 3-12.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at

least 10 seconds. After checking that

the parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the ac-

celerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. After waiting for 10

seconds or longer, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position without

depressing the accelerator pedal.

(4) If the engine still fails to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

! CVT models

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”

position (preferably the “P ” position).

The starter motor will only operate when

the select lever is at the “

P” or “N” position.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position and check the operation of the

warning and indicator lights. Refer to

“Warning and indicator” F 3-12.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”

position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediately

after the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try the

following procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at

least 10 seconds. After checking that

the parking brake is firmly set, turn the

ignition switch to the “START” position

while depressing the accelerator pedal

slightly (approximately a quarter of the

full stroke). Release the accelerator

pedal as soon as the engine starts.

(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and wait for at least 10

seconds. Then fully depress the accel-

erator pedal and turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position. If the

engine starts, quickly release the ac-

celerator pedal.

(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn

the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. After waiting for 10

seconds or longer, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position without

depressing the accelerator pedal.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)

7-10

(277,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

(4) If the engine still refuses to start,

contact your nearest SUBARU dealer

for assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicator

lights have turned off after the engine has

started. The fuel injection system auto-

matically lowers the idle speed as the

engine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, make sure

that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”

position and that the parking brake is

applied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, shift the select

lever into the “N” position. Do not

attempt to place the select lever of a

moving vehicle into the “P” position.

& Stopping the engine

The ignition switch should be turned off

only when the vehicle is stopped and the

engine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when the

vehicle is moving. This will cause

loss of power to the power steering

and the brake booster, making steer-

ing and braking more difficult. It

could also result in accidental acti-

vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-

tion on the ignition switch, causing

the steering wheel to lock.

Starting and stopping engine

(models with push-button

start system)

& Safety precautions

Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-3.

& Operating range for push-

button start system

Refer to “Operating range for push-button

start system” F3-6.

& Starting engine

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “Starting e ngine”

F7-9.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch flashes in

green after the engine has

started, never drive the vehicle.

The steering is still locked, and it

may result in an accident.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

7-11

(278,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator on

the push-button ignition switch is

flashing in orange, there may be a

malfunction with the vehicle.

Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-

diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but-

ton ignition switch is flashing in

green after the engine has

started, it means that the steering

is still locked. Depress the brake

pedal while moving the steering

wheel to the right and left, and

press the push-button ignition

switch.

. Do not continue pushing the

push-button ignition switch for

more than 10 seconds. Doing so

could cause a malfunction. If the

engine does not start, stop push-

ing the push-button ignition

switch. Instead, press the push-

button ignition switch without

depressing the brake pedal to

switch the power status to

“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then

push the pu sh-button ignition

switch to start the engine.

NOTE

. For a short time after the engine has

started, the engine speed is kept high.

When the warm-up is completed, the

engine speed lowers automatically.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the clutch pedal (MT models) or the

brake pedal (CVT models), the engine

starter operates for a maximum of 10

seconds and after starting the engine,

the starter stops automatically.

. When the push-button ignition

switch is pressed while depressing

the clutch pedal (MT models) or the

brake pedal (CVT models), the engine

can be started regardless of the status

of the push-button ignition switch.

. If the security indicator light illumi-

nates when you attempt to start the

engine but the engine does not start,

press the push-button ignition switch

to switch the power to “OFF” and then

try to start the engine again.

. If the engine does not start, press the

push-button ignition switch without

depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-

els) or the brake pedal (CVT models) to

switch the power to “OFF”. Then, while

depressing the clutch pedal (MT mod-

els) or the brake pedal (CVT models)

more forcefully, press the push-button

ignition switch.

. The engine start procedures may not

function depending on the radio wave

conditions around the vehicle. In such

a case, refer to “Starting engine” F9-

18.

. If the vehicle battery is discharged,

the st eering cannot be unlocked.

Charge the battery.

. Do not shift the select lever while the

starter is cranking.

1) Operation indicator

2) Push-button ignition switch

When the push-button ignition switch is

pressed while depressing the clutch pedal

(MT models) or the brake pedal (CVT

models), the engine will start. The starting

procedure for the engine is as follows.

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

7-12

(279,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! MT models

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the shift lever to neutral.

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Depress the clutch pedal until the

indicator on the push-button ignition switch

turns green.

6. While depressing the clutch pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

In case the engine does not start by the

normal engine start procedure, move

the shift lever to the neutral position,

and switch the power to “ACC”. De-

press the clutch pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

! CVT models

1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the

driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Shift the select lever into the “ P”

position. The engine can also start when

the select lever is in the “N” position,

however, for safety reasons, start in the “P”

position.

4. Depress the brake pedal until the

operation indi cator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green. When starting

with the select lever in the “N” position, the

indicator does not turn green.

5. While depressing the brake pedal,

press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

. While pressing the select lever but-

ton in, the indicator on the push-button

ignition switch will not turn green even

when the select lever is in the “P”

position.

. In case the engine does not start by

the normal engine start procedure,

move the select lever to the “P” posi-

tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.

Depress the brake pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least

15 seconds. The engine may start. Only

use this engine start procedure in case

of emergency.

. When the engine is not started, the

brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a

case, depress the brake pedal more

forcefully than usual. Check that the

operation indicator on the push-button

ignition switch turns green, and press

the push-button ignition switch to start

the engine.

& Stopping engine

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. Move the select lever to the “P”

position (CVT models).

3. Press the push-button ignition switch.

The engine will stop, and the power will be

switched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push -butt on

ignition switch during driving.

When the push-button ignition

switch is operated as follows,

the engine will stop.

– The switch is pressed and held

for 3 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

times or more in succession.

When the engine stops, the brake

booster will not function. A great-

er foot pressure will be required

on the brake pedal.

The power steering system will

not operate either. A greater force

will be required to steer, and it

may result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)

7-13

(280,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

do not operate the push-button

ignition switch or open any of the

doors until the vehicle is stopped

in a safe location. It is dangerous

because the steering lock may be

activated. Stop the vehicle in a

safe place, and contact a

SUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

For CVT models

. Do not stop the engine while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while the

select lever is in a position other

than the “P” position, the power

will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is

left in this condition, the battery

may be discharged.

NOTE

Although you can stop the engine by

operating the push-button ignition

switch, do not stop the engine during

driving except in an emergency.

& When access key fob does

not operate properly

Refer to “Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly” F9-17.

Remote engine start system

(dealer option)

WARNING

. There are some general precau-

tions when starting the engine.

Carefully read the precautions

described in “General precau-

tions when starting engine” F7-

. Do not remote start a vehicle in an

enclosed environment (e.g.

closed garage). Prolonged opera-

tion of a m otor vehicle in an

enclosed environment can cause

a harmful build-up of Carbon

Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is

harmful to your health. Exposure

to high levels of Carbon Monox-

ide can cause headaches, dizzi-

ness or in extreme cases uncon-

sciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows you

to start the engine from outside the vehicle.

In addition, the remote engine start system

can activate the heater or air conditioner,

providing you with a comfortable cabin

upon entry. For more details, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for the re-

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-14

(281,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

mote engine start system.

NOTE

. The length of time for which it is

acceptable to allow t he engine to

remain idling may be bound by local

laws and regulations. Check the local

rules when using the remote engine

start system.

. When taking your vehicle in for

service, it is recommended that you

inform the service personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with a remote

engine start system.

& Remote engine starter trans-

ceiver (fob)

1) Fob button

! Starting the engine

NOTE

All vehicle doors (including rear gate)

and the engine hood must be closed

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. Any open entry point will

prevent starting or cause the engine to

stop.

The remote engine start system is acti-

vated by pressing the fob button on your

remote engine starter transceiver (fob)

twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within

operating range of the system and the start

request is received, the following phenom-

ena will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps once.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

indicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safety

preconditions before starting, and if all

conditions are met, the engine will start

within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,

the following phenomena will occur.

. The fob flashes and beeps twice.

. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remote

engine start system, the following phe-

nomena will occur.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, and

parking lights remain illuminated.

. The fob button flashes once every 3

seconds.

. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start

(or starts and stalls) the remote engine

start system will power off and then

attempt to start the engine 3 additional

times. The system will not attempt to

restart the engine if it determines a vehicle

malfunction is preventing starting. If the

engine does not start after 3 additional

attempts, the remote engine start request

will be aborted.

! Stopping the engine

Press and hold the fob button for at least 2

seconds to stop the engine. The fob will

flash and beep three times, indicating the

engine has stopped. If the stop request is

not received (for example, if the user is too

far away from the vehicle), the fob will

continue to flash once every 3 seconds.

The system will automatically stop the

engine after 15 minutes.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-15

(282,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Remote start safety features

For safety and security reasons, the

remote engine start system will prevent

starting (or stop the engine if running) and

sound the horn twice if any of the following

conditions is detected. In addition, the fob

will flash and beep 3 times.

. The total run-time has exceeded 20

minutes

. The brake pedal is depressed

. A key is in the ignition switch

. The engine hood is open

. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500

RPM

. The security alarm is triggered

. The select lever is not in the “P” position

(CVT models)

If the system detects any door (including

the rear gate) open during operation, it will

prevent starting or stop the engine, and

sound the horn and flash side marker

lights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, i f the

vehicle’s engine management system

determines there is a safety risk due to a

vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will

power down and the horn will sound 3

times.

NOTE

. If the alarm system is armed at the

time of remote engine starter activation

(the security indicator light on the

combination meter is flashing), the

alarm system will remain armed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

. If the alarm system is disarmed at

the time of remote engine starter acti-

vation (the security indicator light on

the combination meter is not flashing),

the alarm system will remain disarmed

throughout the remote start run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con-

firmation

Your remote engine starter fob is a

bidirectional transceiver that can confirm

system operation with several different

visual and audible indications. The fob’s

LED-backlit button and internal piezo

buzzer will indicate status of the system

using the following flash and beep se-

quences, provided the fob is within opera-

tional range of the system.

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-16

(283,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Precondition

Fob Indication

Meaning

Flash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed

Continuous while button is

held down

— The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fob

button twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started

2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation

1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps

Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety

reasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing and

holding fob button for at least 2 sec.

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request

1 flash every 3 sec —

Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-17

(284,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Alternate operation method

for models with “keyless ac-

cess with push-button start

system”

Access key fob

1) Lock button

An access key fob can be used as the

remote engine start transmitter. Operate

the lock button to start or stop the engine

as follows.

! Before starting the engine

Before using the remote engine start

system to start the engine, confirm the

following conditions.

. The select lever is in the “P” position

(CVT models).

. All doors including the rear gate are

closed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the

“OFF” position.

! When starting the engine

To start the engine with remote engine

start system, briefly press the lock button

twice within 2 seconds, then press and

hold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. The

hazard warning flashers then flash once

and the keyless buzzer chirps once.

2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button

briefly again. The hazard warning flashers

then flash once again, and the keyless

buzzer chirps once again.

3. After step 2, immediately press and

hold the lock button. The hazard warning

flashers then flash three times, and the

horn will honk once.

4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,

release the lock button. The engine will

then start successfully.

! When stopping the engine

Press and hold the lock button to stop the

engine with remote engine start system.

! Remote start safety features

For detailed information, refer to “Remote

start safety features” F7-16.

& Entering the vehicle while it is

running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the

keyless access function (if equipped) or

remote keyless entry system.

If the vehicle’s doors are unlocked manu-

ally using the key, the vehicle’s alarm

system will trigger (if the alarm system is

armed prior to activating the remote

engine start system) and the engine will

turn off. Perform either of the following

procedures to disarm the alarm system.

Refer to “Alarm system” F2-24.

. Insert the key into the ignition switch

and turn it to the “ON” position (models

without “keyless access with push-

button start system”)

. Turn the push-button ignition switch

to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models

with “keyless access with push-button

start system”)

. Press any button on the access key

fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle.

3. The engine will shut down when any

door or rear gate is opened.

4. Insert the key into the ignition switch

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-18

(285,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

and turn to the “START” position to restart

the engine.

& Entering the vehicle following

remote engine start shut-

down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is

opened by th e remote keyle ss entry

transmitter within a few seconds immedi-

ately following remote engine start shut-

down.

& Pre-heating or pre-cooling

the interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-

perature controls to the desired setting and

operation. After the system starts the

engine, the heater or air conditioning will

activate and heat or cool the interior to

your setting.

& Remote transmitter program

(Remote engine starter

transceiver)

New transmitters can be programmed to

the remote engine start system in the

event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,

damaged or additional transmitters are

desired (the system will accept up to eight

transmitters). New remote engine start

transmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.

1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s

door must remain opened throughout the

entire process).

2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then

“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/

“OFF”, back to “ON ” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,

then back to “ON” again and leave the

ignition “ON” throughout the programming

process.

4. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn three times, indicating that

the system has entered the transmitter

learn mode.

5. Press and release the “

” button on

the transmitter that you want to program.

6. The system will flash the side marker

lights, tail lights and parking lights and

honk the horn one time, indicating that the

system has learned the transmitter. Upon

successful programming, the remote start

confirmation transmitter button will flash

one time.

7. Repeat step 5 for any additional

transmitters (the system will accept up to

eight transmitters).

8. The system will exit the transmitter

learn mode if the key is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed

or after 2 minutes.

& System maintenance

NOTE

For remote engine starter transceiver:

In the event that the vehicle’s battery is

replaced, discharged or disconnected,

it will be necessary to start the vehicle a

minimum of one time using the key

prior to activating the remote engine

start system. This is required to allow

the vehicle electronic systems to re-

synchronize.

! Changing the battery

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in th e remote engine start

transmitter when replacing the

battery.

. Be careful not to damage the

printed circuit board in the re-

mote engine start transmitter

when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; chi ldren could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion if

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-19

(286,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

an incorrect replacement battery

is used. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of bat-

tery.

. Battery should not be exposed to

excessive heat such as sunshine,

fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

Perform the procedure described in “Re-

placing battery of access key fob” F11-43.

For remote engine starter transceiver:

The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)

supplied in your remote engine start

transmitter should last approximately one

year, depending on usage. When the

battery begin to weaken, you will notice a

decrease in range (distance from the

vehicle that your remote control operates).

Follow the instructions below to change

the remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-

cated on the back side lower left corner of

the transmitter.

2. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flat-

head screwdriver.

3. Remove the circuit board from the

bottom half of the case and remove the

battery and replace with new one. Be sure

to observe the (+) sign on the old battery

before removing it to ensure that the new

battery is inserted properly (battery “+”

Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)

7-20

(287,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

should be pointed away from the transmit-

ter circuit board on battery).

4. Carefully snap the case halves back

together, reinstall the phillips screw and

test the remote engine start system.

& Certification for remote en-

gine starter

! U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any i nterference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

! Canada-spec. models

Manual transmission

The manual transmission is a fully syn-

chromeshed, 6-forward-speed and 1-re-

verse-speed transmission.

The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever

knob.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

7-21

(288,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

To change the shift lever position:

1. Depress the clutch pedal.

2. To shift into all positions other than “R”,

move the shift lever accordingly.

1) Slider

3. To shift into the “R” position, hold up the

slider, move the lever to the “R” position,

then release the slider.

4. Gradually release the clutch pedal.

If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the

transmission in neutral, release the clutch

pedal momentarily, and then try again.

WARNING

. Do not drive the vehicle with the

clutch disengaged (i.e., when the

clutch pedal is depressed) or with

the shift lever in the neutral

position. Engine braking has no

effect in either of these condi-

tions and the risk of an accident

is consequently increased.

. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,

release the clutch pedal) sud-

denly when starting the vehicle.

By doing so the vehicle might

unexpectedly accelerate or the

transmission could malfunction.

CAUTION

Shift into reverse ONLY when the

vehicle has completely stopped. It

may cause damage to the transmis-

sion to try shifting into reverse when

the vehicle is moving.

& Shifting speeds

! Recommended shifting speeds

The best compromise between fuel econ-

omy and vehicle performance during

normal driving is ensured by shifting up

at the speeds listed in the following table.

Shift up mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th

50 (81)

! Maximum allowable speeds

The following table shows the maximum

speeds that are possible with each differ-

ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will

enter the red area if these speeds are

exceeded.

With the exception of cases where sudden

acceleration is required, the vehicle should

not be driven with the tachometer’s needle

inside the red area. Failure to observe this

precaution can lead to excessive engine

wear and poor fuel economy.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

7-22

(289,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Gear mph (km/h)

1st 26 (42)

2nd 52 (84)

3rd 78 (126)

4th

Legal speed limit

(Posted limit speed)

5th

6th

WARNING

When shifting down a gear, ensure

that the vehicle is not travelling at a

speed exceeding the Maximum Al-

lowable Speed for the gear which is

about to be selected. Failure to

observe this precaution can lead to

engine over-revving and this in turn

can result in engine damage.

In addition, sudden application of

engine brakes when the vehicle is

travelling on a slippery surface can

lead to wheel locking; as a conse-

quence, control of the vehicle may

be lost and the risk of an accident

increased.

NOTE

Never exceed the posted speed limit.

& Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to

hold your vehicle at a standstill on an

upgrade. Either of those actions may

cause clutch damage.

Do not drive with your hand resting on the

shift lever. This may cause wear on the

transmission components.

When it is necessary to reduce vehicle

speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,

or driving up steep hills, downshift to a

lower gear before the engine starts to

labor.

On steep downgrades, downshift the

transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear

as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe

speed and to extend brake pad life.

In this way, the engine provides a braking

effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)

the brakes while descending a hill, they

may overheat and not work properly.

The engine may, on rare occasions, knock

when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or

rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This

phenomenon is not an indication of a

problem in your vehicle.

Starting and operating/Manual transmission

7-23

(290,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Continuously variable trans-

mission

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”

position into the “D” or “R” position

while depressing the accelerator

pedal. This may cause the vehicle

to jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” position

only after the vehicle is comple-

tely stopped. Shifting while the

vehicle is moving may cause

damage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for more

than 5 seconds in any position

except the “N” or “P” position

when the brake is applied or

when chocks are used in the

wheels. This may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle rearward

by inertia with the select lever set

in a forward driving position or

move the vehicle forw ard by

inertia with the select lever set

in the “R” position. Doing so may

result in an unexpected accident

or malfunction.

. Do not shift from the “D” position

into the “R” position or vice versa

until the vehicle has completely

stopped. Such shifting may

cause damage to the transmis-

sion.

. When parking the vehicle, first

securely apply the parking brake

and then place the select lever in

the “P” position. Do not park for a

long time with the select lever in

any other position as doing so

could result in a dead battery.

& Continuously variable trans-

mission features

The continuously variable transmission is

electronically controlled and provides an

infinite number of forward speeds and 1

reverse speed. For some models, it also

has a manual mode or an “L” position.

NOTE

. When the engine coolant tempera-

ture is still low, the transmission will

upshift or downshift at higher engine

speeds than when the coolant tempera-

ture is sufficiently high in order to

shorten the warm-up time and improve

driveability. The gearshift timing will

automatically shift to the normal timing

after the engine has warmed up.

. Immediately after transmission fluid

is replaced, you may feel that the

transmission operation is somewhat

unusual. This results from invalidation

of data which the on-board computer

has collected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at the

most appropriate times for the current

condition of your vehicle. Optimized

shifting will be restored as the vehicle

continues to be driven for a while.

. When driving a CVT model under

continuous heavy load conditions such

as when towing a camper or climbing a

long, steep hill, the engine speed or the

vehicle speed may automatically be

reduced. This is not a malfunction. This

phenomenon results from the engine

control function maintaining the cool-

ing performance of the vehicle. The

engine and vehicle speed will return to

a normal speed when the engine is able

to maintain the optimum cooling per-

formance after the heavy load de-

creases. Driving under a heavy load

must be performed with extreme care.

Do not try to pass a vehicle in front

when driving on an uphill slope while

towing.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

7-24

(291,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. The continuously variable transmis-

sion is a chain type system that pro-

vides superior transmission efficiency

for maximum fuel economy. At times,

depending on varying driving condi-

tions, a chain operating sound may be

heard that is characteristic of this type

of system.

& Select lever

! Select lever positions

1) Select lever button

1) Models with “L” position

2) Models with manual mode

: With the brake pedal depressed, shift

while pressing the select lever button

in.

: Shift while pressing the select lever

button in.

: Shift without pressing the select lever

button.

The select lever has four positions, “P”,

“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”

gate.

NOTE

For some models, to protect the engine

while the select lever is in the “P” or “N”

position, the engine is controlled so

that the engine speed may not become

too high even if the accelerator pedal is

depressed hard.

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle and

starting the engine. In this position, the

transmission is mechanically locked to

prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply the

parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”

position. Do not hold the vehicle with only

the mechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P”

position to any other position, you should

depress the brake pedal fully then move

the select lever. This prevents the vehicle

from lurching when it is started.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle. To

shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the

vehicle completely then move the lever to

the “R” position while pressing the select

lever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turned

to the “LOCK”/“ OFF ” position, movement

of the select lever from the “N” to “R”

position is possible for a limited time period

by depressing the brake pedal, and then it

becomes impossible. For details, refer to

“Shift lock function” F7-28.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

7-25

(292,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalled

engine. In this position, the transmission is

neutral, meaning that the wheels and

transmission are not locked. Therefore,

the vehicle will roll freely, even on the

slightest incline unless the parking brake

or foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission in

neutral. Engine braking has no effect in

this condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with the

select lever in the “N” (neutral)

position. Engine braking has no

effect in this condition and the risk

of an accident is consequently in-

creased.

NOTE

If the select lever is in the “N” position

when you stop the engine for parking,

you may not subsequently be able to

move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If

this happens, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position. You will then be able

to move the select lever to the “P”

position.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving. The

transmission shifts automatically and con-

tinuously into a suitable gear according to

the vehicle speed and the acceleration you

require. Also, while driving up and down a

hill, the transmission assists and controls

the driving performance and engine brak-

ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in “D”

position, depress the accelerator pedal

fully to the floor and hold that position. The

transmission will automatically downshift.

In this case, the transmission will operate

like a conventional automatic transmis-

sion. When you release the pedal, the

transmission will return to the original gear

position.

For models with manual mode, if one of the

shift paddles behind the steering wheel is

operated while driving in the “ D” position,

the transmission will temporarily switch to

the manual mode. In this mode, you can

shift into any gear position using the shift

paddles. For details about the manual

mode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”

F7-26. Once the vehicle speed stabilizes,

the transmission will switch from the

manual mode back to the “D” position for

normal driving.

& Selection of manual mode (if

equipped)

With the vehicle either moving or station-

ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select the

manual mode.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

7-26

(293,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Type A

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

Type B

1) Upshift indicator

2) Downshift indicator

3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, the

gear position indicator and upshift indica-

tor and/or downshift indicator on the

combination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows the

currently selected gear in the 1st-to-7th-

gear range. The upshift and downshift

indicators show when a gear shift is

possible. When the upshift indicator “

”

illuminates, upshifting is possible. When

the downshift indicator “

” illuminates,

downshifting is possible. When both in-

dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-

shifting are both possible. When the

vehicle stops (for example, at traffic

signals) the gear will be automatically

shifted to the 1st position and the down-

shift indicator will turn off.

Gearshifts can be performed using the

shift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,

pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated

on it. To downshift to the next lower gear

position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”

indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return the

select lever to the “D” position from the “M”

position.

CAUTION

Do not place or hang anything on the

shift paddles. Doing so may result in

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

7-27

(294,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

accidental gear shifting.

NOTE

Please read the following points care-

fully and bear them in mind when using

the manual mode.

. If you attempt to shift down when the

engine speed is too high, i.e., when a

downshift would push the tachometer

needle beyond the red zone, beeps will

be emitted to warn you that the down-

shift is not possible.

. If you attempt to shift up when the

vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-

sion will not respond.

. You can perform a skip-shift (for

example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating

the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-

sion.

. The transmission automatically se-

lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops

moving.

. If the temperature of the transmis-

sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT

OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-

nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-

ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

and let the engine idle until the warning

light turns off.

& Selection of “L” (if equipped)

“L” is for using engine braking when going

down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move

the select lever from the “D” position to the

“L” position.

When selected, t he indicator “L” will

illuminate on the combination meter.

To deselect “L”, move the select lever to

the “D” position.

& Shift lock function

The shift lock function helps prevent the

improper operation of the select lever.

. The select lever cannot be operated

unless the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

. The select lever cannot be moved from

the “P” position to any other position before

the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the

brake pedal first, and then operate the

select lever.

. Only the “P” position allows you to turn

the ignition switch from the “ACC” position

to the “LOCK”/“ OFF ” position and remove

the key from the ignition switch.

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select

lever is in the “N” position, the select lever

may not be moved to the “P” position after

a period of time. Therefore, move the

select lever to the “P” position with the

brake pedal depressed soon after the

ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

7-28

(295,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turn

the ignition switch back to the “ON”

position then move the select lever to the

“P” position with the select lever button

pressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, perform

the following steps.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “P” to “N”:

Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button” F7-29.

. When the select lever cannot be

shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:

Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition

switch in the “ACC” position, move the

select lever to the “P” position with the

select lever button pressed and brake

pedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure,

the shift lock system (or the vehicle control

system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a

SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon

as possible.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, refer to

“Shift lock release using the shift lock

release button” F7-29.

! Shift lock release using the shift

lock release button

Perform the following procedure to release

the shift lock.

1. Apply the parking brake and turn the

ignition switch to the “ LOCK”/ “OFF” posi-

tion.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to

remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock

release button is located under the shift

lock cover.

3. Remove the grip portion of the screw-

driver.

4. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert a screwdriver into the hole, move it

right and left while pushing the shift lock

release button using a screwdriver, and

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission

7-29

(296,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

then move the select lever.

If the select lever does not move after

performing the above procedure, the shift

lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-

tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as

soon as possible.

& Driving tips

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedals

are depressed at the same time,

driving torque may be restrained.

This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brake

when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or

“R” position.

. Always apply the parking brake when

parking you r vehicle. Do n ot hold the

vehicle with only the mechanical friction

of the transmission.

. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary

position on an uphill grade by using the “D”

position. Use the brake instead.

. The engine may, on rare occasions,

knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-

ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.

This phenomenon does n ot indicat e a

malfunction.

Power steering

& Power steering warning light

& Power steering system fea-

tures

The vehicle is equipped with an electric

power steering system. When the ignition

switch is turned to the “ ON” position, the

power steering warning light on the com-

bination meter illuminates to inform the

driver that the warning system is function-

ing properly. Then, if the engine started,

the warning light turns off to inform the

driver that the steering power assist is

operational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warning

light is illuminated, there may be

more resistance when the steering

wheel is operated. Drive carefully to

the nearest SUBARU dealer and

have the vehicle inspected immedi-

ately.

NOTE

If the steering wheel is operated in the

following ways, the power steering

control system may temporarily limit

the power assist in order to prevent the

system components, such as the con-

trol computer and drive motor, from

overheating.

. The steering wheel is operated fre-

quently and turned sharply while the

vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low

speeds, such as while frequently turn-

ing the steering wheel during parallel

parking.

. The steering wheel remains in the

fully turned position for a long period of

time.

At this time, there will be more resis-

tance when steering. However this is

not a malfunction. Normal steering

force will be restored after the steering

Starting and operating/Power steering

7-30

(297,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

wheel is not operated for a while and

the power steering control system has

an opportunity to cool down. However,

if the power steering is operated in a

non-standard way which causes power

assist limitation to occur too frequently,

this may result in a malfunction of the

power steering control system.

Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. This can cause

dangerous overheating of the

brakes and needless wear on the

brake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing the

vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a

result, brake stopping distance will be

longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle

at a safe speed while lightly depressing the

brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine braking

in addition to foot braking. When descend-

ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,

the brakes may start working improperly

because of brake fluid overheating,

caused by overheated brake pads. To help

prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get

stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly

when a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep

driving straight ahead while gradually

reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the

road to a safe location.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake

systems. Each circuit works diagonally

across the vehicle. If one circuit of the

brake system should fail, the other half of

the system still works. If one circuit fails,

the brake pedal will go down much closer

to the floor than usual and you will need to

press it down much harder. And a much

longer distance will be needed to stop the

vehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifold

vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn

off the engine while driving because that

will turn off the brake booster, resulting in

poor braking power.

The brakes will continue to work even

when the brake booster completely stops

functioning. If this happens, you will have

to depress the pedal much harder than

during normal braking, and the braking

distance will increase.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Braking

7-31

(298,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Supplemental booster function

when vacuum pressure fails

While the ignition switch is turned “ON”

and the engine is running, the supple-

mental booster function operates when the

brake booster performance is decreased

due to insufficient vacuum boost.

When the brake pedal is depressed while

the supplemental booster function is oper-

ating, an operation sound and brake pedal

vibration may be generated. This is not a

malfunction.

! Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about the

brake assist. It is not a system that

brings more braking ability to the

vehicle beyond its braking capabil-

ity. Always use t he utmost care

when driving regarding vehicl e

speed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,

continue depressing the brake pedal

strongly to bring the effect of the

brake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.

It assists the brake power when the driver

cannot depress the brake pedal strongly

and the brake power is insufficient.

Brake assist generates the brake power

according to the speed at which the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

NOTE

When you depress the brake pedal

strongly or suddenly, the following

phenomena occur. However, even

though these occur, they do not indi-

cate any malfunctions, and the brake

assist system is operating properly.

. You might feel that the brake pedal is

applied by lighter force and generates a

greater braking force.

. You might hear an ABS operating

noise from the engine compartment.

& Disc brake pad wear warning

indicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-

tors on the disc brakes give a warning

noise when the brake pads are worn.

If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard

from the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle checked by

your SUBARU dealer.

Starting and operating/Braking

7-32

(299,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-

tem)

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels

which may occur during sudden braking or

braking on slippery road surfaces. This

helps prevent the loss of steering control

and directional stability caused by wheel

lock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may hear

a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration

in the brake pedal. This is normal when the

ABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehicle

speed is below approximately 6 mph (10

km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the ABS

could easily lead to a serious acci-

dent.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-

crease stopping distance. You

should always maintain a safe

following distance from other

vehicles.

. When driving on badly surfaced

roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or

over deep newly fallen snow,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. When driving under

these conditions, therefore, re-

duce your speed and leave ample

distance from other vehicles.

. When tire chains are installed,

stopping distances may be long-

er for a vehicle with the ABS than

one without. Be sure to reduce

your speed and maintain a safe

distance from the vehicle in front.

. When you feel the ABS operating,

you should maintai n constan t

brake pedal p ressure. Do not

pump the brake pedal since

doing so may defeat the opera-

tion of the ABS.

& ABS self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may

feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar

to when the ABS operates, and you may

also hear the sound of the ABS working

from t he engine compartment. This is

caused by an automatic functional test of

the ABS being carried out and does not

indicate a malfunction.

& ABS warning light

Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-20.

Starting and operating/ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

7-33

(300,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Electronic Brake Force Dis-

tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-

ness of the brakes by allowing the rear

brakes to supply a greater proportion of the

braking force. It functions by adjusting the

distribution of braking force to the rear

wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s

loading condition and speed.

The EBD system is an integral part of the

ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-

nents to perform its function of optimizing

the distribution of braking force. If any of

the ABS components used by the EBD

system malfunction, the EBD system also

stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, you

may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight

vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal

and does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD system

malfunctions

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,

the system stops working and the following

warning lights illuminate simultaneously.

. Brake system warning light

. ABS warning light

. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

The EBD system may be malfunctioning if

all the warning lights illuminate simulta-

neously during driving.

Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the

conventional braking system will still func-

tion. However, the rear wheels will be more

prone to locking when the brakes are

applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s

motion may therefore become somewhat

harder to control.

If all the warning lights illuminate simulta-

neously, take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat

location.

2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the

engine.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Release the parking brake.

If all the warning lights do not come

back on:

The EBD system have a possible malfunc-

tion. Drive carefully to the nearest

SUBARU dealer and have the system

inspected.

If all the warning lights stay illuminated

or come back on after approximately 2

seconds:

1. Turn off the engine again.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Check the brake fluid level. For details

about checking the brake fluid level, refer

to “Checking the fluid level” F11-15.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the

“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be

malfunctioning. Drive carefull y to the

nearest SUBARU dealer and have the

system inspected.

. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”

mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,

Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system

7-34

(301,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

have the vehicle towed to the nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake system

warning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brake

system may not be working prop-

erly. If the light remains illumi-

nated, have the brakes inspected

by a SUBARU dealer immedi-

ately.

. If at all in doubt about whether the

brakes are operating properly, do

not drive the vehicle. Have your

vehicle towed to t he nearest

SUBARU dealer for repair.

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system

& Safety precautions

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-

ing – overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system could ea-

sily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with Vehicle Dynamics Control

system, winter tires should be

used when driving on snow-cov-

ered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having a

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control system is an

indication that the road being

travelled on has a slippery sur-

face; since having Vehicle Dy-

namics Control is no guarantee

that full vehicle control will be

maintained at all times and under

all conditions, its activation

should be seen as a sign that

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenev er suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are remove d from a

vehicle, have an inspecti on of

that system performed by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions should

be observed in order to ensure

that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

vehicle placard attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

– Use only the specified tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a temporary spare

tire, the effectiveness of the

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

7-35

(302,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is reduced and this

should be taken into account

when driving the vehicle in

such a condition.

. If non-matching tires are used,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system may not operate cor-

rectly.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control

system helps prevent unstable

vehicle motion such as skidding

using control of the brakes and

engine power. Do not turn off the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem unless it is absolutely neces-

sary. If you must turn off the

Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem, drive very carefully accord-

ing to the road surface condi-

tions.

& System features

In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding

on a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

adjusts the engine’s output and the

wheels’ respective braking forces to help

maintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control Function

The traction control function is designed to

prevent spinning of the driving wheels on

slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to

maintain traction and directional control.

Activation of this function is shown by

flashing the Vehicle Dynam ics Control

operation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression Function

The skid suppression function is designed

to help maintain directional stability by

suppressing the wheels ’ tendency to slide

sideways during steering operations. Acti-

vation of this function is shown by flashing

the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation

indicator light.

NOTE

. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-

tem may be considered normal when

the following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.

– The vehicle or steering wheel

shakes to a small degree.

– An operating sound from the

engine compartment is heard briefly

when starting the engine and when

driving off after starting the engine.

– The brake pedal seems to jolt

when driving off after starting the

engine.

. In the circumstances shown in the

following list, the vehicle may be less

stable than it feels to the driver. The

Vehicle Dynamics Control System may

therefore operate. Such operation does

not indicate a system malfunction.

– on gravel-covered or rutted roads

– on unfinished roads

– when the vehicle is towing a

trailer

– when the vehicle is fitted with

snow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will cause operation of

the steering wheel to feel slightly

different compared to that for normal

conditions.

. It is always important to reduce

speed when approaching a corner,

even if your vehicle is equipped with

the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

. Always turn off the engine before

replacing a tire. Failure to do so may

render the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system unable to operate correctly.

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

7-36

(303,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

system monitor

Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-

ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-

tion indicator light” F3-23 and “Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-

24.

& Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF switch

Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system. Creating adequate driving

wheel slip by deactivating the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system may help to

recover from the loss of traction. Use the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as

necessary.

. a standing start on a steeply sloping

road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or

otherwise slippery surface

. extrication of the vehicle when its

wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engine

operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light “

” on the combination

meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics

Control system will be deactivated and the

vehicle will behave like a model not

equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system. When the switch is pressed

again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF indicator light turns off.

With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system

deactivated, traction and stability en-

hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics

Control system is unavailable. Therefore

you should not deactivate the Vehicle

Dynamics Control system except under

above-mentioned situations.

NOTE

. When the switch has been pressed

to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics

Control system automatically reacti-

vates itself the next time the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”

position and the engine is restarted.

. If the switch is held down for 30

seconds or longer, the indicator light

turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system is activated, and the system

ignores any further pressing of the

switch. To make the switch usable

again, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the

engine.

. When the switch is p ressed to

deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-

trol system, the vehicle’s running per-

formance is comparable with that of a

vehicle that does not have a Vehicle

Dynamics Control system. Do not de-

activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control

system except when absolutely neces-

sary.

. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system

7-37

(304,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Control system is deactivated, compo-

nents of the brake control system may

still activate. When the brake control

system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-

namics Control operation indicator

light flashes.

X-mode (if equipped)

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with X-mode could easily lead to

a serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving a vehicle

with hill descent control function

could easily lead to a serious

accident. Be especially careful,

and depress the brake pedal if

necessary when driving on ex-

tremely steep downhill, frozen,

muddy or sandy roads. Failure

to control the vehicle’sspeed

may cause a loss of control and

result in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equipped

with X-mode, winter tires should

be used when driving on snow-

covered or icy roads; in addition,

vehicle speed should be reduced

considerably. Simply having X-

mode does not guarantee that the

vehicle will be able to avoid

accidents in any situation.

. Activate the X-mode when you

encounter a very slippery surface

at low speed. However, having X-

mode is no guarantee that full

vehicle control will be maintained

at all times and under all condi-

tions. When activating X-mode,

the speed of the vehicle should

be reduced considerably.

. Whenev er suspension compo-

nents, steering components, or

an axle are removed from a

vehicle, have the system in-

spected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer.

. Observe the following precau-

tions in order to ensure that the

X-mode is operating properly:

– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the same

size, type, and brand. Further-

more, the amount of wear

should be the same for all four

tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at the

proper level as shown on the

label attached to the vehicle’s

door pillar.

Starting and operating/X-mode

7-38

(305,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

– Use only the special tempor-

ary spare tire to replace a flat

tire. With a normal temporary

spare tire, the effectiveness of

the X-mode is reduced and

this should be taken into ac-

count when driving the vehi-

cle in such a condition.

. If the hill descent control function

has operated continuously for a

long time, the temperature of the

brake disc may increase and the

hill descent control function may

be temporarily disabled. In this

case, the hill descent control

indicator will disappear. When

the hill descent control indicator

disappears, the hill descent con-

trol function is disabled.

X-mode is the integrated control system of

the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics

Control system, etc. for driving with bad

road conditions. Using X-mode, you can

drive more comfortably even in slippery

road conditions including uphill and down-

hill.

X-mode has the following functions.

. Hill descent control function:

Using the hill descent control function, you

can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed

driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is

likely to increase, the brake control system

will be activated to adjust the vehicle

speed.

. Driving ability control:

This mode increases the hill-climbing

ability and driving abi lity as well as

enabling smooth application of torque for

easier control of the steering wheel.

& To activate/deactivate the X-

mode

X-mode switch

X-mode indicator (type A)

X-mode indicator (type B)

To activate:

Press the X-mode switch. While the X-

mode is activated, the X-mode indicator

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/X-mode

7-39

(306,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

appears.

To deactivate:

Press the X-mode switch again. The X-

mode indicator will disappear when the X-

mode is deactivated.

NOTE

. Even if you try to activate the X-

mode by pressing the X-mode switch

when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20

km/h) or more, the X-mode will not be

activated. At this time, a buzzer will

sound twice.

. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph

(40 km/h) or more while the X-mode is

activated, a buzzer will sound once and

the X-mode will be deactivated.

. While the engine is running, if any of

the following conditions is met, the X-

mode will be deactivated. In this case, it

is not possible to activate the X-mode.

– The CHECK ENGINE warning

light/malfunction indicator light illu-

minates.

– The AT OIL TEMP warning light

flashes.

– The ABS w arning light illumi-

nates.

– The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light illuminates.

. If the engine could overheat because

of a temperature increase of the engine

coolant, it may not be possible to

activate the X-mode. Even while the X-

mode is activated, the X-mode will be

deactivated when the engine coolant

temperature increases.

& Hill descent control function

The hill descent control function will be in

standby mode when the X-mode is acti-

vated and the vehicle speed is less than

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).

The function will operate when the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less

than approximately 10%.

The function will turn off when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is

depressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill des-

cent control function may not be

sufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when towing

a trailer).

NOTE

. Even while the hill descent control

function is operating, you can vary the

vehicle speed by using the brake pedal

or accelerator pedal.

. During braking by the hill descent

control function, the hill descent con-

trol indicator will flash.

. The hill descent control function is

operable regardless of the gradient of

the road.

. The hill descent control function

may be considered normal when the

following conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heard

briefly from the engine compart-

ment while the hill descent control

function is operating.

– The sensation of depressing the

brake pedal is different, (harder than

usual etc.) when the brake pedal is

depressed during hill descent con-

trol function operation.

Starting and operating/X-mode

7-40

(307,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Hill descent control indicator

Hill descent control indicator (type A)

Hill descent control indicator (type B)

This indicator appears while the hill des-

cent control function is in the standby

mode. It flashes while the function is

operating. I t will disapp ear when the

function is in the disabled mode. When

this function is changed from operational

to non-operational, it will disappear when

the vehicle speed reache s more than

approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message

when tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this

system may not react immediately to a

sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,

a blow-out caused by running over a sharp

object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

7-41

(308,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

Otherwise, an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and ser-

ious personal injury could occur.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe location.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire p ressure

shown on the tire placard.

The tire placard is located on

the door pillar on the driver’s

side.

Even when the vehicle is driven a

very short distance, the tires get

warm and their pressures in-

crease accordingly. Be sure to

let the tires cool thoroughly be-

fore adjusting their pressures to

the standard values shown on the

tire placard. Refer to “Tires and

wheels” F11-21. The tire pres-

sure monitoring system does not

function when the vehicle is sta-

tionary. After adjusting the tire

pressures, increase the vehicle

speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)

to start the TPMS rechecking of

the tire inflation pressures. If the

tire pressures are now above the

severe low pressure threshold,

the low tire pressure warning

light should turn off a few min-

utes later.

If this light still illuminates while

drivi ng after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is unable

to monitor all four road wheels.

Contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible for tire and

sensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off. Do not inject any tire

liquid or aerosol tire sealant into

the tires, as this may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors. If the light illuminates

steadily after blinking for ap-

proximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system in-

spected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metal

parts in the cargo area. This may

cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and

the tire pressure monitoring system

will not function properly.

Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

7-42

(309,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any i nterference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

Parking your vehicle

& Parking brake

To set the parking brake, depress the

brake pedal firmly and hold it down until

the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever

up slightly, press the release button, then

lower the lever while keeping the button

pressed.

When the parking brake is set while the

engine is running, the parking brake

warning light illuminates. After starting

the vehicle, be sure that the warning light

has turned off before the vehicle is driven.

Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”

F3-21.

CAUTION

Never drive while the parking brake

is set because this will cause un-

necessary wear on the brake linings.

Before starting to driv e, always

make sure that the parking brake

has been fully released.

& Parking tips

When parking your vehicle, always per-

form the following items.

. Apply the parking brake firmly.

. For MT models, put the shift lever in the

“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a

downgrade.

. For CVT models, put the select lever in

the “P” (Park) position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of the

transmission alone to hold the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

7-43

(310,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

When parking on a hill, always turn the

steering wheel. When the v ehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels should

be turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheels

should be turned into the curb.

WARNING

. Never leave unattended children

or pets in the vehicle. They could

accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on

hot or sunny days, the tempera-

ture in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal

injuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags, as

they may burn easily if they come

near hot engine or exhaust sys-

tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if you

take a nap in the vehicle. If engine

exhaust gas enters the passen-

ger compartment, occupants in

the vehicle could die from carbon

monoxide (CO) contained in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle has a bumper

under guard (optional), pay atten-

tion to blocks and other obstruc-

tions on the ground when park-

ing. The underspoiler could be

damaged by contact with them.

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle

7-44

(311,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Hill start assist system

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is a

device only for helping the driver

to START the vehicle on an uphill

grade. To prevent accidents

when the vehicle is parked on a

slope, be sure to firmly set the

parking brake. When setting the

parking brake, make sure that the

vehicle remains stationary when

the clutch pedal (MT models) and

brake pedal (both MT and CVT

models) are released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the Hil l start assist system is

operating. The Hill start assist

system will be deactivated and

may lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations

easier.

1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill

A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT

models)

B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)

In both these cases, the Hill start assist

system operates under the following con-

ditions.

. when the clutch pedal is depressed

while the brake pedal is also depressed

(MT models)

. when the vehicle has stopped with the

brake pedal depressed (CVT models)

Braking power is maintained temporarily

(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill

start assist system after the brake pedal is

released. The driver is therefore able to

start the vehicle in the same way as on a

level grade, just using the clutch pedal (MT

models only) and accelerator pedal (all

models).

If the braking power of the Hill start assist

system is insufficient after the brake pedal

is released, apply more braking power by

depressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may not

operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill

start assist system does not operate in the

following cases.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

7-45

(312,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. when starting backward facing uphill

. when starting forward facing downhill

. while the parking brake is applied

. while the ignition switch is in the “ ACC”

or “LOCK”/“OFF” position

. while the Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF in dicator light is

illuminated. Refer to “Hill start assist

warning light/Hill start assist OFF indicator

light” F3-22.

When using the Hill start assist system, a

braking effect may be felt even after the

brake pedal has been released. However,

for MT models, this braking effect should

disappear once the clutch pedal is re-

leased.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill start

assist system may not be sufficient

when strong braking power is

needed (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTE

A slight jolt may be felt when the

vehicle begins to move forward after

being reversed.

& To activate/deactivate the Hill

start assist system

Hill start assist OFF indicator

CAUTION

When starting on an up hill grade,

make sure the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light is off.

If the Hill start assist OFF indicator

light is on, make sure the parking

brake is applied.

To activate or deactivate the Hill start

assist system, perform the following steps.

NOTE

If you make an error when performing

any steps in the following procedure,

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

7-46

(313,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position once and then start

over again.

! To deactivate

1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe

location and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position.

3. Restart the engine.

4. Confirm the following items.

(1) The brake system warning light

illuminates.

(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

warning light turns off.

(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light turns off.

(4) The ABS warning light turns off.

5. Press and hold the Vehicle Dynamics

Control OFF switch for 30 seconds until

the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-

tor light

on the combination meter turns

on and off.

6. Within 5 seconds, release the Vehicle

Dynamics Control OFF switch.

7. Within 2 seconds, press back the

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.

The Hill start assist OFF indicator light

turns on and off.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. Hill start assist is deacti-

vated.

NOTE

When the Hill start assist system is

deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF

indicator light illuminates.

! To reactivate

To reactivate Hill start assist system,

repeat steps 1 to 8. When the Hill start

assist system is activated, the Hill start

assist OFF indicator light turns off.

& Hill start assist warning light/

Hill start assist OFF indicator

light

Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill

start assist OFF indicator light” F3-22.

Starting and operating/Hill start assist system

7-47

(314,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Cruise control (if equipped)

NOTE

For models with EyeSight system:

Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-

ment for the EyeSight system.

Cruise control enables you to maintain a

constant vehicle speed without holding

your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is

operative when the vehicle speed is 20

mph (30 km/h) or more.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control under

any of the following conditions.

These may cause loss of vehicle

control.

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or winding

roads

. driving in heavy traffic

. towing a trailer

NOTE

Make sure the cruise control system is

turned off when the cruise control is not

in use to avoid unintentionally setting

of the cruise control.

& To set cruise control

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

Cruise control indicator light (type A)

Cruise control indicator light (type B)

The cruise control indicator light on the

combination meter will illuminate.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the

vehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the

Starting and operating/Cruise control

7-48

(315,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

“SET” side and release it. Then release the

accelerator pedal.

NOTE

If the set vehicle speed has not been

memorized (other than when it has

been temporarily canceled), the vehicle

speed can be set even if the “RES/SET”

switch is pressed to the “RES” side.

Cruise control set indicator light (type A)

1) Whe n setting the displ ayed unit as

“MPH”.

2) Whe n setting the displ ayed unit as

“km/h”.

Cruise control set indicator light (type B)

1) When setting the displayed unit as

“MPH”.

2) When setting the displayed unit as

“km/h”.

At this time, the cruise control set indicator

light is illuminated in the combination

meter. The set speed will be shown on

the combination meter. You can change

the displayed unit by operating the combi-

nation meter display.

. For type A meter details, refer to

“Combination meter settings” F3-11.

. For type B meter details, refer to

“Screen Settings” F3-41.

The vehicle will maintain the desired

speed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-

creased while driving with the cruise

control activated . Simply depress the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-

cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the vehicle will return to and

maintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel the

cruise control

The cruise control can be temporarily

canceled in the following ways.

. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Press the X-mode switch to activate the

X-mode (models with X-mode).

. Depress the brake pedal.

. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models

only).

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Cruise control

7-49

(316,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

For CVT models, you can cancel the

cruise control by shifting the select

lever into the “N” position. However,

do not shift the lever into the “N”

position while driving except in case

of emergency. If the select lever is

shifted into the “N” position, the

engine brake will no longer work.

This could result in an accident.

The cruise control set indicator light in the

combination meter turns off when the

cruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it has

been temporarily canceled and with vehi-

cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30

km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side to return to the

original cruising speed automatically.

The cruise control set indicator light in the

combination meter will automatically illu-

minate at this time.

& To turn off the cruise control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise

control:

. Press the cruise control main button

again.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the

vehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired speed. The n, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

When set ting the displayed unit as

“MPH”:

The set speed can be increased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/

SET” switch to the “RES” side.

When set ting the displayed unit as

“km/h”:

The set speed can be increased 1 km/h

each time by pressing the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES ” side.

Starting and operating/Cruise control

7-50

(317,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! To increase the speed (by accelera-

tor pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-

celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Press the “RES/SET ” switch to the

“SET” side once. Now the desired speed is

set and the vehicle will keep running at that

speed without depressing the accelerator

pedal.

! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/

SET” switch)

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches

the desired spee d. Then, release the

switch. The vehicle speed at that moment

will be memorized and treated as the new

set speed.

When setting the displayed unit as

“MPH”:

The set speed can be decreased 1 mph

(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/

SET” switch to the “SET” side.

When setting the displayed unit as

“km/h”:

The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h

each time by p ressing the “RES/SET”

switch to the “SET” side.

! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to release

cruise control temporarily.

2. When the s peed decreases to the

desired speed, p ress the “RES/SET”

switch to the “SET” side once. Now the

desired speed is set and the vehicle will

keep running at that speed without depres-

sing the accelerator pedal.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Cruise control

7-51

(318,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Cruise control indicator light

Refer to “Cruise control indicator light” F3-

31.

& Cruise control set indicator

light

Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”

F3-31.

BSD/RCTA (if equipped)

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with

Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system to

detect objects or vehicles to the rear,

drawing attention to the driver when

changing a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for driving

safely. Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

changing lanes or reversing the

vehicle.

The system is designed to assist the

driver to change lanes or reverse

safely by monitoring the rear and

side areas of the vehicle. However,

you cannot rely on this system alone

in assuring the safety during a lane

change or reversing. Overconfi-

dence in this system could result in

an accident and lead to serious

injury or death. Since the system

operation has various limitations,

the flashing or illumination of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

may be delayed or it may not operate

at all even when a vehicle is present

in a neighboring lane or approach-

ing from either side.

The driver is responsible for paying

attention to the rear and side areas

of the vehicle.

& System features

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-

tions.

. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an

adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at

high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind

Spot Detection)

. To detect a vehicle approaching from

the right or left while reversing the vehicle

(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

The system uses radar sensors for the

above functions.

NOTE

The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been

certified by the radio wave related laws

of the U.S. and Canada. When driving in

other countries, certification of the

country where the vehicle is driven

must be obtained. For certification in

the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-

tion for the BSD/RCTA” F7-60.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-52

(319,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as

follows.

. If the system detects a vehicle existing

in the blind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s)

will illuminate.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light is illuminating, the

corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-

cator light will flash.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers as

follows.

. If the system detects a vehicle ap-

proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-

ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi-

cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) will

illuminate.

. If the driver operates the turn signal

lever in the direction which the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light is illuminating, the

corresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-

cator light will flash.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-53

(320,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of another

vehicle approaching from either side when

driving in reverse. This feature helps the

driver check the rear and side areas of the

vehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-

ing from either side while moving back-

ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the

following way.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.

. A warning buzzer sounds.

. An icon appears on the rear v iew

camera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

! Limitations of the detectability of

RCTA

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,

the RCTA may not operate properly in

angled parking.

Example 1

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

2) Area out of detection range of the radar

sensors

A) Vehicle that may not be detected

B) Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may not

be detected because the detection

range is limited by the parked vehi-

cle (B). Always be sure to check the

surroundings with your eyes when

reversing the vehicle.

Example 2

1) The detection range of the radar sensors

C) Vehicle that may be detected

NOTE

The system may detect that a vehicle

Always be sure to check the surround-

ings with your eyes when reversing the

vehicle.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-54

(321,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& System operation

! Operating conditions

The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the

following conditions are met.

. Theignitionswitchisinthe“ON”

position.

. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.

. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 6

mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing).

. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”

position (when reversing).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the

following situations.

. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.

. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10

km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF

indicator remains off (except when rever-

sing).

NOTE

. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA

will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA

warning indicator will appear. If the

BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,

have your vehicle ins pected at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

– When a malfunction occurs in the

system, i ncluding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light

. In the following cases, the BSD/

RCTA will temporarily stop operating

(or may stop operating) and the BSD/

RCTA warning indicator will appear.

– When the radar sensor becomes

significantly misaligned (If the or-

ientation of the radar sensor is

shifted for an y reason, readjust-

ment is required. Have the sensor

adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)

– When a large amount of snow or

ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-

face around the radar sensors

– When the vehicle is driven on a

snow-covered road or in an envir-

onment in which there are no ob-

jects around (such as in a desert) for

a long time

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors increased exces-

sively due to long driving on uphill

grades in summer, etc.

– When the temperature around the

radar sensors becomes extremely

low

– When the vehicle battery voltage

lowers

– When the vehicle battery be-

comes overvoltage

When the above conditions are cor-

rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-

eration and the BSD/RCTA warning

indi cator will disappear. However, if

the BSD/RCTA warning indicator has

appeared for a prolonged time, have the

system inspected at a SUBARU dealer

as soon as possible.

. The detectability of the radar sen-

sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-

tection may be impaired and the system

may not operate properly under the

following conditions.

– When the rear bumper around the

radar sensors is distorted

– When ice, snow or mud adheres

to the rear bumper surface around

the radar sensors

– When stickers, etc. are affixed on

the areas of the radar sensors on

the rear bumper

– During adverse weather condi-

tions such as rain, snow or fog

– When driving on wet roads such

as snow-covered roads and through

puddles

. The radar sensors may not detect or

may have difficulty detecting the fol-

lowing.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-

destrians, stationary objects on the

road or road side, etc.

– Vehicles with body shapes that

the radar may not reflect (vehicles

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-55

(322,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

with a low body hei ght such as

sports cars or a trailer with no

cargo)

– Vehicles that are not approaching

your vehicle even though they are in

the detection area (either on a

neighboring lane to the rear or be-

side your vehicle when reversing)

(The system determines the pre-

sence of approaching vehicles

based on data detected by the radar

sensors.)

– Vehicles traveling at significantly

different speeds

– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-

most the same speed as your vehi-

cle for a prolonged time

– Oncoming vehicles

– Vehicles in a lane beyond the

neighboring lane

– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-

cantly lower speed th at you are

trying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrow

lanes, the system may detect vehicles

driving in a lane next to the neighboring

lane.

. When the 8-inch audio/navigation

system is performing a software up-

date, the RCTA warning icons may not

be displayed on the audio/navigation

screen until the update is complete.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica-

tor light/warning buzzer

When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will operate

to alert the driver when there are vehicles

in the neighboring lanes. When reversing

the vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light and warning buzzer will

operate to alert the driver that a vehicle is

approaching from the left or right side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

It is mounted in each side of the outside

mirrors.

The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-

tected.

The indicator light will flash to warn the

driver of dangers under the following

conditions.

. While the indicator light illuminates, if

you operate the turn signal lever toward

the side in which this light turned on.

. When reversing the vehicle while the

system detects a vehicle approaching

from either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light dimming function

When the headlights are turned on, the

brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach

indicator light will be reduced.

NOTE

. You may have difficulty recognizing

the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

under the following conditions.

– When affected by direct sunlight

– When affected by the headlight

beams from the vehicles behind

. While the illumination brightness

control dial is in the fully upward

position, e ven if the headlights are

turned on, the brightness of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light will not

be reduced. For details about the

illumination brightness control dial,

refer to “Illumination brightness con-

trol” F3-12.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-56

(323,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-

zer (only when reversing)

A warning buzzer sounds along with

flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-

dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volume

can be changed by operating the combi-

nation meter display (color LCD). For

details, refer to “ Menu screens” F3-38.

! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warning

buzzer

. In the following cases, operation of the

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and

the warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-

boring lane from a lane next to the

neighboring lane

– When driving on a steep incline or

on repeated sharp uphill and downhill

grades

– When going beyond a pass

– When both your vehi cle and a

vehicle driving on a neighboring lane

are driving on the far side of each lane.

– When several narrowly-spaced ve-

hicles are approaching in a row

– In low radius bends (tight bends or

when making turns at an intersection)

– When there is a difference in height

between your lane and the neighboring

lane

– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is

activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA

OFF switch

– Immediately after the shift lever/

select lever is shifted to the “R” position

– When extremely heavy cargo is

loaded in the cargo area

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/

RCTA approach indicator light and the

warning buzzer may be delayed or the

system may fail to issue these warnings

under the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angled

parking space

– When a large-sized vehicle is

parked next to your vehicle (That

vehicle prevents the propagation of

radar waves.)

– When reversing on sloped roads

– When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may illuminate when driving close to

solid objects on the road or road side (such

as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash when turning at an inter-

section in u rban areas or a multilane

intersection.

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator

light may flash and the warning buzzer

may sound if a building or a wall exists in

the reversing direction.

. In the following cases, the system may

detect a vehicle driving two lanes away

from your vehicle.

– When you are driving on the near

side of its lane from the corresponding

vehicle

– When the vehicle driving two lanes

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-57

(324,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

away is driving on the near side of its

lane from your vehicle

& BSD/RCTA warning indicator

! System temporary stop indicator

System temporary stop indicator

This indicator appears when the system is

used under the following conditions.

. Extremely high or low temperatures

. When abnormal voltage exists for the

vehicle battery

. When the radar sensor is significantly

misaligned

Once the above conditions are corrected,

the system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear. If the indicator remains displayed

for a prolonged time, have the system

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System temporary stop indicator

due to reduced radar sensitivity

System temporary stop indicator due to

reduced radar sensitivity

This indicator appears when the detect-

ability of the radar sensors is reduced.

Once the condition is corrected, the

system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-

appear. If the indicator remains displayed

for a prolonged time, have the system

inspected at a SUBARU dealer.

! System malfunction indicator

System malfunction indicator

1) At first, this message will appear

2) Then this message will appear

This indicator appears when a malfunction

occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU

dealer and have the system inspected.

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-58

(325,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type A)

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (type B)

If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,

the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on

the combination meter, and the BSD/

RCTA is deactivated.

Press the switch again to activate the BSD/

RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will

disappear.

When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap-

proach indicator light on the side of the

rearview mirror illuminates for a few

seconds and then turns off.

NOTE

. In the following cases, the system

may not oper ate properly due to

blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the

system.

– When towing a trailer

– When a bicycle carrier or other

carrier item is fitted to the rear of the

vehicle

– When using a chassis dynam-

ometer or free roller device, etc.

– When running the engine and

making the wheels rotate while

lifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known

status of the system is maintained. For

example, if the ignition switch is turned

to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the

BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA

will remain deactivated the next time

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-59

(326,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Certification for the BSD/

RCTA

! U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any i nterference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

! Canada-spec. models

& Handling of radar sensors

1) Sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of the

vehicle, are mounted inside the rear

bumper.

To ensure correct operation of the BSD/

RCTA, observe the following precautions.

. Always keep the bumper surface near

the radar sensors clean.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the radar

sensors.

. Do not modify the bumper near the

radar sensors.

. Do not paint the bumper near the radar

sensors.

. Do not expose the bumper near the

radar sensors to strong impacts. If a

Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA

7-60

(327,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

sensor becomes misaligned, a system

malfunction may occur, including the in-

ability to detect vehicles entering the

detection areas. If any strong shock is

applied to the bumper, be sure to contact

your SUBARU dealer for inspection.

. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

NOTE

If the radar sensors require repair or

replacement, or the bumper area

around the radar sensors requires

repair, paintwork or replacement, con-

tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-

tance.

Reverse Automatic Braking

System (if equipped)

Reverse Automatic Braking is a system

designed to help avoid collisions or reduce

collision damage when reversing the

vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected

in the reversing direction, the system will

notify the driver with a warning sound and

may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto-

matically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking is not

a system intended to replace the

driver’s responsibility to check

surrounding areas for vehicles or

obstacles to avoid a collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv-

ing safely. Always be sure to

check the surroundings visually

when reversing the vehicle.

. Since the system operation has

various limitations, the warning

sound or automatic braking may

be delayed or may not operate at

all even when an obstacle is

present in the reversing direc-

tion.

. The system is not designed to

detect people (including chil-

dren), animals or other moving

objects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-

tion or the surrounding environ-

ment, the sonar sensor’s ability

to detect objects may be compro-

mised.

NOTE

The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys-

tem records and stores the following

data when automatic braking operates.

It does not record conversations, per-

sonal information or other audio data.

. Distance from the object

. Vehicle speed

. Accelerator pedal operation status

. Brake pedal operation status

. Select lever position

. Outside temperature

. The sensitivity setting of the sonar

sensors

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU may acquire and use the

recorded data for the purpose of vehi-

cle research and development.

SUBARU and third parties contracted

by SUBARU will not disclose or provide

the acquired data to any other third

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-61

(328,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

party except under the following con-

ditions.

. The vehicle owner has given his/her

consent.

. The disclosure/provision is based

on a court order or other legally en-

forceable request.

. Data that has been modified so that

the user and vehicle cannot be identi-

fied is provided to a research institution

for statistical processing or similar

purposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking

System overview

The system detects objects using sonar

sensors installed in the rear bumper.

. If the system determines a possible

collision with an object in the reversing

direction, automatic deceleration will be

activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-

vate.

. If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-

matic hard braking will be applied and a

continuous beeping sound will activate.

! Detecting range

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6

in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect:

Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the

rear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately

5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-

road crossing and you are trying to

escape by reversing through the

crossing gate, the system may re-

cognize the crossing gate as an

obstacle and the brake may activate.

In this case, remain calm and either

continue to depress the accelerator

pedal or cancel the system. To

cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-

ing the Reverse Automatic Braking

system operation” F7-67.

& Operating conditions

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

will operate when all of the following

conditions are met.

1) EyeSight warning indicator

2) RAB warning indicator

3) RAB OFF indicator

. Theignitionswitchisinthe“ON”

position

. The EyeSight warning indicator is off

. The RAB warning indicator is off

. HALT (RAB OFF) indicator is off

. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-62

(329,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

tem is set to on

. The select lever is in the “R” position

. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9

mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)

NOTE

. In the following cases, the Reverse

Automatic braking system will not

operate. Promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicator

is illuminated

– The Reverse Automatic Braking

fail indicator is illuminated

. When the Reverse Automatic Brak-

ing system OFF indicator is illumi-

nated, the Reverse Automatic braking

system cannot be operated.

. In the following cases, the system

may not be able to properly detect an

obstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARU

dealer to have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical is

applied to the rear bumper near the

sonar sensor

– The rear bumper is modified

– The rear bumper has been re-

moved and reattached

– The ground clearance is changed

due to the vehicle’s loading condi-

tion or modification

– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to

the rear bumper near the sonar

sensor

– The rear bumper is exposed to

strong impact, or the rear bumper is

deformed

. When the 8-inch audio/navigation

system is performing a software up-

date, the Reverse Automatic Braking

System may not display the following

items on the audio/navigation screen

until the update is complete.

– Display Icon on/off Function

– Distance Indicator Image

– Warning Message

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-

matic braking ability will be reduced.

. The system is designed to avoid

collisions by automatic hard braking

when the vehicle’s reversing speed is

less than approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

However, the system does not guaran-

tee that the vehicle will be able to avoid

collisions in any situation.

. If the vehicle is reversed at an

extremely slow speed, the driver ’s

operation may be prioritized. In this

case, automatic braking will not oper-

ate.

. The system may not be able to detect

the following objects

– Sharp or thin objects such as

poles, fences and ropes which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor

– Objects that are too close to the

rear bumper when the select lever is

set to the “R” position

– Objects with a surface which may

not reflect the sound wave emitted

from the sonar sensor such as a

chain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designed

to detect

– Pedestrians

– Moving objects including moving

vehicles

– Objects which absorb sound

waves such as cloth or snow

– Objects whose surface has a

diagonal angle

– Objects that are low to the ground

such as parking blocks

– Objects that are high above the

ground such as objects hanging

from above

. The system may not be able to

properly detect objects or may cause

a system malfunction when the follow-

ing conditions exist

High frequency sound from other

sources are nearby

– Horn sound from another vehicle

– Engine sound from other vehi-

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-63

(330,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

cles

– Sound of an air brake

– Vehicle detection equipment or a

sonar from another vehicle

– A sound wave with a frequency

similar to the vehicle’s system is

transmitted nearby

– A vehicle equipped with the same

system is reversing toward your

reversing direction

Weather conditions

– Extremely high or extremely low

temperatures in which the area near

the sonar sensor becomes too hot

or too cold to operate

– The rear bumper near the sonar

sensors is exposed to heavy rain or

a significant amount of water

– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.

– Air is moving rapidly such as

when a strong wind is blowing

Parts attached to the rear bumper

near the sonar sensor

– Commercial electronic parts (fog

light, fender pole, radio antenna) or

commercial attachment parts (trai-

ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumper

guard) are attached

– Parts that emit high frequency

sound, such as a horn or speaker,

are attached

Vehicle conditions

– The vehicle is significantly in-

clined

– The ground clearance is signifi-

cantly reduced due to the vehicle’s

loading condition, etc.

– When the sonar sensor is mis-

aligned due to a collision or an

accident

Surrounding environment

– A cloth banner, flag, hanging

branch or railroad cross ing bars

are present in the reversing direc-

tion

– When reversing on a gravel or

grassy area

– When reversing in an area where

objects or walls are adjacent to the

vehicle such as narrow tunnels,

narrow bridges, narrow roads or

narrow garages

– Wheel tracks or a hole is present

in the gro und of the reversin g

direction

– When reversing over a drainage

cover (grate cover)

– The path of the reversing direc-

tion is inclined such as on a steep

uphill

– A curb is present in the reversing

direction

– When reversing downhill

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-64

(331,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Reverse Automatic Braking

System operation

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

System is in operation, the range between

the vehicle and the detected object will be

indicated on the audio/navigation monitor.

Also, warning sounds will activate in 3

levels to warn the driver of a potential

collision.

While the RAB is operating, a warning

message is displayed on the audio/navi-

gation monitor and the combination meter

display (color LCD).

Guideline of detecting range

Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob-

ject detected)

35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximity

alert (approaching the

object)

28 to 35 inches (70 to 90

cm)

Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert

(approaching closer

to the object)

20 to 28 inches (50 to 70

cm)

Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximity

alert (too close to the

object)

20 inches (50 cm) or less Red

Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-65

(332,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Obstacle detected and alert level

Long proximity alert (object detected)

1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching the

object)

1) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)

Short proximity alert (approaching the

object closer)

1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to the

object)

1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever-

sing direction, the range of detected object

will be shown on the audio/navigation

monitor.

A warning alarm will sound and, depend-

ing on the speed, either torque control to

generate engine braking or automati c

braking will be applied.

! Object close behind warning

Automatic braking warning

1) Warning message

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,

the system may determine the risk of

collision with the object. In this case, short

warning beeps or continuous warnin g

beeps will sound and either strong auto-

matic braking or torque control will be

applied to prevent collision.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-66

(333,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! When the vehicle is being stopped

by the system

Depress brake pedal warning

1) Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedal

once the vehicle has been stopped by

automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is

depressed, a message will be displayed

on the audio/navigation monitor and the

continuous beep will remain sounding.

At this time, a warning message is also

displayed on the combination meter dis-

play (color LCD).

! After the vehicle is stopped by the

system

1) Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator

After the brake pedal is depressed, the

Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF

indicator will illuminate and the system will

temporarily stop operating. The Reverse

Automatic Braking system OFF indicator

will turn off when the select lever is shifted

to a position other than the “R” position.

The system will operate again the next

time the select lever is shift ed to “R”

position.

NOTE

Automatic braking only holds the vehi-

cle for 2 seconds. Before the automatic

brake is released, a warning sound (3

short beeps followed by a long beep)

will activate to alert the driver that the

automatic will be released.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-

matic Braking system opera-

tion

The Reverse Automatic Braking system

can be temporarily canceled by any of the

following operations.

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the brake

pedal is depressed

. While the vehicle is stopped by the

operation of automatic braking, the accel-

erator pedal is depressed

. The a ccelerator pedal is k ept de-

pressed (In this case, limited acceleration

will be canceled and the vehicle will

continue reversing.)

. The select lever is shifted to a position

other than the “R” position

NOTE

The system will be canceled if the

object is no longer detected.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-67

(334,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Reverse Automatic Braking

system ON/OFF setting

While the select lever is shifted to the “R”

position, the below functions of the Re-

verse Automatic Braking system can be

set by operating the audio/navigation

monitor.

1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic

Braking

2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic

Braking

3) ON setting key of the object detection

warning beeping sound

4) OFF setting key of the object detection

warning beeping sound

When the ON setting key is shown, the

corresponding setting is ON.

Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn

the setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, the

corresponding setting is OFF.

Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn

the setting ON.

When the Reverse Automatic Braking

system is turned OFF, the following in-

dicator will illuminate.

RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the

Reverse Automatic Braking system is turned

OFF.

RAB OFF indicator will turn off when the

Reverse Automati c Braking system is

turned ON.

NOTE

. When the settings cannot be chan-

ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be

grayed out.

. The ON/OFF setting key may be

greyed out if the Reverse Automatic

Braking system malfunctions, etc. In

this case, turn the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position and then turn it

to the “ON” position again. If the setting

cannot be changed even after turning

the ignition switch to the “ON” position

again, consult your SUBARU dealer.

. The settings will be restored as

follows when the select lever is shifted

to the “R” position next time.

– Reverse Automatic Braking sys-

tem settings: default (ON setting)

– Object detection warning beep-

ing sound: the setting selected by

operating the combination meter

display (color LCD)

Also, the following settings can be chan-

ged by operating the combination meter

display (color LCD).

. Warning volume

. Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF

For details, refer to “Menu screens” F3-

38.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-68

(335,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& RAB warning indicator

If the Reverse Automatic Braking System

malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-

nates on the combination meter. Contact

the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Handling of the sonar sen-

sors

The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear

bumper. To ensure the proper operation of

the Reverse Automatic Braking system,

observe the following precautions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other items

on the bumper surface near the sonar

sensors.

. Always keep the rear bumper surface

near the sonar sensors clean.

. Do not modify the rear bumper.

. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar

sensors.

. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear

bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor

becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-

tion may occur, including inability to detect

objects in the reversing direction. If any

strong impact is applied to the rear

bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to

have the system inspected.

. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTE

If the sonar sensors require repair or

replacement, or if the area of the rear

bumper n ear the sonar sensors re-

quires repair, paintwork or replace-

ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for

assistance.

Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System

7-69

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(339,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000

miles (1,600 km) ................................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2

Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2

Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3

Periodic inspections ............................................... 8-4

Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4

Driving tips for AWD models ................................. 8-4

Off road driving....................................................... 8-6

Before driving........................................................ 8-6

During driving........................................................ 8-6

After driving........................................................... 8-7

Winter driving.......................................................... 8-7

Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-7

Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................. 8-9

Corrosion protection.............................................8-10

Snow tires ............................................................8-10

Tire chains ........................................................... 8-11

Rocking the vehicle .............................................. 8-11

Loading your vehicle.............................................8-11

Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-12

GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ............... 8-13

Roof rail ...............................................................8-13

Trailer hitch (dealer option) ................................. 8-14

Connecting a trailer ..............................................8-15

If not towing a trailer ............................................ 8-16

Trailer towing ........................................................ 8-16

Warranties and maintenance.................................8-17

Maximum load limits.............................................8-17

Trailer Hitches ...................................................... 8-20

When you do not tow a trailer............................... 8-21

Connecting a trailer ..............................................8-21

Trailer towing tips................................................. 8-22

Driving tips

(340,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

New vehicle break-in driving –

the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

The performance and long life of your

vehicle are dependent on how you handle

and care for your vehicle while it is new.

Follow these instructions during the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km):

. Do not race the engine. And do not

allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm

except in an emergency.

. Do not drive at one constant engine or

vehicle speed, either fast or slow.

. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-

celeration, except in an emergency.

. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-

gency.

The same break-in procedures should be

applied to an overhauled engine, newly

mounted engine or when brake pads or

brake linings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save

fuel.

. Select the proper gear position for the

speed and road conditions.

. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-

tion. Always accelerate gently until you

reach the desired speed. Then try to

maintain that speed for as long as possi-

ble.

. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid

racing the engine.

. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

. Keep the engine properly tuned.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the tire placard, which

is located under the door latch on the

driver’s side. Low pressure will increase

tire wear and fuel consumption.

. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

. Keep the front and rear wheels in

proper alignment.

. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or

cargo.

Engine exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.

Engine exhaust gas contains

carbon monoxide, a colorless

and odorless gas which is dan-

gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to prevent

engine exhaust gas from entering

the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closed

space, such as a garage, except

for the brief time needed to drive

the vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-

hicle for a lengthy time while the

engine is running. If that is un-

avoidable, then use the ventila-

tion fan to force fresh air into the

vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilator

inlet grille free from snow, leaves

or other obstructions to ensure

that the ventilation system al-

ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that

Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)

8-2

(341,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

exhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problem

checked and corrected as soon

as possible. If you must drive

under these conditions, drive

only with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed while

driving to prevent exhaust gas

from entering the vehicle.

NOTE

Due to the expansion and contraction

of the metals used in the manufacture

of the exhaust system, you may hear a

crackling sound coming from the ex-

haust system for a short time after the

engine has been shut off. This sound is

normal.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter is installed in the

exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,

thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:

. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small

amount of leaded fuel will damage the

catalytic converter.

. Never start the engine by pushing or

pulling the vehicle.

. Avoid racing the engine.

. Never turn the ignition switch to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.

. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel

the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by an

authorized SUBARU dealer.

. Do not apply undercoating or rust

prevention treatment to the heat shield of

catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-

tem.

. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel

level.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive

or park the vehicle anywhere

near flammable materials (e.g.,

grass, paper, rags or leaves),

because the catalytic converter

operates at very high tempera-

tures.

. Keep everyone and flammable

materials away from the exhaust

pipe while the engine is running.

The exhaust gas is very hot.

Driving tips/Catalytic converter

8-3

(342,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best condition

at all times, always have the recom-

mended maintenance services listed in

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenan ce Booklet” per-

formed at the specified time or mileage

intervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in

another country:

. Confirm the availability of the correct

fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.

. Comply with all regulations and require-

ments of each country.

Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive vehicle could easily

lead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installing tire

(s), all four tires must be the same

for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

Driving tips/Periodic inspections

8-4

(343,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

for items (a) to (h), serious me-

chanical damage could occur to

the drive train of your car, and

affect the following.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire to

replace a flat tire, be sure to use the

original temporary spare tire stored

in the vehicle. Using other sizes may

result in severe mechanical damage

to the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine

power to all four wheels. AWD models

provide better traction when driving on

slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and

when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By

shifting power between the front and rear

wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide

added traction during acceleration and

added engine braking force during decel-

eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle

may handle differently than an ordinary

two wheel drive vehicle and it contains

some features unique to AWD. For safety

purposes as well as to avoid damaging the

AWD system, you should keep the follow-

ing tips in mind.

. An AWD model is better able to climb

steeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.

There is little difference in handling, how-

ever, during extremely sharp turns or

sudden braking. Therefore, when driving

down a slope or turning corners, be sure to

reduce your speed and maintain an ample

distance from other vehicles.

. Always check the cold tire pressure

before starting to drive. The recommended

tire pressu re is provi ded on th e tire

placard, which is located under the door

latch on the driver’s side.

. Never attempt to drive through pools

and puddles, or roads flooded with water.

Water entering the engine air intake or the

exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall.

. There are some precautions that you

must observe when towing your vehicle.

For detailed information, refer to “ Towing”

F9-13.

Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models

8-5

(344,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Off road driving

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe driving

speed according to the road and

weather conditions in order to

avoid having an accident on a

sharp turn, during sudden brak-

ing or under other similar condi-

tions.

. Always use the utmost care in

driving – overconfidence be-

cause you are driving an All-

Wheel Drive model could easily

lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

Frequent driving of an AWD model

under hard-driving conditions such

as rough roads or off roads will

necessitate more frequent replace-

ment of the following items than that

specified in the maintenance sche-

dule described in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

. Engine oil

. Brake fluid

Remember that damage done to

your SUBARU while operating it off-

road and not using common sense

precautions such as those listed

here is not eligible for warranty

coverage.

Because of the AWD feature and higher

ground clearance, you can driv e your

SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.

But please keep in mind that an AWD

SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither

a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-

terrain v ehicle. I f you d o take your

SUBARU off-road, certain common sense

precautions such as those in the following

list should be taken.

& Before driving

. Make certain that you and all of your

passengers are wearing seatbelts.

. Carry some emergency equipme nt,

such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,

wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or

citizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside the

vehicle and make certain that it is not piled

higher than the seatbacks. During sudden

stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be

thrown around in the vehicle and cause

injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.

Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of

gravity and make it more prone to tip over.

. Never equip your vehicle with tires

larger than those specified in this manual.

& During driving

General precautions:

. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-

sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or

over rough terrain.

. Slow down and employ extra caution at

all times. When driving off-road, you will

not have the benefit of marked traffic

lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and

the like.

. Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead, drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. A vehicle can much more

easily tip over sideways than it can end

over end. Avoid driving straight up or down

slopes that are too steep.

. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-

cially at higher speeds.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead,

drive with your fingers and thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

. Do not drive or pa rk over or near

flammable materials such as dry grass or

fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The

exhaust system is very hot while the

engine is running and right after the engine

Driving tips/Off road driving

8-6

(345,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

stops. This could create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under espe-

cially dangerous situations:

. If driving through water, such as when

crossing shallow streams, first check the

depth of the water and the bottom of the

stream bed for firmness and ensure that

the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly

and cross the stream without stopping.

The water should be shallow enough that it

does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-

riage. Water entering the engine air intake

or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto

electrical parts may damage your vehicle

and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to

drive through rushing water; regardless of

its depth, it can wash away the ground

from under your tires, resulting in possible

loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.

. If you must rock the vehicle to free it

from sand or mud, depress the accelerator

pedal slightly and move the shift lever/

select lever back and forth between “1”/“D”

and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

. When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission in

2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For

CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual

mode” F7-26.

& After driving

. Always check your brakes for effective-

ness immediately after driving in sand,

mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and

stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that

process several times to dry out the brake

discs and brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,

rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is

no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,

etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-

body. Clear off any such matter from the

underbody. If the vehicle is used with these

materials trapped or adhering to the

underbody, a mechanical breakdown or

fire could occur.

. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-

road driving. Suspension components are

particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they

need to be washed thoroughly.

Winter driving

& Operation during cold weath-

! Maintenance

Carry some emergency equipment, such

as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,

a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-

peratures reduce battery capacity. The

battery must be in good condition to

provide enough power for cold winter

starts.

It normally takes longer to start the engine

in very cold weather conditions. Use an

engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity

for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil

will make it harder to start the engine.

Keep the door locks from freezing by

squirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damage

or separate the rubber weather strips

around the door. If the door is frozen, use

hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards

thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-

tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use

engine antifreeze or other substitutes

because they may damage the paint of

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Winter driving

8-7

(346,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the vehicle.

SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-

tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it is

diluted, as indicated in the following table.

Washer Fluid Con-

centration

Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100%

−498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,

check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentration from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct your

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove any

snow or ice from your shoes because that

could make the pedals slippery and driving

dangerous.

While warming up t he vehicle before

driving, check that the accelerator pedal,

brake pedal, and all other controls operate

smoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-

mulated under the fenders to avoid making

steering difficult. During severe winter

driving, stop when and where it is safe to

do so and check under the fenders

periodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle if you park

the vehicle in snow with the engine

running.

CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brake

when parking for long periods in

cold weather since it could freeze

in that position.

. When the vehicle is parked in

snow or when it snows, raise the

wiper blades off the glass to

prevent damage to them.

. When the vehicle has been left

parked after use on roads heavily

covered with snow, or has been

left parked during a snowstorm,

Driving tips/Winter driving

8-8

(347,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

icing may develop on the brake

system, which could cause poor

braking action. Check for snow or

ice buildup on the suspension,

disc brakes and b rake hoses

underneath the vehicle. If there

is caked snow or ice, remove it,

being careful not to damage the

disc brakes and brake hoses and

ABS harness.

When parking for long periods in cold

weather, you should observe the following

tips.

1. For MT models, place the shift lever in

the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,

place the select lever in the “P” position.

2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent

the vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming in

the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,

use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel

tank is recommended during cold weather.

Use only additives that are specifically

designed for this purpose. When an anti-

freeze additive is used, its effect lasts

longer if the tank is refilled whenever the

fuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used for

an extended period, it is best to have the

fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icy

roads

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid

sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-

speed driving, and sharp turning when

driving on snowy or icy roads.

Always maintain ample distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you

to avoid the need for sudden braking.

To supplement the foot brake, use the

engine brake effectively to control the

vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear

when necessary.)

Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly

leading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-

hances your vehicle ’s braking perfo r-

mance on snowy and icy roads. Fo r

information on braking on slippery sur-

faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System)” F7-33 and “Vehicle Dynamics

Control system” F7-35.

WARNING

For models with cruise control:

Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads such as snowy or icy

roads. This may cause loss of vehi-

cle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous driving

in snowstorms. Snow will enter the

engine’s intake system and may

hinder the airflow, which could re-

sult in engine shutdown or even

breakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make sure

the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to

the windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the

windshield or rear window, perform the

following procedure.

. To thaw the windshield wiper blade

rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow

selection in “

” and the temperature set

for maximum warmth until the wiper blade

rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to

“Climate control” F4-1.

. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper

deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the

windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” F3-89.

. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Winter driving

8-9

(348,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

use the rear window defogger. Refer to

“Defogger and deicer” F3-89.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts

to stick on the surface of the windshield

despite wiper operation, use the defroster

with the airflow selection in “

” and the

temperature set for maximum warmth.

After the windshield gets warmed enough

to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away

using the windshield washer. Refer to

“Windshield washer” F3-78.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the

wiper from working effectively. If snow is

stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to

a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the

vehicle at r oad side, use the hazard

warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer

to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8.

& Corrosion protection

Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-

ter tire(s), all four tires must be

the same for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all of four winter tires are not

the same for items (a) to (h),

serious mechanical damage

could occur to the drive train of

your car, and affect the following.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination of

radial, belted bias or bias tires

since it may cause dangerous

handling characteristics and lead

to an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all season

tires” as original equipment, which are

designed to provide an adequate measure

of traction, handling and braking perfor-

mance in year-round driving. In winter, it

may be possible to enhance performance

through use of tires designed specifically

for winter driving conditions.

When you choose to install winter tires on

your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire

size and type. You must install four winter

tires that are of the same size, construc-

tion, brand and load range and you should

never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires

since this may result in dangerous hand-

ling characteristics. When you choose a

tire, make sure that there is enough

clearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all times

regardless of the type of tires on your

vehicle.

Driving tips/Winter driving

8-10

(349,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on your

vehicle because of the lack of clear-

ance between the tires and vehicle

body.

NOTE

When tire chains cannot be used, use of

another type of traction device (such as

spring chains) may be acceptable if use

on your vehicle is recommended by the

device manufacturer, taking into ac-

count tire size and road conditions.

Follow the device manufacturer’s in-

structions, especially regarding max-

imum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle,

drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle,

and do not spin your wheels. Damage

caused to your vehicle by use of a

traction device is not covered under

warranty.

Make certain that any traction device

you use is an SAE class S device, and

use it on the front wheels only. Always

use the utmost care when driving with a

traction device. Overconfidence be-

cause you are using a traction device

could easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from

snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-

erator pedal slightly and move the shift

lever/select lever back and forth between

“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the

engine. For the best possible traction,

avoid spinning the wheels when trying to

free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremely

slippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmission in

2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT

models).

If your vehicle is a CVT model, for

information about holding the transmission

in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of

manual mode” F7-26.

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to ride

on a folded rear seatback in the

cargo area. Doing so may result

in serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or other

cargo higher than the top of the

seatback because it could tumble

forward and injure passengers in

the event of a sudden stop or

accident. Keep luggage or cargo

low, as close to the floor as

possible.

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

8-11

(350,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

WARNING

. When you carry something inside

the vehicle, secure it whenever

you can to prevent it from being

thrown around inside the vehicle

during sudden stops, sharp turns

or in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on the

roof. These loads raise the vehi-

cle’s center of gravity and make it

more prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly to

prevent them from shooting for-

ward and causing serious injury

during a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum load

limit. If you do, some parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicl e

handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal

injury. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on the

extended cargo area cover. Such

items could tumble forward in the

event of a sudden stop or a

collision. This could cause ser-

ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containers

with flammable or corrosive liquids

or any other dangerous items inside

the vehicle.

NOTE

For better fuel economy, do not carry

unneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight

Vehicle placard

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by available

cargo space. The maximum load you can

carry in your vehicle is shown on the

vehicle placard attached to the driver’s

side door pillar. It includes the total weight

of the driver and all passengers and their

belongings, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,

etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

8-12

(351,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to the

bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must

never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the

combined total of weight of the vehicle,

fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any

optional equipment and trailer tongue

load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-

pending on the situation. The GVWR

equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle – including standard equipment,

fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

assembly) plus the vehicle capacity

weight.

In addition, the total weight applied to each

axle (GAW) must n ever exceed the

GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside the

vehicle.

Even if the total weight of your luggage is

lower than the vehicle capacity weight,

either front or rear GAW may exceed the

GAWR, depending on the distribution of

the luggage.

When possible, the load should be evenly

distributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you

should confirm that GVW and front and

rear GAWs are within the GVWR and

GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle

scale, found at a commercial weighing

station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lower

load range than the originals because they

may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-

tions. Replacement tires with a higher load

range than the originals do not increase

the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

& Roof rail

1) Crossbar

Cargo can be carried on the roof after

securing the crossbars to the roof rails and

installing an appropriate carrying attach-

ment. When installing crossbars and a

carrying attachment, follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is

designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars

and carrying attachment) of no more than

150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed

your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.

CAUTION

. When using a carrying attach-

ment, make sure that the total

carrying load of the cargo, cross-

barsandcarryingattachment

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Loading your vehicle

8-13

(352,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg).

Overloading may cause damage

to the vehicle.

. For cargo carrying purposes, the

roof rails must be used together

with the crossbars and any ap-

propriate carrying attachment

that may be needed. The roof

rails must never be used alone

to carry cargo. Otherwise, da-

mage to the roof or paint, or a

dangerous road hazard due to

loss of cargo could result.

NOTE

Remember that the vehicle’s center of

gravity is altered with the weight of the

load on the roof, thus affecting driving

characteristics.

Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard

cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind

effects will be increased.

Trailer hitch (dealer option)

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximum

weight specified for the trailer

hitch. Exceeding the maximum

weight could cause an accident

resulting in serious personal in-

juries. Permissible trailer weight

changes depending on the situa-

tion. For possible recommenda-

tions and limitations, refer to

“Trailer towing” F8-16.

. Trailer brakes are required when

the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has

safety chains and that each chain

will hold the trailer’s maximum

gross weight. Towing trailers

without safety chains could cre-

ate a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch

due to coupling damage or hitch

ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin and

safety pi n for positive locking

placement before towing a trailer.

If the ball mount comes off the

hitch receiver, the trailer could

get loose and create a traffic

safety hazard.

. Although towing regulations for

trailer or caravan vehicles vary

by state/ region, all regulations

agree that specifications such

as the maximum gross trailer

weight must not exceed the les-

ser of the following:

– Maximum gross trailer weight

– Maximum gross tongue

weight

– GVWR

– GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only

compromise your safety, but will

also negate your insurance cov-

erage and/or may violate the state

road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. Use only the ball mount supplied

with this hitch. Use the hitch only

as a weight carrying hitch. Do not

use with any type of weight dis-

tributing hitch.

. The standard bumper beam must

be installed after you remove the

trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU

dealer for purchase of a standard

bumper beam if you do not have

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

8-14

(353,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the original.

. Safety performance is decreased

and there is increased risk of

injury to passengers in the case

of an accident if the trailer hitch

or a standard bumper beam is not

installed. One of them must al-

ways be installed on the vehicle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is

not possible to install the rear

towing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight and

maximum gross tongue weight are indi-

cated in the following table.

Maximum gross trai-

ler weight

Maximum gross ton-

gue weight

1,500 lbs (680 kg)

200 lbs

(90 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer

towing” F8-16.

& Connecting a trailer

1) Ball mount

2) Hitch pin

3) Safety pin

A) Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located

on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin

passes through the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin through the hole

located on the hitch pin securely.

4. Check the ball mount assembly by

pulling on it to make sure it does not come

off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch ball

that is appropriate for the ball mount and

your trailer. The hitch ball must be securely

installed on the ball mount.

6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.

7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with

safety chains that will hold the trailer’s

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Trailer hitch (dealer option)

8-15

(354,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

maximum gross weight. The chains should

cross under the trailer tongue to prevent

the tongue from dropping onto the ground

in case it should disconnect from the hitch

ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains

taking tight turn situations into account;

however, be careful not to let them drag on

the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to any

part of the vehicle other than the

safety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black

four-pin wire connector to the towing

trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitch

wire harness by individually activating the

brake, stop and turn signal lights on the

trailer.

NOTE

Always disconnect the trailer wire har-

ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& If not towing a trailer

. Remove the ball mount from the hitch

receiver tube and insert the receiver cover

onto the hitch receiver tube.

. Place the dust cap over the four-pin

connector of the hitch wire harness to

protect against possible damage.

. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the

four-pin connector using terminal grease.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended to

be used primarily as a passenger-carrying

vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,

brakes, tires and suspension and has an

adverse effect on fuel economy.

If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety

and satisfaction depend upon proper use

of correct equipment and cautious opera-

tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of

your SUBARU dealer to assist you in

purchasing a hitch and other necessary

towing eq uipment appropriate for your

vehicle. Do not use towing equipment

other than genuine SUBARU towing

equipment. In addition, be sure to follow

the instructions for proper installation and

use provided by the trailer or caravan’s

manufacturer.

SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

injuries or vehicle damage that result from

trailer towing equipment, or from any

errors or omissions in the instructions

accompanying such equipment or for your

failure to follow the proper instructions.

Regularly check that the hitch mounting

bolts and nuts are tightened securely.

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-16

(355,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Warranties and maintenance

SUBARU warranties do not apply to

vehicle damage or malfunction caused by

trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow

a trailer, more frequent maintenance will

be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “ Maintenance schedule under

severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”.)

Under no circumstances should a trailer be

towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with

any new powertrain component (engine,

transmission, differential, wheel bearings,

etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of

driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exce ed the maximum load

limits explained in th e following.

Exceeding the maximum load limits

could cause personal injury and/or

vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs

and tongue load. Make sure the

load and its distribution in your

vehicle and trailer are acceptable.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo load) must never exceed the

maximum total trailer weight in the follow-

ing table.

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-17

(356,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Crosstrek models

Conditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade

continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an

outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

750 lbs (340 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must

never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-

bined total of the weight of the vehicle,

driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment installed on your ve hicle.

Therefore, the GVW changes depending

on the situation. Determine the GVW each

time before going on a trip by putting your

vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-18

(357,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Certification label

GVWR of your vehicle that is given by

SUBARU is shown on the certification

label located at the bottom of driver’s side

door pillar of your vehicle.

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear

GAWs can be adjusted by relocating

passengers and luggage inside the vehi-

cle. The front and rear GAWR of your

vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also

shown on the certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and to

confirm that the total weight and weight

distribution are within safe driving limits,

you should have your vehicle and trailer

weighed at a commercial weighing station.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

! Tongue load

Tongue load

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8

to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and

does not exceed the maximum value of

200 lbs (90 kg).

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-19

(358,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Jack

2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with a

bathroom scale as shown in the illustration

above. When weighing the tongue load, be

sure to position the towing coupler at the

height at which it would be during actual

towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by proper

distribution of the load in the trailer. Never

load the trailer with more weight in the

back than in the front; approximately 60

percent of the trailer load should be in the

front and approximately 40 percent in the

rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as

possible on both the left and right sides.

Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distribution

while driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with more

weight in the back of trailer’s axle

than in the front, the load is taken off

the rear axle of the towing vehicle.

This may cause the rear wheels to

skid, especially during braking or

when vehicle speed is reduced dur-

ing cornering, resulting in over-

steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer Hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-

cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-

ous exhaust gas, water or mud may

enter the passenger compartment

through the drilled hole. Exhaust

gas contains carbon monoxide, a

colorless and odorless gas which is

dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

Also, drilling the frame or under-

body of your vehicle could cause

deterioration of strength of your

vehicle and cause corrosion around

the drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-

haust system, brake system, or

other systems when installing a

hitch or other trailer towing

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-20

(359,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

equipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitches

as they can cause damage to the

axle housing, wheel bearings,

wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than

genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine

SUBARU hitch is available from your

SUBARU dealer.

& When you do not tow a trailer

CAUTION

. The housing should be kept dirt

and corrosion-free at the points

of contact. The surfaces only

require cleaning with a cloth.

Grease or other lubricants

should never be used.

. If the ball is not installed, the

plastic insert should then be

inserted for protection and to

prevent dirt.

When the ball is not used, place the ball

cap and store securely.

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes are

required when the trailer and its

cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.

. Do not directly connect your

trailer’s hydraulic brake system

to the hydraulic brake system in

your vehicle. Direct connection

would cause the vehicle’s brake

performance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight

plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs

(453 kg), the tr ailer is required to be

equipped with its own brake system.

Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-

commended, and must be installed prop-

erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-

form with Federal, state/province and/or

other applicable regulations. Your

SUBARU’s brake system is not designed

to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic

brake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier for

more information about the trailer’s brake

system.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. Towing

trailer without safety chains could

create a traffic safety hazard if the

trailer separates from the hitch due

to coupling damage or hitch ball

damage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch

ball should break or become discon-

nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.

For safety, always connect the towing

vehicle and trailer with trailer safety

chains. Two chains should be used in

total, one to the right side and the other to

the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains

crossing each other under the trai ler

tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping

onto the ground in case the trailer tongue

should disconnect from t he hitch ball.

Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking

tight turn situations into account; however,

be careful not to let them drag on the

ground.

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-21

(360,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,

check that the standard side mirrors

provide a good rearward field of view

without significant blind spots. If significant

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-

dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that

conform with Federal, state/province and/

or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improper

connection of tra iler lights may

damage your vehicle’s electrical

system and cause a malfunction of

your vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s

electrical system requires modifications to

the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its

capacity and accommodate wiring

changes. To ensure the trailer lights are

connected properly, please consult your

SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-

tion of the turn signals and the brake lights

each time you connect a trailer to your

vehicle.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tempor-

ary spare tire is used. The temporary

spare tire is not designed to sustain

the towing load. Use of the tempor-

ary spare tire when towing can result

in failure of the spare tire and/or less

stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle

are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure sho uld be in

accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s

specifications. Also check federal, state,

province and/or other applicable regula-

tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire

when towing a trailer, ask a commercial

road service representative or profes-

sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in your

vehicle or trailer as a precaution against

getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire

is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

. For models equipped with the

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)

driving support systems, when

towing a trailer, press the BSD/

RCTA OFF switch to deactivate

the system. The system may not

operate properly due to the

blocked radar waves. For details

about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,

refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”

F7-59.

. For models equipped with RAB

(Reverse Automatic Braking)

system, consult your SUBARU

dealer for additional information

about towing a trailer.

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-22

(361,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

when towing a trailer in hilly

country on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,

stability, stopping distance and

braking performance will be dif-

ferent when compared to normal

operation. For safety’s sake, you

should empl oy extra c aution

when towing a trailer and you

should never drive at excessive

speeds. You should also keep the

following tips in mind:

. The braking power of the parking

brake may not be sufficient when

stronger braking power is

needed (e.g., when parking on a

steep slope while towing a trai-

ler).

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check the towing regulations for trailer

or caravan vehicles that vary by state/

region. Failure to comply with the proce-

dures set forth will not only compromise

your safety, but will also neg ate your

insurance coverage and/or may violate

the state road and traffic acts and regula-

tions.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-

hitch mounting are in good condition. If any

problems are apparent, do not tow the

trailer.

. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-

tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle

is tipped sharply up at the front and down

at the rear, check the total trailer weight,

GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then

confirm that the load and its distribution are

acceptable.

. Check that the tire rating and pressures

are correct.

. Check that the vehicle and trailer are

connected properly. Confirm that:

– the trailer tongue is connected

properly to the hitch ball.

– the trailer lights connector is con-

nected properly and trailer’sbrake

lights illuminate when the vehicle’s

brake pedal is pressed, and that the

trailer’s turn signal lights flash when

the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-

ated.

– the safety chains are con nected

properly.

– all cargo in the trailer is secured

safely in position.

– the side mirrors provide a good

rearward field of view without a sig-

nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learn

the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination

before starting out on a trip. In an area free

of traffic, practice turning, stopping and

backing up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably more

stopping distance when towing a trailer.

Avoid sudden braking because it may

result in skidding or jackknifing and loss

of control.

. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-

erations. If your vehicle has a manual

transmission, always start out in first gear

and release the clutch at moderate engine

revolution.

. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and

rapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make a

longer than normal turning radius because

the trailer wheels will be closer than the

vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a

tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.

. Crosswinds will adversely affect the

handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-

ingsway.Crosswindscanbedueto

weather conditions or the passing of large

trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly

grip the steering wheel and promptly begin

deceler ating your vehicle at a gradual

pace.

. When passing other vehicles, consider-

able distance is required because of the

added weight and length caused by

attaching the trailer to your vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-23

(362,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can

be difficult and requires experience. Never

accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the

bottom of the steering wheel with one

hand.

To reverse around a corner, perform the

following procedure.

1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-

site direction to the way you want to turn.

2. Once the trailer begins to swing

around, straighten the steering wheel.

3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-

tion.

4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line

with the trailer, then straighten the steering

again.

. If the ABS warning light illuminates

while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing

the trailer and have repairs performed

immediately by your nearest SUBARU

dealer.

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slow

down and shift into lower gear (if neces-

sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

engine braking effect and prevent over-

heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not

make sudden downshifts.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, the

air conditioner may turn off automatically

to protect the engine from overheating.

. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay

attention to the following indicators be-

cause the engine and transmission are

relatively prone to overheating.

: Coolant temperature high warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

(CVT models)

If the coolant temperature high warning

light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light

illuminates, immediately turn off the air

conditioner and stop the vehicle in the

nearest safe location. For further instruc-

tions and additional information, refer to

the following sections.

–“If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency” F9-2

–“Engine overheating” F9-12

–“Coolant temperature low indicator

light/Coolant temperature high warn-

ing light” F3-16

–“AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT

models)” F3-18

. For CVT models, avoid using the

accelerator pedal to stay stationary on an

uphill slope instead of using the parking

brake or foot brake. That may cause the

transmission fluid to overheat.

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-24

(363,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under both

vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply

the parking brake firmly. You should not

park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or

slope cannot be avoided, you should take

the following steps:

1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal

down.

2. Have some one plac e wheel blocks

under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release the regular brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the regular brakes and then

apply the parking brake; slowly release

the regular brakes.

5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT

models) or “P” position (CVT model s)

and shut off the engine.

Driving tips/Trailer towing

8-25

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(365,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

If you park your vehicle in case of an

emergency ............................................................ 9-2

Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2

Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3

Tool locations ........................................................ 9-4

Using the jack........................................................ 9-4

Flat tires................................................................... 9-5

Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-5

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(U.S.-spec. models) .............................................. 9-8

Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9

How to jump start ................................................. 9-10

Engine overheating............................................... 9-12

If steam is coming from the engine

compartment ......................................................9-12

If no steam is coming from the engine

compartment .....................................................9-12

Towing ................................................................... 9-13

Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes...............9-13

Using a flat-bed truck ...........................................9-15

Towing with all wheels on the ground ................... 9-16

Access key fob – if access key fob does not

operate properly ................................................ 9-17

Locking and unlocking .........................................9-17

Switching power status ........................................9-17

Starting engine .....................................................9-18

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened .. 9-19

Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroof

does not close ................................................... 9-19

If your vehicle is involved in an accident........... 9-20

In case of emergency

(366,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

If you park your vehicle in

case of an emergency

The hazard warning flasher should be

used in day or night to warn other drivers

when you have to park your vehicle under

emergency conditions.

Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to

safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-

vated regardless of the ignition switch

position.

Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the

hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it off

by pushing the switch again.

NOTE

When the hazard warning flasher is on,

the turn signals do not work.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when the

temporary spare tire is used.

The temporary spare tire is not

designed to sustain the towing

load. Use of the temporary spare

tire when towing can result in

failure of the spare tire and/or

less stability of the vehicle and

may lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) is un-

able to monitor all four road

wheels. Contact your SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible for

tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting.

In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency

9-2

(367,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tire

other than the original. Using other

sizes may result in severe mechan-

ical damage to the drive train of your

vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller and

lighter than a conventional tire and is

designed for emergency use only. Re-

move the temporary spare tire and re-

install the conventional tire as soon as

possible because the spare tire is de-

signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-

porary spare tire periodically to keep the

tire ready for use. The correct pressure is

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm

When using the temporary spare tire, note

the following.

. Drive with caution when the temporary

spare tire is installed. Avoid hard accel-

eration and braking, or fast cornering, as

control of the vehicle may be lost.

. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary

spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,

a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporary

spare tires at the same time.

. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire

has a smaller diameter, so road clearance

is reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar

2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears on

the tread, replace the tire.

. The temporary spare tire must be used

only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire

gets punctured, replace the wheel with a

rear wheel and install the temporary spare

tire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the following

maintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

9-3

(368,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Tool locations

1) Jack handle

1) Tool bucket

2) Spare tire

1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver

3) Jack

4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

A jack handle is stored under the cargo

area. A jack and a towing hook are stored

in the tool bucket that is located in the

recess of the spare tire wheel.

Also, a tool bag that contains a wheel nut

wrench and a screwdriver is equipped with

the vehicle. Open the tool bag and store

the tools in the tool bucket as illustrated in

order that all tools are ready for use at any

time.

& Using the jack

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake securely and

shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)

or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position

(CVT models).

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the tire that

you are going to replace.

5. Take out the jack and jack handle.

In case of emergency/Maintenance tools

9-4

(369,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Jack-up points

6. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the tire

that you are going to replace.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

7. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, never

brake suddenly; keep driving straight

ahead while gradually reducing speed.

Then slowly pull off the road to a safe

place.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on an

incline or a loose road surface.

The jack can come out of the

jacking point or sink i nto the

ground and this can result in a

severe accident.

. Use only the jack provided with

your vehicle. The jack supplied

with the vehicle is designed only

for changing a tire. Never get

under the vehicle while support-

ing the vehicle with this jack.

. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the ground

using the jack. Never swing or

push the vehicle supported with

the jack. The jack can come out of

the jacking point due to a jolt and

this can result in a severe acci-

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Flat tires

9-5

(370,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

dent.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-

ever possible, then stop the engine.

2. Apply the parking brake securely and

shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)

or the select lever to the “P” (Park) position

(CVT models).

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and

have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear

of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench.

The tools and the spare tire are stored

under the cargo area. Refer to “Mainte-

nance tools” F9-3.

NOTE

Make sure that the jack is well lubri-

cated before using it.

6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the

attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take

the spare tire out.

NOTE

If the spare tire provided in your vehicle

is a temporary spare tire, carefully read

“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and

strictly follow the instructions.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel

nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points

8. Place the jack under the side sill at the

front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat

tire.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

9-6

(371,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

9. Insert the jack handle into the jack-

screw, and turn the handle until the tire

clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle

higher than necessary.

10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat

tire.

11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean

the mounting surface of the wheel and hub

with a cloth.

12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the

wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts when the spare tire is

installed. This could cause the nuts

to become loose and lead to an

accident.

13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.

14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely

tighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in the

illustration.

For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer

to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on

the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Flat tires

9-7

(372,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

on the wrench because you may exceed

the specified torque. Have the wheel nut

torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.

1) Support holder

15. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Install with the suppo rt

holder facing upward and secure the flat

tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.

NOTE

If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try

turning the support holder upside

down.

16. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel

nut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changing

tools in the passenger compartment

after changing wheels. In a sudden

stop or collision, loose equipment

could strike occupants and cause

injury. Store the tire and all tools in

the proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.

models)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with the warning message

indicated by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.

The tire pressure monitoring system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven.

Also, this system may not react immedi-

ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a blow-out caused running over

a sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly. Instead,

perform the following procedure.

(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducing

speed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to a

safe place. Otherwise an acci-

dent involving serious vehicle

damage and serious personal

injury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all four

tires and adjust the pressure

to the COLD tire pressure

shown on the vehicle placard

on the door pillar on the

driver’s side.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may have signifi-

cant damage and a fast leak that

causes the tire to lose air rapidly.

In case of emergency/Flat tires

9-8

(373,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare ti re as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/trans-

mitter being transferred, the low

tire pressure warning light will

illuminate steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute.

This indicates the TPMS is unable

to monitor all four road wheels.

Contact your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible for tire and

sensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warning

valve and transmitter may not

operate properly. If a liquid sea-

lant is used, contact your nearest

SUBARU dealer or other qualified

service shop as soon as possi-

ble. Make sure to replace the tire

pressure warning valve and

transmitter when replacing the

tire. You may reuse the wheel if

there is no damage to it and if the

sealant residue is properly

cleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadily

after blinking for approximately

one minute, promptly contact a

SUBARU dealer to have the sys-

tem inspected.

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.

Do not let it come in contact with

the eyes, skin, clothing or the

vehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you, thor-

oughly flush the exposed area

with water immediately. Get med-

ical help if the fluid has entered

your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and obtain immediate medical

help.

Keep everyone including chil-

dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a battery

explodes if a flame or spark is

brought near it. Do not smoke or

light a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if the

discharged battery is frozen. It

could cause the battery to burst

or explode.

. Whenever working on or around a

battery, always wear suitable eye

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Jump starting

9-9

(374,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

protectors, and remove metal

objects such as rings, bands or

other metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables and

clamps on them do not have

loose or missing insulation.

Do not jump start unless cables

in suitable condition are avail-

able.

. A running engine can be danger-

ous. Keep your fingers, hands,

clothing, hair and tools away

from the cooling fan, belts and

any other moving engine parts.

Removing rings, watches and

ties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it

done incorrectly. If you are un-

sure about the proper procedure

for jump starting, consult a com-

petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to a

run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle

may be jump started by connecting your

battery to another battery (called the

booster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump start

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12

volts and the negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and

accessories.

4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in

the sequence illustrated.

In case of emergency/Jump starting

9-10

(375,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

A) Booster battery

B) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged

battery.

(2) Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the positive (+) term-

inal of the booster battery.

(3) Connect one end of the other cable

to the negative (−) terminal of the

booster battery.

(4) Connect the other end of the cable

to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle

with the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near any

moving parts and that the cable clamps are

not in contact with any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and run it at moderate

speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle

that has the discharged battery.

6. When finished, carefully disconnect

the cables in exactly the reverse order.

In case of emergency/Jump starting

9-11

(376,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator

cap until the engine has been shut

off and has fully cooled down. When

the engine is hot, the coolant is

under pressure. Removing the cap

while the engine is still hot could

release a spray of boiling hot cool-

ant, which could burn you very

seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe

location.

& If steam is coming from the

engine compartment

. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and get everyone away

from the vehicle until it cools down.

. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-

er.

& If no steam is coming from the

engine compartment

1. Keep the engine running at idling

speed.

2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment. Refer to “Engine

hood” F11-5.

Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If

the fan is not turning, immediately turn off

the engine and contact an authorized

SUBARU dealer for repair.

3. After the coolant temperature high

warning light that has blinked or illumi-

nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.

For details about the warning light, refer to

“Coolant temperature low indicator light/

Coolant temperature high warning light”

F3-16.

4. After the engine has fully cooled down,

check the coolant level in the reserve tank.

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”

mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

NOTE

For details about how to check the

coolant level or how to add coolant,

refer to “Engine coolant ” F11-11.

5. If there is no coolant in the reserve

tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then

remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator

with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hot

radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the

radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-

clockwise slowly without pressing down

until it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has been

fully released, remove the cap by pressing

down and turning it.

In case of emergency/Engine overheating

9-12

(377,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Towing

If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your SUBARU dealer or a commercial

towing service. Observe the following

procedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with the

front wheels raised off the ground

while the rear wheels are on the

ground, or with the rear wheels

raised off the ground while the front

wheels are on the ground. This will

cause the vehicle to spin away due

to the operation or deterioration of

the center differential.

& Towing hooks and tie-down

hooks/holes

The towing hooks should be used only in

an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle

from mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towing

hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.

Never use suspension parts or

other parts of the body for towing

or tie-down purposes.

. To prevent deformation to the

front bumper and the towing

hook, do not appl y excessive

lateral load to the towing hooks.

! Front towing hook

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver

out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle

out of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head

screwdriver into the cutout of the cover and

pry open the cover.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Towing

9-13

(378,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use th e towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the SRS airbag

system in a frontal collision.

! Rear towing hook

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver

out of the tool bucket. Take the jack handle

out of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver

with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Pry off the cover on

the rear bumper using a screwdriver, and

you will find a threaded hole for attaching

the towing hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

hole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using

the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook from

In case of emergency/Towing

9-14

(379,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.

Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use th e towing hook

except when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towing

hook after towing. Leaving the

towing hook mounted on the

vehicle could interfere with prop-

er operation of the fuel pump

shut off function when the vehi-

cle is struck from behind.

! Front tie-down hooks

The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the

front bumper.

! Rear tie-down holes

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located near

each of the jack-up reinforcements.

There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.

To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,

return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only for

downward anchoring. If they are

used to anchor the vehicle in any

other direction, cables may slip out

of the holes, possibly causing a

dangerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport your

vehicle. Use the following procedures to

ensure safe transportation.

1. Shift the select le ver into the “P”

position for CVT models. Shift the shift

lever into the “1st” position for MT models.

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Towing

9-15

(380,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

properly with safety chains. Each safety

chain should be equally tightened and care

must be taken not to pull the chains so

tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

If your vehicle has a bumper under

guard (optional), be careful not to

scrape it when placing the vehicle

on the carrier and when removing

the vehicle from the carrier.

& Towing with all wheels on the

ground

1. Release the parking brake and put the

transmission in the neutral position (CVT

and MT).

2. The ignition switch should be in the

“ON” position while the vehicle is being

towed.

3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to

prevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to

the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while

the vehicle is being towed be-

cause the steering wheel and the

direction of the wheels will be

locked.

. Remember that the brake booster

and power steering do not func-

tion when the engine is not run-

ning. Because the engine is

turned off , it will take greater

effort to operate the brake pedal

and steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmissi on failure occurs,

transport your vehicle on a flat-

bed truck.

. For CVT models, the traveling

speed must be limited to less

than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the

traveling distance to less than 31

miles (50 km). For greater speeds

and distances, transport your

vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

In case of emergency/Towing

9-16

(381,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Access key fob – if access key

fob does not operate properly

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magnetic

sources and signal transmitters

away from the area between the

access key fob and the push-button

ignition switch. They may interfere

with the communication between

the access key fob and the push-

button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperable

because of strong radio signals in the

surrounding area or a low battery condition

of the access key fob.

. Locking/unlocking doors (including the

rear gate)

. Switching power status

. Starting engine

In such cases, perform the following

procedure. When the battery of the access

key fob is discharged, replace it with a new

one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access

key fob” F11-43.

& Locking and unlocking

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

While pressing the release button of the

access key fob, take out the emergency

key.

Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the

emergency key in the procedure described

in “Locking and unlocking from the out-

side” F2-21.

NOTE

After locking or unlocking, be sure to

attach the emergency key back to the

access key fob.

& Switching power status

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT

models) or the select lever to the “P”

(Park) position (CVT models).

3. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models)

or the brake pedal (CVT models).

4. Hold the access key fob with the

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the status of the push-button

ignition switch changes to either of the

following.

. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated:

– CONTINUED –

In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly

9-17

(382,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

“ACC”

. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-

button start system is deactivated, press

the push-button ignition switch with the

clutch pedal (MT models) or the brake

pedal (CVT models) released. The status

of the push-button ignition switch then

changes to “ON”.

NOTE

If the power does not switch even

though the above procedure was fol-

lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU

dealer.

& Starting engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the shift lever to neutral (MT

models) or the select lever to the “P”

(Park) position (CVT models).

3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models).

5. Holdtheaccesskeyfobwiththe

buttons facing you, and touch the push-

button ignition switch with it.

When the communication between the

access key fob and the vehicle is com-

pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the

same time, the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.

6. After the push-button ignition switch

turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while

depressing the brake pedal (all models)

and the clutch pedal (MT models), press

the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE

If the engine does not start even though

the above procedure was followed

precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.

In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly

9-18

(383,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Rear gate – if the rear gate

cannot be opened

In the event that you cannot open the rear

gate by operating the rear gate opener

button, you can open it from inside the

cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim using

a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl

tape or a cloth.

2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind

the rear gate trim panel.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate open

lever with fingers because doing so

may cause an injury. Always use a

flat-head screwdriver or a similar

tool.

3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to

the right position using a flat-head screw-

driver or a similar tool.

Moonroof (if equipped) – if the

moonroof does not close

If the moonroof do es not cl ose, we

recommend that you have the system

checked by a SUBARU dealer.

In case of emergency/Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened

9-19

(384,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

If your vehicle is involved in

an accident

CAUTION

If y our vehicle is involved in an

accident, be sure to inspect the

ground under the vehicle before

restarting the engine. If you find that

fuel has leaked on the ground, do

not try to restart the engine. The fuel

system has been damaged and is in

need of repair. Immediately contact

the nearest automotive service facil-

ity. We recommend that you consult

your SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off

system. When the vehicle sustains an

impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump

shut off system stops supplying the fuel in

order to minimize fuel leakage. However,

depending on the impact conditions at the

time of collision, the fuel pump shut-off

system may not operate.

Perform the following procedures to restart

the engine after the system is activated.

Models without “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

or “ACC” position.

2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access with

push-button start system”:

1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to

the “ACC” or “OFF” position.

2. Restart the engine.

In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident

9-20

(387,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Exterior care.......................................................... 10-2

Washing ...............................................................10-2

Waxing and polishing............................................ 10-3

Cleaning alloy wheels ........................................... 10-4

Corrosion protection ............................................ 10-4

Most common causes of corrosion .......................10-4

To help prevent corrosion .....................................10-5

Cleaning the interior............................................. 10-5

Seat fabric............................................................10-5

Leather seat materials .......................................... 10-6

Synthetic leather upholstery .................................10-6

Seatbelt................................................................10-6

Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument

panel, console panel, and switches....................10-6

Monitor................................................................. 10-7

Appearance care

(388,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, the

brakes may get wet. As a result,

the brake stopping distance will

be longer. To dry the brakes, drive

the vehicle at a safe speed while

lightly depressing the brake ped-

al to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-

ment and area adjacent to it. If

water enters the engine air intake

or electrical parts, it will cause

engine trouble or a malfunction

of electrical equipment.

. When washing inner fenders, un-

derbody, bumpers and protrud-

ing objects such as exhaust

pipes and exhaust finishers, be

careful to prevent injuries from

contacting sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solvents

when washing the surface of the

bulb assembly cover. However, if

a detergent with organic solvents

is used to wash the cover sur-

face, completely rinse off the

detergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-

maged.

. Since your vehicle is equipped

with a rear wiper, automatic car-

wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging the

wiper arm and other compo-

nents. Ask the automatic car-

wash operator not to let the

brushes touch the wiper arm or

to fix the wiper arm on the rear

window glass with adhesive tape

before operating the machine.

. For models with a rod-type roof

antenna, remove the antenna rod

before washing your car at a car

wash. If the antenna rod remains

attached, it may scratch the roof.

When reinstalling the removed

antenna rod, be sure to fully

tighten it.

NOTE

. When having your vehicle washed in

an automatic car wash, make sure

beforehand that the car wash is of

suitable type.

. The rear view camera lens has a hard

coating to help prevent scratches.

However, when washing the vehicle or

cleaning the camera lens, be careful not

to scratch the camera lens. Do not use a

washing brush directly on the camera

lens. The image quality of the rear view

camera may deteriorate.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s

beauty is frequent washing. Wash the

vehicle at least once a month to avoid

contamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the

vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-

light.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,

and bird droppings should be washed off

by using a light detergent, as required. If

you use a light detergent, make certain

that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use

strong soap or chemical detergents. All

cleaning agents should be promptly

flushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly

with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the

remaining water off with a chamois or soft

cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand

brush when washing down underbody,

inner fenders and suspension to effec-

tively remove mud and dirt off.

Appearance care/Exterior care

10-2

(389,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used for

deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-

rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-

derbody components, such as the exhaust

system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,

floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside

of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water

at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful

effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbody

components may accelerate their corro-

sion.

After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy

roads, wash the mud and sand off the

underbody. Carefully flush the suspension

and axle parts, as they are particularly

prone to mud and sand buildup. Do not use

a sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brake

hoses, sensor harnesses, and

other parts when washing sus-

pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the engine

bottom for a long time. It may

cause damage of some electrical

parts.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)

or more between the washer nozzle and

the vehicle.

. Do not wash the same area continu-

ously.

. If a stain will not come out easily, wash

by hand. Some warm water washers are of

the high temperature, high pressure type,

and they can damage or deform the resin

parts such as moldings, or cause water to

leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing and polishing.

Use a good quality polish and wax and

apply them according to the manufac-

turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when

the painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,

as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of

wax on a painted surface leads to loss of

the original luster and also quickens the

deterioration of the surface. It is recom-

mended that a coat of wax be applied at

least once a month, or whenever the

surface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tone

cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-

face with a fine-grained compound. Never

polish just the affected area, but include

the surrounding area as well. Always

polish in only one direction. A No. 2000

grain compound is recommended. Never

use a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-

grained compounds have a smaller grain-

size number and could damage the paint.

After polishing with a compound, coat with

wax to restore the original luster. Frequent

polishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removing

the paint layer and exposing the under-

– CONTINUED –

Appearance care/Exterior care

10-3

(390,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

coat. When in doubt, it is always best to

contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto

paint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organic

solvents on the surface of the bulb

assembly cover. However, if a polish

or wax with organic solvents is

applied to the cover surface, com-

pletely wipe off the polish or wax.

Otherwise, the cover surface may be

damaged.

NOTE

. Be careful not to block the wind-

shield washer nozzles with wax when

waxing the vehicle.

. Do not wipe the rear view camera

with alcohol, benzine or paint thinner.

Otherwise, discoloration may occur. To

remove contamination, wipe the cam-

era with a cloth moistened with diluted

neutral detergent and then wipe it with a

soft, dry cloth.

. When waxing the vehicle, be careful

not to apply the wax to the rear view

camera. If it comes in contact with the

camera, moisten a clean cloth with

diluted neutral detergent to remove

the wax.

& Cleaning alloy wheels

. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of

any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on

too long, it may be difficult to clean off.

. Do not use soap containing grit to clean

the wheels. Be sure t o use a neutral

cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly

with water. Do not clean the wheels with a

stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed

washing device.

. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy

wheels) with water as soon as possible

when it has been splashed with sea water,

exposed to sea breezes, or driven on

roads treated with salt or other agents.

Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed and

built to resist corrosion. Special materials

and protective finishes have been used on

most parts of the vehicle to help maintain

fine appearance, strength, and reliable

operation.

& Most common causes of cor-

rosion

The most common causes of corrosion

are:

. The accumulation of moisture retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone chips

or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle

when:

. It is exposed to road salt or dust control

chemicals, or used in coastal areas where

there is more salt in the air, or in areas

where there is considerab le industr ial

pollution.

. It is driven in areas of high humidity,

especially when temperatures range just

above freezing.

. Dampness in certain parts of the

Appearance care/Corrosion protection

10-4

(391,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

vehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may be

dry.

. High temperatures will cause corrosion

to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry

quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To help prevent corrosion

Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent

corrosion of the body and sus pension

components. Also, wash the vehicle

promptly after driving on any of the

following surfaces.

. roads that have been salted to prevent

them from freezing in winter

. mud, sand, or gravel

. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-

mended that the underbody be given a

very thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check the

condition of underbody components, such

as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, suspension, steering

system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of

them are found to be rusted, they should

be given an appropriate rust prevention

treatment or should be replaced. Contact

your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint as

soon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for water

and dirt accumulation under the floor mats

because that could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park your

vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-

age. In such a garage, corrosion can be

caused by dampness. If you wash the

vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into

the garage when wet or covered with

snow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weather

and/or in areas where road salts and other

corrosive materials are used, the door

hinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hood

latch should be inspected and lubricated

periodically.

Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches. (Do not use

organic solvents.)

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments or

window cleaner containing abra-

sives to clean the inner surface of

the rear window. They may damage

the conductors printed on the win-

dow.

& Seat fabric

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a

vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the

fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum

cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.

Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung

cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If

the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution

of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry

thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try a

commercially-available fabric cleaner.

Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

– CONTINUED –

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

10-5

(392,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

make sure it does not affect the fabric

adversely. Use the cleaner according to its

instructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not use

benzine, paint thinner, or any similar

materials. Doing so could damage

the surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Leather seat materials

The leather used by SUBARU is a high

quality natural product which will retain its

distinctive appearance and feel for many

years with proper care.

Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the

surface can cause the material to become

brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular

cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber

cloth should be performed monthly, taking

care not to soak the leather or allow water

to penetrate the stitched seams.

A mild det ergent suitable for cleaning

woolen fabrics may be used to remove

difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry

cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If

your SUBARU is to be parked for a long

time in bright sunlight, it is recommended

that the seats and head restraints be

covered, or the windows shaded, to pre-

vent fading or shrinkage.

Minor surface blemishes or bald patches

may be treated with a commercial leather

spray lacquer. You will discover that each

leather seat section will develop soft folds

or wrinkles, which is characte risti c of

genuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholstery

The synthetic leather material used on the

SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-

ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the

soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe

off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial

foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic

leather materials may be used when

necessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such as

solvents, paint thinners, window

cleaner or fuel must never be used

on leather or synthetic interior ma-

terials. Doing so could damage the

surface and cause the color to

deteriorate.

& Seatbelt

For details about how to clean the seatbelt,

refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” F1-20.

& Climate control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, con-

sole panel, and switches

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate

control panel, audio equipment, instru-

ment panel, center console, combination

meter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents such

as paint thinners or fuel, or

strong cleaning agents that con-

tain those solvents. Doing so

could damage the surface and

cause the color to deteriorate.

. Do not use chemical solvents that

contain silicone on the vehicle

audio system, electrical compo-

nents of the air-condit ioner or

any switches. If silicone adheres

to these parts, it may cause

damage to electrical compo-

nents.

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

10-6

(393,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Monitor

To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-

tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone

cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is

extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth

moistened with neutral detergent then

carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergent

directly onto the monitor. Doing

so could damage the monitor’s

components.

. Do not wipe the monitor with a

hard cloth. Doing so could

scratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid that

contains thinner, fuel, or any

other volatile substance. Such

cleaning fluid could erase the

lettering on the switches at the

bottom of the monitor.

Appearance care/Cleaning the interior

10-7

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(395,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Maintenance schedule.......................................... 11-3

Maintenance precautions ..................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ...................................................... 11-4

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment ...................................................... 11-4

When checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running ............11-5

Engine hood .......................................................... 11-5

Engine compartment overview ............................ 11-7

Engine oil............................................................... 11-8

Engine oil consumption ........................................ 11-8

Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap

and oil filter ........................................................ 11-8

Checking the oil level............................................ 11-8

Changing the oil and oil filter ................................11-9

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-10

Synthetic oil........................................................ 11-10

Cooling system ................................................... 11-10

Safety precautions .............................................. 11-10

Cooling fan, hose and connections ..................... 11-11

Engine coolant.................................................... 11-11

Air cleaner element............................................. 11-12

Replacing the air cleaner element........................ 11-13

Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-14

Recommended spark plugs................................. 11-14

Drive belts ........................................................... 11-14

Manual transmission oil ..................................... 11-14

Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-14

Continuously variable transmission fluid.......... 11-15

Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and

rear differential gear oil....................................11-15

Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 11-15

Brake fluid............................................................11-15

Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-15

Recommended brake fluid .................................. 11-16

Clutch fluid (MT models).....................................11-16

Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-16

Recommended clutch fluid ................................. 11-17

Brake booster ......................................................11-17

Brake pedal ..........................................................11-18

Checking the brake pedal free play ..................... 11-18

Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-18

Clutch pedal (MT models)...................................11-18

Checking the clutch function .............................. 11-18

Checking the clutch pedal free play .................... 11-19

Hill start assist system .......................................11-19

Replacement of brake pad and lining ................ 11-19

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings.......... 11-20

Parking brake stroke ........................................... 11-20

Tires and wheels .................................................11-21

Types of tires ..................................................... 11-21

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

(if equipped) .................................................... 11-21

Tire inspection.................................................... 11-22

Tire pressures and wear ..................................... 11-23

Wheel balance .................................................... 11-24

Wear indicators .................................................. 11-25

Maintenance and service

(396,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Rotational direction of tires ................................. 11-25

Tire rotation........................................................ 11-25

Tire replacement ................................................. 11-26

Wheel replacement ............................................. 11-27

Alloy wheels ........................................................ 11-27

Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 11-28

Adding the windshield washer fluid..................... 11-28

Windshield washer fluid ...................................... 11-28

Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-29

Windshield wiper blade assembly........................ 11-29

Window wiper blade rubber................................. 11-30

Rear window wiper blade assembly..................... 11-31

Rear window wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-32

Battery ................................................................. 11-33

Fuses ................................................................... 11-34

Installation of accessories ................................. 11-35

Replacing bulbs ...................................................11-36

Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 11-36

Headlights (models with halogen headlights) ... ... 11-36

Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-38

Parking light....................................................... 11-38

Front fog light (if equipped) ................................ 11-38

Rear combination lights...................................... 11-38

Backup light ....................................................... 11-40

License plate light .............................................. 11-40

Map light ............................................................ 11-41

Vanity mirror light (if equipped)........................... 11-41

Dome light and cargo area light .......................... 11-41

Other bulbs ........................................................ 11-42

Replacing key battery .........................................11-42

Safety precautions.............................................. 11-42

Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 11-43

Replacing transmitter battery.............................. 11-44

Maintenance and service

(397,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Maintenance schedule

U.S. models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-

nance Booklet”. For details, read the

separate “Warranty and Maintenance

Booklet”.

Canada models

The scheduled maintenance items re-

quired to be serviced at regular intervals

are shown in the “Warranty and Service

Booklet”. For details, read the separate

“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada models

Some items of your vehicle are required to

be serviced at scheduled intervals. For

details about your maintenance schedule,

read the separate “Warranty and Main-

tenance Booklet”.

NOTE

For models with a multi-function dis-

play (color LCD), you can set a remin-

der to be displayed when a scheduled

maintenance item is almost due. For

details, refer to “Maintenance settings”

F3-61.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-

quired, it is recommended that all work be

done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and service by

yourself, you should familiarize yourself

with the information provided in this sec-

tion on general maintenance and service

for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service could

cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-

tion. Any problems caused by improper

maintenance and service performed by

you are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Always select a safe area when

performing maintenance on your

vehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoid

injury when working on the vehi-

cle. Remember that some of the

materials in the vehicle may be

hazardous if improperly used or

handled, for example, battery

acid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-

viced by persons fully competent

to do so. Serious personal injury

may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools and

make certain that they are well

maintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-

ported only by a jack. Always use

safety stands to support the

vehicle.

. Never keep the engine running in

a poorly ventilated area, such as

a garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow open

flames around the fuel or battery.

This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is under

pressure, replacement of the fuel

filter should be performed only

by your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

guard against getting oil or fluids

in your eyes. If something does

get in your eyes, thoroughly

wash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring of

the SRS airbag system or seat-

belt pretensioner system, or at-

tempt to take its connectors

apart, as that may activate the

system or it can render it inop-

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule

11-3

(398,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-

ter for this wiring. If your SRS

airbag or seatbelt pretensioner

needs service, consult your near-

est SUBARU dealer.

NOTE

SUBARU does not endorse the use of

non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against

performing these services on a

SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-

proved flushing systems use chemi-

cals and/or solvents which have not

been tested or approved by SUBARU.

SUBARU warranties do not cover any

part of the vehicle which is damaged by

adding or applying chemicals and/or

solvents other than those approved or

recommended by SUBARU.

& Before checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and apply

the parking brake firmly to pre-

vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.

Engine parts become very hot

when the engine is running and

remain hot for some time after the

engine has stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.

This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position, the cooling fan

may operate suddenly even when

the engine is stopped. If your

body or clothes come into con-

tact with a rotating fan, that could

result in serious injury. To avoid

risk of injury, perform the follow-

ing precautions.

– Models with push-button start

system:

Always turn the push-button

ignition switch to the “OFF”

position and confirm that the

operation indicator on the

switch is turned off. Then take

the access key fob out from

the vehicle.

– Mod els without push-button

start system:

Always remove the key from

the ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicing

on a vehicle equipped with a

remote engine start system (a

dealer option), temporarily place

the remote engine start system in

service mode to prevent it from

unexpectedly starting the engine.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

CAUTION

. Do not contact the drive belt

cover while checking the compo-

nents in the engine compartment.

Doing so may cause your hand to

slip off the cover and result in an

unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until the

Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions

11-4

(399,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

engine has cooled down comple-

tely. Doing so may result in a burn

or other injury. Note that the oil

filter becomes very hot when the

engine is running and remains

hot for some time after the engine

has stopped.

& When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment

while the engine is running

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.

Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from the cooling

fan, drive belt and any other moving

engine parts. Removing rings,

watches and ties is advisable.

Engine hood

CAUTION

. When you open the engine hood,

do not stand the wiper blades up.

Furthermore, while the hood is

open, do not operate the wind-

shield wipers. Doing so could

result in damage to the engine

hood and wiper blades.

. Be extremely careful not to catch

fingers or other objects when

closing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly to

close it. It could deform the metal.

. Be extremely careful opening the

engine hood when the wind is

strong. The engine hood could

close suddenly, possibly causing

injuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories other

than genuine SUBARU parts to

the engine hood. If the engine

hood becomes too heavy, t he

stay may not be able to support

holding it open.

To open the hood:

1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the

windshield, return them to their original

position.

2. Pull the hood release knob under the

instrument panel.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Engine hood

11-5

(400,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

3. Release the secondary hood release

by moving the lever between the front grille

and the hood toward the left.

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the

hood prop from the slot in the hood and

return the prop to its retainer.

2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-

mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed

position and then let it drop.

3. After closing the hood, be sure the

hood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood is

properly locked before you start

driving. If it is not, it might fly open

while the vehicl e is moving and

block your view, which may cause

an accident and serious bodily in-

jury.

Maintenance and service/Engine hood

11-6

(401,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Engine compartment overview

1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

(MT models) (page 11-15)

2) Fuse box (page 11-34)

3) Battery (page 11-33)

4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-28)

5) Radiator cap (page 11-11)

6) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)

7) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)

8) Engine oil filter (page 11-9)

9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)

10) Air cleaner case (page 11-12)

Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview

11-7

(402,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Engine oil

CAUTION

. If the level gauge cannot be

pulled out easily, twist the level

gauge right and left, then gently

pull it out. Otherwise, you may be

injured accidentally stra ining

yourself.

. Use only engine oil with the

recommended grade and v is-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine oil consumption

Some engine oil will be consumed while

driving. The rate of consumption can be

affected by such factors as transmission

type, driving style, terrain and tempera-

ture. Under the following conditions, oil

consumption can be increased and thus

require refilling between maintenance in-

tervals:

. When the engine is new and within the

break-in period

. When the engine oil is of lower quality

. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used

. When engine braking is employed

(repeatedly)

. When the engine is operated at high

engine speeds (for extended periods of

time)

. When the engine is operated under

heavy loads (for extended periods of time)

. When towing a trailer

. When the engine idles for extended

periods of time

. When the vehicle is operated in stop

and go and/or heavy traffic situations

. When the vehicle is used under severe

thermal conditions

. When the vehicle accelerates and

decelerates frequently

Under these or similar conditions, you

should check your oil at least every 2nd

fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more

frequently. Different drivers in the same

car may experience different results. If

your oil consumption rate is greater than

expected, contact your authorized

SUBARU retailer who may perform a test

under controlled conditions.

& Locations of the oil level

gauge, oil filler cap and oil

filter

1) Oil level gauge

2) Oil filler cap

3) Oil filter

& Checking the oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position. If you check the oil level

just after turning the ignition switch to the

“LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait a few minutes

for the oil to drain back into the oil pan

before checking the level.

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

11-8

(403,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pulled

out easily, twist the level gauge right

and left, th en gently pull it out.

Otherwise, you may be injured acci-

dentally straining yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,

and insert it again.

3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly

inserted until it stops.

1) Full level

2) Low level

3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp

qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.

5. Check the oil levels on both sides of the

level gauge. The engine oil level must be

judged by the lowest of the two levels. If

the oil level is below the low level mark,

add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engine

oil filter when removing the oil

filler cap. Doing so may result in a

burn, a pinched finger, or may

cause some other injury.

. Useonlyengineoilwiththe

recommended grade and vis-

cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oil

when adding it. If oil touches the

exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad

smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If

engine oil gets on the exhaust

pipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oil

filler cap and slowly pour engine oil

through the filler neck. After pouring oil

into the engine, you must use the level

gauge to confirm that the oil level is

correct.

NOTE

. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,

do not add any additional oil above the

upper level when the engine is cold.

. The engine low oil level warning light

may stay illuminated when the engine

is started straight after topping up or

changing the engine oil. In such cases,

park the vehicle on a level surface and

wait for more than a minute until the oil

level settles, after which the warning

light will turn off. Refer to “Engine low

oil level warning light” F3-18.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to

the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

The engine oil and oil filter must be

changed more frequently than listed in

the maintenance schedule when driving

on dusty roads, when short trips are

frequently made, or when driving in ex-

tremely cold weather.

NOTE

. Changing the engine oil and oil filter

should be performed by a well-trained

expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer

for changing the engine oil and oil filter.

Fully trained mechanics are on standby

at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the

special tools, spare parts and recom-

mended oil for this work, and also, used

oils are properly disposed of.

. If performing oil replacement your-

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Engine oil

11-9

(404,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

self, observe the local regulations and

dispose of waste oil properly.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-

mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.

NOTE

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects

fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity

provide better fuel economy. However,

in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is

required to properly lubricate the en-

gine.

& Synthetic oil

You should use synthetic engine oil that

meets the same requirements given for

conventional engine oil. When using syn-

thetic oil, you must use oil of the same

classification, viscosity and grade shown

in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine

oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil

and filter changing intervals shown in the

Warranty and Maintenance booklet.

NOTE

Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity

noted in chapter 12 is the recom-

mended engine oil for optimum engine

performance. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Cooling system

& Safety precautions

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator

cap until the engine has been shut

off and has cooled down completely.

Since the coolant is under pressure,

you may suffer serious burns from a

spray of boiling hot coolant when

the cap is removed.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factory

with SUBARU Super Coolant that

does not require the first change

for 11 years/137,500 miles (11

years/220,000 km). This coolant

should not be mixed with any

other brand or type of coolant

during this period. Mixing with a

different coolant will reduce the

life of the coolant. Should it be

necessary to top up the coolant

for any reason, use only SUBARU

Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant is

diluted with another brand or

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

11-10

(405,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

type, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixing

coolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-

nections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling

fan which is thermostatically controlled to

operate when the engine coolant reaches

a specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operate

even when the coolant temperature high

warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,

the cooling fan circuit may be defective.

Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-

tor light/Coolant temperature high warning

light” F3-16.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.

Refer to “Fuses” F11-34 and “Fuse panel

located in the engine compartment” F12-

12.

If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling

system checked by your SUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,

there may be a leak in the engine cooling

system. It is recommended that the cooling

system and connections be checked for

leaks, damage, or looseness.

& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radiator

cap until the engine has been shut

off and has cooled down completely.

Since the coolant is under pressure,

you may suffer serious burns from a

spray of boiling hot coolant when

the cap is removed.

1) “FULL” level mark

2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.

1. Check the coolant level on the outside

of the reservoir while the engine is cool.

2. If the level is close to or lower than the

“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the

“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is

empty, remove the radiator cap and refill

coolant up to just below the filler neck as

shown in the following illustration.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Cooling system

11-11

(406,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Fill up to this level

3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that

the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap

are in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill engine

coolant when adding it. If coolant

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If engine coolant gets on

the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe

it off.

. Do not splash the engine coolant

over painted parts. The alcohol

contained in the engine coolant

may damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant.

Have the coolant changed by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with the

air cleaner element removed. The air

cleaner element not only filters in-

take air but also stops flames if the

engine backfires. If the air cleaner

element is not installed when the

engine backfires, you could be

burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment, use a genuine SUBARU air

cleaner element. If it is not used,

there is the possibility of causing a

negative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filter

screen. When the element is perforated or

removed, engine wear will be excessive

and engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the air

cleaner element.

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

11-12

(407,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Replacing the air cleaner ele-

ment

Replace the air cleaner element according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Under

extremely dusty conditions, replace it

more frequently. It is recommended that

you always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1) Clip

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case (rear).

2. Open the air cleaner case and pull the

cover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.

4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case

(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and

install a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),

insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air

cleaner case (front).

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE

Install the air cleaner element so that

the surface with “UPR” printed on it

faces upward.

Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element

11-13

(408,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the spark

plugs. It is recommended that you have the

spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer.

The spark plu gs should be replaced

according to the maintenance schedule

in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-

let”.

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced in

the correct order.

& Recommended spark plugs

For the recommended spark plugs, refer to

“Electrical system” F12-8.

Drive belts

It is unnecessary to check the deflection of

the drive belt periodically because your

engine is equipped with an automatic belt

tension adjuster. However, replacement of

the belt should be done according to the

maintenance schedule in the “Warranty

and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your

SUBARU dealer for replacement.

If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,

contact your SUBARU dealer.

Manual transmission oil

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion oil level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

oil inspection should be performed accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule in the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual transmission, front differential

and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.

Maintenance and service/Spark plugs

11-14

(409,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid

It is not necessary to check the transmis-

sion fluid level. Check that there are no

cracks, damage or leakage. However, the

fluid inspection should be performed ac-

cording to the maintenance schedule in

the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Front differential gear oil

(CVT models) and rear differ-

ential gear oil

It is not necessary to check the gear oil

level. Check that there are no cracks,

damage or leakage. However, the oil

inspection should be performed according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult

your SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade and

viscosity

Each oil manufacturer has its own base

oils and additives. Never use different

brands together. For details, refer to

“Manual transmission, front differential

and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil other

than the specified oil may cause a

decline in vehicle performance.

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact your

eyes because brake fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If brake

fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-

ately flush them thoroughly with

clean water. For safety, when

performing this work, wearing

eye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause a dangerous loss

of braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-

ful not to allow any dirt into the

reservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid

11-15

(410,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Alcohol contained in the brake

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluid

when adding it. I f brake fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If brake fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

A) The brake fluid level must be checked in

this area.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level

for the brake system at the shaded area in

the illustration. For MT models, this

reservoir is used for both the brake and

clutch systems and has chambers for each

system.

If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the

recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use

only brake fluid from a sealed container.

& Recommended brake fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brake

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Clutch fluid (MT models)

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Never let clutch fluid contact your

eyes because clutch fluid can be

harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid

gets in your eyes, immediately flush

them thoroughly with clean water.

For safety, when performing this

work, wearing eye protecti on is

advisable.

CAUTION

. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture

from the air. Any absorbed moist-

ure can cause improper clutch

operation.

. If the vehicle requires frequent

refilling, there may be a leak. If

you suspect a problem, have the

vehicle checked at your SUBARU

dealer.

. When clutch fluid is added, be

careful not to allow any dirt into

the tank.

. Never splash the clutch fluid over

painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)

11-16

(411,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Alcohol contained in the clutch

fluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid

when adding it. If clutch fluid

touches the exhaust pipe, it may

cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or

a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the

exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it

off.

. The fluid level for the clutch

system must be checked at the

inboard side of the reservoir. It

cannot be checked at the out-

board side of the reservoir.

1) “MAX” level line

2) “MIN” level line

A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in

this area.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of the

reservoir. Because this reservoir is used

for both the brake and clutch systems and

has chambers for each system, be sure to

check the fluid level for the clutch system

at the shaded area in the illustration.If

the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the

recommended clutch fluid to “MAX”.

Use only clutch fluid from a sealed contain-

er.

& Recommended clutch fluid

Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of clutch

fluid together. Also, avoid mixing

DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if

they are the same brand.

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate as

described in the following, have it checked

by your SUBARU dealer.

1. With the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position, depress the brake pedal

several times, applying the same pedal

force each time. The distance the pedal

travels should not vary.

2. With the brake pedal depressed, start

the engine. The pedal should move slightly

down to the floor.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop

the engine and keep the pedal depressed

for 30 seconds. The pedal height should

not change.

4. Start the engine again and run for

approximately one minute then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times to

check the bra ke booster. The brake

booster operates properly if the pedal

stroke decreases with each depression.

Maintenance and service/Brake booster

11-17

(412,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play and

reserve distance according to the main-

tenance schedule in the “Warranty and

Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedal free

play

1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF ” position and firmly depress the

brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the

brake pedal up with one finger to check the

free play with a force of less than 2 lbf (10

N, 1 kgf).

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

& Checking the brake pedal re-

serve distance

1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-

mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure

the distance between the upper surface of

the pedal pad and the floor.

When the measurement is smaller than

the specification, or when the pedal does

not operate smoothly, contact with your

SUBARU dealer.

Clutch pedal (MT models)

Check the clutch pedal free play according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the clutch function

Check the clutch engagement and disen-

gagement.

1. With the engine idling, check that there

are no abnormal noises when the clutch

pedal is depressed, and that shifting into

1st or reverse feels smooth.

2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal

slowly to check that the engine and

transmission smoothly couple without

any sign of slippage.

Maintenance and service/Brake pedal

11-18

(413,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Checking the clutch pedal

free play

1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)

Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with

your finger until you feel resistance, and

check the free play.

If the free play is not within proper

specification, contact your SUBARU deal-

er.

Hill start assist system

Ensure that the Hill start assist system

operates properly under the following

circumstances.

1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by

depressing the brake pedal (all models)

and clutch pedal (MT models only), with

the engine running.

2. Make sure that the vehicle does not

move backward for several seconds after

the brake pedal is released.

3. Then make sure the vehicle starts

climbing the grade by following the normal

starting procedures.

If the Hill start assist system does not

operate as described above, contact your

SUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake pad

and lining

The disc brakes have audible wear in-

dicators on the brake pads. If the brake

pads wear close to their service limit, the

wear indicator makes a very audible

scraping noise when the brake pedal is

applied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time

you apply the brake pedal, have the brake

pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as

soon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite the

scraping noise from the audible

brake pad wear indicator, it will

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Hill start assist system

11-19

(414,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

result in the need for costly brake

rotor repair or replacement.

& Breaking-in of new brake

pads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,

use only genuine SUBARU parts. After

replacement, the new parts must be

broken in as follows.

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph

(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal

lightly. Repeat this five or more times.

! Parking brake lining

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of approxi-

mately 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button

pushed in, pull the parking brake lever

SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a

force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,

15.3 kgf]).

3. Drive the vehicle for approximately 220

yards (200 meters) in this condition.

4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking

brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-

dure.

5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the

parking brake stroke is out of the specified

range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut

located on the parking brake lever.

Parking brake stroke:

7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)

WARNING

A safe location and situation should

be selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pulling the parking brake lever too

forcefully may cause the rear wheels

to lock. To avoid this, be certain to

pull the lever up slowly and gently.

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according

to the maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. When

the parking brake is properly adjusted,

braking power is fully applied by pulling the

lever up 7 to 8 notches gently but firmly

(approximately 45 lbf [200 N, 20.4 kgf]). If

the parking brake lever stroke is not within

the specified range, have the brake sys-

tem checked and adjusted at your

SUBARU dealer.

Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke

11-20

(415,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Tires and wheels

& Types of tires

You should be familiar with type of tires

present on your vehicle.

! All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide an

adequate measure of traction, handling

and braking performance in year-round

driving includin g snowy and icy roa d

conditions. However all season tires do

not offer as much traction performance as

winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow

or on icy roads.

All season tires are identified by “ALL

SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on

the tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capability

tires best suited for highway driving under

dry conditions.

Summer tires are inadequate for driving on

slippery roads such as on snow-covered or

icy roads.

If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered

or icy roads, we strongly recommend the

use of winter (snow) tires.

When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on

snow-covered and icy roads. However

winter tires do not perform as well as

summer tires and all season tires on roads

other than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) (if equipped)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-

vides the driver with a warning message by

sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel when tire pressure

is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-

ing system will activate only when the

vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not

react immediately to a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a blow-out caused

by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm

garage and will then drive the vehicle in

cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire

pressures may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. To avoid this

problem when adjusting the tire pressures

in a warm garage, inflate the tires to

pressures higher than those shown on

the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them

by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm

) for

every difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and the

temperature outside. By way of example,

the following table shows the required tire

pressures that correspond to various out-

side temperatures when the temperature

in the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Example:

Tire size: P225/60R17 98H and

P225/55R18 97H

Standard tire pressures:

Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outside

temperature

Adjusted pressure

[psi (kPa, kgf/cm

)]

Front Rear

308F(−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C)

(265, 2.65)

(255, 2.55)

−108F(−238C) 40 (280, 2.8)

39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates when you drive the vehicle in

cold outside air after adjusting the tire

pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the

tire pressures using the method described

above. Then, increase the vehicle speed

to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to

see that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire

pressure warning light does not turn off,

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-21

(416,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the tire pressure monitoring system may

not be functioning normally. In this event,

gotoaSUBARUdealertohavethe

system inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-

tween tires and the road surface causes

the tires to warm up. After illumination of

the low tire pressure warning light, any

increase in the tire pressures caused by an

increase in the outside air temperature or

by an increase in the temperature in the

tires can cause the low tire pressure

warning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when the

wheels are changed (for example, a switch

to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are

installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have

this work performed by a SUBARU dealer

following wheel replacement.

It may not be possible to install TPMS

valves on certain wheels that are on the

market. Therefore, if you change the

wheels (for example, a switch to snow

tires), use wheels that have the same part

number as the standard-equipment

wheels. Without four operational TPMS

valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS

will not fully function and the warning light

on the combination meter will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approximately

one minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments are

necessary to ensure continued normal

operation of the tire pressure monitoring

system. As with wheel replacement, there-

fore, you should have the work performed

by a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not illuminate briefly after the

ignition switch is turned ON or the

light illuminates steadily after blink-

ing for approximately one minute,

you should have your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System che cked at a

SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,

never brake suddenly and keep

driving straight ahead while gradu-

ally reducing speed. Then slowly

pull off the road to a safe place.

Otherwise an accident involving

serious vehicle damage and serious

personal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may have significan t

damage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel rim is replaced without the

original pressure sensor/transmitter

being transferred, the low tire pres-

sure warning light will illuminate

steadily after blinking for approxi-

mately one minute. This indicates

the TPMS is unable to monitor all

four road wheels. Contact your

SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

for tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the light

illuminates steadily after blinking

for approximately one minute,

promptly contact a SUBARU dealer

to have the system inspected.

& Tire inspection

Check on a daily basis that the tires are

free from serious damage, nails, and

stones. At the same time, check the tires

for abnormal wear.

Contact your SUBARU dealer immediately

if you find any problem.

NOTE

. When the wheels and tires strike

curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-

ment as when the vehicle is driven on a

rough surface, they can suffer damage

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-22

(417,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

that cannot be seen with the naked eye.

This type of damage does not become

evident until time has passed. Try not to

drive over curbs, potholes or on other

rough surfaces. If doing so is unavoid-

able, keep the vehicle’s speed down to

a walking pace or less, and approach

the curbs as squarely as possible. Also,

make sure the tires are not pressed

against the curb when you park the

vehicle.

. If you feel unusual vibration while

driving or find it difficult to steer the

vehicle in a straight line, one of the tires

and/or wheels may be damaged. Drive

slowly to the nearest authorized

SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle

inspected.

& Tire pressures and wear

Maintaining the correct tire pressures

helps to maximize the tires’ service lives

and is essential for good running perfor-

mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust

the pressure of each tire (including the

spare - if equipped) at least once a month

(for example, during a fuel stop) and

before any long journey.

Tire placard

Check the tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the

tire pressures to the values shown on the

tire placard. The tire placard is located on

the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms up

the tires and increases the tire pressures.

Also, the tire pressures are affected by the

outside temperature. It is best to check tire

pressure outdoors before driving the ve-

hicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air inside it

expands, causing the tire pressure to

increase. Be careful not to mistakenly

release air from a warm tire to reduce its

pressure.

NOTE

. The air pressure in a tire increases

by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3

kgf/cm

) when the tire becomes warm.

. The tires are considered cold when

the vehicle has been parked for at least

three hours or has been driven less

than one mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires to

adjust pressure. Doing so will result

in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-

trollability and ride comfort, and they cause

the tires to wear abnormally.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-23

(418,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Correct tire pressure (tread worn evenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering is

responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so

fuel consumption is also lower.

2) Under inflated tire (tread worn on

shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-

sumption is also higher.

3) Over inflated (tread worn in the center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire

magnifies the effects of road-surface

bumps and dips, possibly resulting in

vehicle damage.

If the tire placard shows tire pressures for

the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the

tire pressures to the values that match the

loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to deform severely and to

rapidly heat up. A sharp increase in

temperature could cause tread se-

paration, and destruction of the

tires. The resulting loss of vehicle

control could lead to an accident.

& Wheel balance

Each wheel was correctly balanced when

your vehicle was new, but the wheels will

become unbalanced as the tires become

worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes

the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at

certain vehicle speeds and detracts from

the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can

also cause steering and suspension sys-

tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If

you suspect that the wheels are not

correctly balanced, have them checked

and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.

Also have them adjusted after tire repairs

and after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignment

causes the tires to wear on one side

and reduces the vehicle’s running

stability. Contact your SUBARU

dealer if you notice abnormal tire

wear.

NOTE

The suspension system is designed to

hold each wheel at a certain alignment

(relative to the other wheels and to the

road) for optimum straight-line stability

and cornering performance.

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-24

(419,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Wear indicators

1) New tread

2) Worn tread

3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wear in-

dicator, which becomes visible when the

depth of the tread grooves decreases to

0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be replaced

when the tread wear indicator appears as

a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicator

becomes visible, the tire is worn

beyond the acceptable limit and

must be replaced immediately. With

a tire in this condition, driving at

high speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane. The

resulting loss of vehicle control can

lead to an accident.

NOTE

For safety, inspect tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their tread

wear indicators become visible.

& Rotational direction of tires

Example of rotational direction marked on

the sidewall

1) Front

If the tires have specific rotational direc-

tion, refer to the arrow marked on the side

wall.

The arrow should be pointing forward

direction when the wheels are fitted.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-

tional tires

1) Front

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-25

(420,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional

tires

1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.

Move the tires to the positions shown in the

illustration each time they are rotated. For

the tire rota tion schedule , refer to the

“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenly worn

tires at the time of rotation. After tire

rotation, adjust the tires pressures and

make sure the wheel nuts are correctly

tightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles

(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again

and retighten any nut that has become

loose.

For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloy

wheels” F11-27.

& Tire replacement

The wheels and tires are important and

integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they

cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires

fitted as standard equipment are optimally

matched to the characteristi cs of the

vehicle and were selected to give the best

possible combination of running perfor-

mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is

essential for every tire to have a size and

construction matching those shown on the

tire placard and to have a speed symbol

and load index matching those shown on

the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detracts

from controllability, ride comfort, braking

performance, speedometer accuracy and

odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-

rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-

priately changes the vehicle’s ground

clearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms of

manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-

struction, and size. You are advised to

replace the tires with new ones that are

identical to those fitted as standard equip-

ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU

recommends replacing all four tires at the

same time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installing tire

(s), all four tires must be the same

for following items.

(a) Size

(b) Circumference

(d) Load index

(e) Construction

(f) Manufacturer

(g) Brand (tread pattern)

(h) Degrees of wear

For the items (a) to (d), you must

obey the specification that is

printed on the tire placard. The

tire placard is located on the

driver’s door pillar.

If all of four tires are not the same

for items (a) to (h), serious me-

chanical damage could occur to

the drive train of your car, and

affect the following.

— Ride

— Handling

— Braking

Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels

11-26

(421,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

— Speedometer/Odometer

calibration

— Clearance between the body

and tires

It also may be dangerous and

lead to loss of vehicle control,

and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not use

radial tires together with belted

bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.

Doing so can dangerously re-

duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacement

When replacing wheels due, for example,

to damage, make sure the replacement

wheels match the specifications of the

wheels that are fitted as standard equip-

ment. Replacement wheels are available

from SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that are

specified for your vehicle. Wheels

not meeting specifications could

interfere with brake caliper opera-

tion and may cause the tires to rub

against the wheel well housing dur-

ing turns. The resultin g loss of

vehicle control coul d lead to an

accident.

NOTE

When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or for any

other reason, always check the tight-

ness of the wheel nuts after driving

approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If

any nut is loose, tighten it to the

specified torque.

Alloy wheels

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-

maged easily. Handle them carefully to

maintain their appearance, performance,

and safety.

. When any of the wheels are removed

and replaced for tire rotation or to change a

flat tire, always check the tightness of the

wheel nuts after driving approximately 600

miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,

tighten it to the specified torque.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,

wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the

wheel.

. Never let the wheel rub against sharp

protrusions or curbs.

. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or

the center cap is replaced, be sure to

replace them with genuine SUBARU parts

designed for alloy wheels.

. When stacking and storing removed

tires, place shock-absorbing material be-

tween the tires to protect the wheels from

becoming scratched.

Maintenance and service/Alloy wheels

11-27

(422,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Windshield washer fluid

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type A)

Windshield washer fluid warning light

(type B)

When there is only a small amount of

washer fluid re maining, the windshield

washer fluid warning light will illuminate.

When this occurs, refill the washer fluid.

& Adding the windshield

washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washer

fluid because it could cause paint

damage.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, then

add windshield washer fluid.

& Windshield washer fluid

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield

washer fluid is unavailable use clean

water.

In areas where water freezes in winter, use

an anti-freeze type windshield washer

fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid

contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%

surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-

perature varies according to how much it is

diluted, as indicated in the following table.

Washer Fluid

Concentration

Freezing

Temperature

30%

10.48F(−128C)

50% −48F(−208C)

100% −498F(−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,

check the freezing temperatures in the

table above when adjusting the fluid

concentration to the outside temperature.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with

a different concentr ation from the one

used previously, purge the old fluid from

the piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washer

for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if

the concentration of the fluid remaining in

the piping is too low for the outside

temperature, it may freeze and block the

Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid

11-28

(423,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

nozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-

tration appropriately for the out-

side temperature. If the concen-

tration is inappropriate, sprayed

washer fluid may freeze on the

windshield and obstruct you r

view, and the fluid may freeze in

the reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations on

volatile organic compounds may

restrict the use of methanol, a

common windshield washer anti-

freeze additive. Washer fluids

containing non-methanol anti-

freeze agents should be used

only if they provide cold weather

protection without damaging

your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other material on

the windshield or the wiper blade results in

jerky wiper operation and streaking on the

glass. If you cannot remove the streaks

after operating the windshield washer or if

the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer

surface of the windshield (or rear window)

and the wiper blades using a sponge or

soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-

abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the

windshield and wiper blades with clean

water. The windshield is clean if beads do

not form when you rinse the windshield

with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper blades

with gasoline or a solvent, such

as paint thinner or benzine. This

will cause deterioration of the

wiper blades.

. While removing the wiper blades

from the wiper arms, do not

return the wiper arms to the

original positions. Otherwise,

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

. When returning the raised wiper

arms to the original positions,

carefully return the wiper arms on

the winds hield by hand. You

should not return the wiper arms

to the windshield only by the

return spring. Otherwise, the wi-

per arms may be deformed and/or

the windshield surface may be

scratched.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking even

after following this method, replace the

wiper blades using the following proce-

dures.

& Windshield wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

11-29

(424,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacing

the wiper blade. Holding the wiper

blade, may result in blade deforma-

tion.

1) Lock knob

2. Hold the wiper blade connection by

hand, push the lock knob to release the

lock, and then pull out the wiper blade

assembly.

NOTE

Do not use a hard object to push the

lock knob. The lock knob may be

scratched.

3. When installing the wiper blade as-

sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-

tion part and then slide it in the opposite

direction of removal to install. After instal-

ling the wiper blade assembly, check that

the connection part is locked completely.

4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

& Window wiper blade rubber

Replace the wiper blade rubber according

to the following procedure.

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber until the slit

on the underside of the wiper blade is in

the removal position, as shown in the

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

11-30

(425,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

illustration, so that it can be removed.

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubber

through the slit to remove it.

3. To install a new wiper blade rubber,

perform the removal procedure in the

reverse order. After installation, check that

the tip of the wiper rubber has reached the

end of the cap.

NOTE

It may be difficult to perform the wiper

blade rubber replacement. We recom-

mend that you contact your SUBARU

dealer for wiper blade rubber replace-

ment if necessary.

& Rear window wiper blade as-

sembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear

window.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-

terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

11-31

(426,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Rear window wiper blade

rubber

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber

assembly to u nlock it from the plastic

support.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of

the plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not provided

with two metal spines, remove the metal

spines from the old blade rubber and install

them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the b lade rubber

assembly, then slide the blade rubber

assembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support

Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades

11-32

(427,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,

the wiper may scratch the rear window

glass.

5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the

wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.

6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly

lower it in position.

Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or near

any battery, be sure to extinguish

all cigarettes, matches, and light-

ers. Never expose a battery to an

open flam e or elec tric sparks.

Batteries give off a gas which is

highly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosion

does occur, wear eye protection

or shield your eyes when working

near any battery. Never lean over

a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contact

eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-

cause battery fluid is a corrosive

acid. If battery fluid gets on your

skin or in your eyes, immediately

flush the area with water thor-

oughly. Seek medical help imme-

diately if acid has entered the

eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentally

swallowed, immediately drink a

large amount of milk or water,

and seek medical attention im-

mediately.

. Tolessentheriskofsparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,

and other metal jewelry. Never

allow metal tools to contact the

positive battery terminal and any-

thing connected to it WHILE you

are at the same time in contact

with any other metallic portion of

the vehicle because a short cir-

cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including children

away from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-

ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead

and lead compounds, chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and reproductive

harm. Batte ries also contain

other chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer.

Wash hands after handling

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Battery

11-33

(428,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Cap

2) Upper level

3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check the

battery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.

However, if the battery fluid level is below

the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the

upper level with distilled water.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 amperes

when charging the battery because

it will shorten battery life.

Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher rating or with material other

than a fuse because serious damage

or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring

harness and electrical equipment. The

fuses are located in two fuse boxes.

One is located under the instrument panel

behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s

seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1) Spare fuses

The other one (main fuse box) is housed in

the engine compartment. Also, the spare

fuses are stored in the fuse box cover.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse

box in the engine compartment.

Maintenance and service/Fuses

11-34

(429,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Pinch the upper part of the fuse puller

when removing it from the main fuse box.

1) Good

2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electrical

controls do not operate, inspect the corre-

sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace

it.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/

“OFF” position and turn off all electrical

accessories.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown.

Look at the back side of each fuse box

cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”

F12-10.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,

replace it with a spare fuse of the same

rating.

6. If the same fuse blows a gain, this

indicates that its system has a problem.

Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealer

before installing fog lights or any other

electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such

accessories may cause the electronic

system to malfunction if they are incor-

rectly installed or if they are not suited for

the vehicle.

Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories

11-35

(430,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire. For the specified

wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb

chart” F12-14.

NOTE

For models with type B combination

meter, if SRH is malfunctioning, the

SRH OFF indicator appears on the

combination meter when the ignition

switch is in the “ON” posi tion. It

indicates that SRH has been deacti-

vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for an

inspection.

& Headlights (models with LED

headlights)

LED headlight warning light (type B)

The LED headlight warning light illumi-

nates if the LED headlights malfunction.

Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU

dealer as soon as possible.

& Headlights (models with ha-

logen headlights)

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs become

very hot while in use. If you touch

the bulb surface with bare hands or

greasy gloves, fingerprints or

grease on the bulb surface will

develop into hot spots, causing the

bulb to break. If there are finger

prints or grease on the bulb surface,

wipe them away with a soft cloth

moistened with alcohol.

NOTE

. If headlight aiming is required, con-

sult your SUBARU dealer for proper

adjustment of the headlight aim.

. It may be difficult to replace the

bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Perform the following steps to replace the

bulbs.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-36

(431,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on

the air intake duct, then remove the air

intake duct.

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the

secured clip of the washer tank. To make

it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of

the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

1) Low beam bulb

2) High beam bulb

3. Disconnect the electric al connect or

from the bulb and remove the bulb from

the headlight assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this

time, use c are not to touch t he bulb

surface.

5. To install the bulb to the headlight

assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.

7. Install the air intake duct with clips

(right-hand side).

8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to the

original place and secure it by clip (left-

hand side).

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-37

(432,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Front turn signal light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

& Parking light

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

& Front fog light (if equipped)

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU

dealer if necessary.

& Rear combination lights

1. Remove the covers.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove

the upper and lower screws that secure the

rear combination light assembly.

3. Slide the rear combination light as-

sembly rearward and remove it from the

vehicle.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-38

(433,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

1) Tail light

2) Rear side marker light

3) Rear turn signal light

4. Remove the bulb socket from the rear

combination light assembly by turning it

counterclockwise.

5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

6. Set the bulb socket into the rear

combination light assembly and turn it

clockwise until it locks.

1) Guide pins

2) Catch

3) Clip

7. Put the rear combination light assem-

bly into place while aligning the 2 guide

pins and a catch with the guide holes and a

clip on the vehicle.

8. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

9. Reinstall the covers.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-39

(434,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Backup light

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the

light cover as shown in the illustration, and

pry the light cover off from the rear gate

trim.

2. For left side light, turn the bulb socket

clockwise and remove it.

For right side light, turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and

replace it with a new one.

4. Install the bulb socket by turning it

clockwise.

5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& License plate light

1. The license plate lights must be

pushed outwards, and then pulled out to

be removed.

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-40

(435,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the

license plate light cover.

& Map light

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Vanity mirror light (if

equipped)

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause

burns since the bulb may be very

hot. Have the bulb replaced by your

SUBARU dealer.

& Dome light and cargo area

light

Dome light

Cargo area light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs

11-41

(436,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall the lens.

& Other bulbs

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.

Have the bulbs replaced by your

SUBARU dealer if necessary.

Replacing key battery

The access key fob/transmitter battery

may be discharged under the following

conditions.

. The operation of the keyless access

function is unstable

. The operating distance of the remote

keyless entry system is unstable

. The transmitter does not operate prop-

erly when used within the standard dis-

tance

Replace the battery with a new one.

& Safety precautions

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get on

or in the access key fob/transmit-

ter when replacing battery.

. Before replacing the battery, re-

move any static electricity.

. Be careful not to touch or damage

the printed circuit board in the

access key fob/transmitter when

replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-

moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the

same or equivalent type of the

battery.

. Batteries should not be exposed

to excessive heat such as bright

sunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE

. Replace only with the same or

equivalent type of battery recom-

mended by the manufacturer.

. Dispose of used batteries according

to local laws.

. Mount the battery in the correct

orientation to prevent fluid leakage.

Be careful not to bend the terminals. It

may result in a malfunction.

. It is recommended that the battery

be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.

. Use a new battery.

. After replacing the battery, confirm

that the transmitter functions properly.

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery

11-42

(437,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Replacing battery of access

key fob

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling the

access key fob cover, make sure that

the plastic part does not come off or

become misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032

1) Release button

2) Emergency key

1. Take out the emergency key.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to

remove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-head

screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)

side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fob

by fitting the projections and recesses

together.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery

11-43

(438,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Replacing transmitter battery

Battery: Button battery CR1620 or

equivalent

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl

tape or a cloth. Open the key head using a

flat-head screwdriver.

2. Remove the transmitter case from the

key head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasing

the hooks.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a new

battery making sure to install the new

battery with the negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by

fitting the hooks on the case.

6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the

key head.

7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery

11-44

(441,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Specifications........................................................ 12-2

Dimensions...........................................................12-2

Engine ..................................................................12-3

Fuel ......................................................................12-3

Engine oil .............................................................12-4

Manual transmission, front differential and rear

differential gear oil..............................................12-6

Fluids ...................................................................12-7

Engine coolant...................................................... 12-7

Electrical system ..................................................12-8

Tires ..................................................................... 12-8

Temporary spare tires ...........................................12-9

Brake disc ............................................................12-9

Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-10

Fuse panel located in the passenger

compartment ................................................... 12-10

Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 12-12

Bulb chart............................................................ 12-14

Safety precautions.............................................. 12-14

Bulb chart .......................................................... 12-15

Vehicle identification .......................................... 12-18

Specifications

(442,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensions

in (mm)

Item

Overall length 175.8 (4,465)

Overall width 71.0 (1,800)

Overall height 63.6 (1,615)

Wheel base 104.9 (2,665)

Tread

Front 61.0 (1,550)

Rear 61.2 (1,555)

Ground clearance*

8.7 (220)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty

Specifications/Specifications

12-2

(443,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Engine

Engine model

FB20

(2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 121.7 (1,995)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0)

Compression ratio 12.5 : 1

Firing order

1 – 3 – 2 – 4

& Fuel

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “

Fuel” F7-3.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications/Specifications

12-3

(444,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.

NOTE

The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended

that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

Specifications/Specifications

12-4

(445,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE

Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the

temperature and other factors.

Oil grade

SAE viscosity No. and

applicable temperature

Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-

tute) classification SN with the

words “RESOURCE CONSER-

VING”

ILSAC (International Lubricant

Specification Advisory Commit-

tee) GF-5, which can be identi-

fied with the ILSAC certification

mark (Starburst mark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil

for optimum engine performance and

protection. Conventional oil may be

used if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,

5W-30 conventional oil may be used if

replenishment is needed but should be

changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil at the

next oil change.

– Adding the oil from low level to

full level:

1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:

4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)

– CONTINUED –

Specifications/Specifications

12-5

(446,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil Manual transmission oil

Front differential gear oil

(CVT models)

Rear differential gear

oil (CVT models)

Rear differential gear oil (MT models)

Oil grade

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification

GL-5 (75W-90)*

. SUBARU Extra MT*

. API classification GL-5

(75W-90)

API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity

No. and ap-

plicable tem-

perature

—

. 75W-90*

. 90

*: Recommended

Oil capacity*

3.5 US qt (3.3 liters, 2.9

Imp qt)

1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1

Imp qt)

0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)

Remarks*

“Manual transmission oil”

F11-14

“Front differential gear oil (CVT models) and rear differential gear oil” F11-15

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.

*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.

Specifications/Specifications

12-6

(447,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Fluids

Fluid

Fluid type*

Fluid capacity*

Remarks*

Continuously variable transmission

fluid (CVT models)

Consult your SUBARU dealer. 11.3 US qt (10.7 liters, 9.4 Imp qt)

“

Continuously variable transmis-

sion fluid” F11-15

Brake fluid

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid

–“

Brake fluid” F11-15

Clutch fluid (MT models)

FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake

fluid

–

“

Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-16

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.

*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.

*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type

MT models 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

SUBARU Super Coolant

CVT models

8.2 US qt (7.8 liters, 6.9 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “

Cooling system” F11-10.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications/Specifications

12-7

(448,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Electrical system

Battery type

75D23L

Alternator 12V-130A

Spark plugs

DILKAR7B8 (NGK)

& Tires

Tire size P225/60R17 98H 225/55R18 98H

Wheel size

17 6 7J 186 7J

Pressure Front

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

)

Rear

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

)

Wheel nut tightening torque

89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts

by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,

refer to “

Changing a flat tire” F9-5.

Specifications/Specifications

12-8

(449,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Temporary spare tires

U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models Other models

Temporary spare tire size T145/80 D17 185/65 R17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure

(recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

)

42 psi (290 kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm

)

& Brake disc

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult your

SUBARU dealer.

Specifications/Specifications

12-9

(450,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 Empty

2 20A CIGAR SEAT/H

3 7.5A

IG A-1

4 15A

AUDIO NAVI

5 15A

IG B-2

6 Empty

7 15A

12V SOCKET

8 15A

A/C IG

9 7.5A

ACC

10 7.5A

IG B-1

11 Empty

12 Empty

13 7.5A

IG A-3

14 7.5A

UNIT +B

15 7.5A METER IG

16 Empty

17 7.5A

MIRROR

18 7.5A

LAMP IG

19 10A

IG A-2

20 10A

SRS AIR BAG

21 Empty

22 15A

STRG/H

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

12-10

(451,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

23 10A

DRL

24 Empty

25 Empty

26 10A

BACK UP

27 Empty

28 20A

TRAIL R.FOG

29 Empty

30 Empty

31 Empty

32 7.5A

ILLUMI

33 7.5A

KEY SW A

34 Empty

35 Empty

36 7.5A

KEY SW B

37 7.5A

STOP

38 7.5A

EYE SIGHT

– CONTINUED –

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

12-11

(452,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment

A) Main fuse

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

1 7.5A

HORN 2

2 7.5A

HORN 1

3 15A

H/L LO RH

15A H/L LO LH

7.5A ACTGS

6 10A

H/L HI RH

7 10A

H/L HI LH

8 10A

TAIL

9 10A

ODS

10 7.5A

OBD

11 7.5A

PU B/UP

12 30A

JB-B

13 15A

HAZARD

14 20A

FUEL

15 7.5A

D-OP+B

16 10A

MB-B

17 15A

D/L

18 10A

DCM

19 20A

TCU

20 7.5A

CVT SSR

21 15A

IG COIL

22 10A

AVCS

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

12-12

(453,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fuse

panel

Fuse

rating

Circuit

23 10A

E/G2

24 Empty

25 Empty

26 20A

O2 HTR

27 15A

E/G1

28 Empty

29 30A

BACKUP

30 25A

R. DEF

31 20A

AUDIO

32 30A

VDC SOL

33 25A

MAIN FAN

34 25A

SUB FAN

35 10A

DEICER

36 15A

F. FOG

37 15A

BLOWER

38 15A

BLOWER

39 Empty

40 30A

F. WIPER

41 15A

F. WASH

42 15A

R. WIPER

43 Empty

44 Empty

Specifications/Fuses and circuits

12-13

(454,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Bulb chart

& Safety precautions

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot while

illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,

turn off the lights and wait until the

bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is

a risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a new

bulb of the specified wattage. Using

a bulb of different wattage could

result in a fire.

Specifications/Bulb chart

12-14

(455,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Bulb chart

NOTE

Lights A, B, C, D and E are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications/Bulb chart

12-15

(456,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12V-60W HB3

Front turn signal light (models with LED headlight) 12V-8/28W 7444NA

2) Low beam headlight (models with halogen headlight) 12V-55W H11

3) Vanity mirror light (if equipped) 12V-2W –

Map light 12V-8W –

Dome light 12V-8W –

Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W

Parking light/Front turn signal light (models with halogen

headlight)/Front position light (models with halogen headlight)

12V-8/28W 7444NA

Front fog light (if equipped)

Models without steering responsive fog lights system 12V-19W H16

Models with steering responsive fog lights system 12V-55W H11

Cargo area light 12V-5W –

10)

Backup light 12V-21W W21W

11)

Rear side marker light

12V-5W W5W

12)

Tail light 12V-5W W5W

13)

Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W

14)

License plate light 12V-5W

W5W

Specifications/Bulb chart

12-16

(457,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Wattage Bulb No.

Low and high beam headlight (models with LED headlight) ––

Side turn signal light (if equipped) ––

Front position light (models with LED headlight)/Daytime

running light (models with LED headlight)

––

High-mounted stop light ––

Stop light –

–

Specifications/Bulb chart

12-17

(458,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Vehicle identification

1) Vehicle identification number (under the

floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)

2) Emission control label

3) Tire inflation pressure label

4) Certification label

5) Vehicle identification number plate

6) Model number label

7) Fuel label

8) Air conditioner label

Specifications/Vehicle identification

12-18

(461,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

For U.S.A. .............................................................. 13-2

Tire information..................................................... 13-2

Tire labeling.......................................................... 13-2

Recommended tire inflation pressure ....................13-4

Glossary of tire terminology..................................13-5

Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ...... 13-10

Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle

load capacities.................................................. 13-10

Adverse safety consequences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on tires ................... 13-10

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 13-11

Vehicle load limit – how to determine ...............13-11

Calculating total and load capacities varying

seating configurations ..................................... 13-12

Uniform tire quality grading standards............. 13-14

Treadwear........................................................... 13-15

Traction AA, A, B, C............................................ 13-15

Temperature A, B, C ........................................... 13-15

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ...................... 13-16

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(462,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

For U.S.A.

The following information has been

compiled according to Code of

Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part

575”.

Tire information

& Tire labeling

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire

Identification Number or TIN) are

placed on the sidewall of a tire by

tire manufacturers. These markings

can provide you with useful infor-

mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped with

P-Metric tire size. It is important to

understand the sizing syste m in

selecting the proper tire for your

vehicles. Here is a brief review of

the tire sizing system with a break-

down of its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, Section

Width is measured in millimeters.

To convert millimeters into inches,

divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio

(Section Height divided by Section

Width) helps provide more dimen-

sional information about the tire

size.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used on

light duty vehicles such as passen-

ger cars

(2) Section Width in millimeters

(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height

7 section width).

(4) R = Radial Construction

(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating De-

scriptions

The load and speed rating descrip-

tions will appear following the size

designation.

They provide two important facts

about the tire. First, the number

designation is its load index. Sec-

ond, the letter designation indicates

the tire’s speed rating.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.

13-2

(463,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical code

which specifies the maximum load

a tire can carry at the speed

indicated by its speed symbol, at

maximum inflation pressure.

For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs

(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580

kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to the

tire, not to the vehicle. Putting

a load rated tire on any vehicle

does not mean the vehicle can

be loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical

system describing a tire’s capability

to travel at established and prede-

termined speeds.

For example, “V” means 149 mph

(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only to

the tire, not to the vehicle.

Putting a speed rated tire on

any vehicle does not mean

the vehicle can be operated

at the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void if

the tires are worn out, da-

maged, repaired, retreaded,

or otherwise altered from

their origin al condition. If

tires are repaired, re-

treaded, o r o therwise al-

tered, they may not be sui-

table for original equipment

tire designed loads and

speeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) is

marked on the intended outboard

sidewall. The TIN is composed of

four groups. Here is a brief review of

the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s Identification

Mark

(2) Tire Size

(3) Tire Type Code

(4) Date of Manufacture

The first two figures identify the

week, starting with “01” to represent

the first full week of the calendar

year; the second two figures repre-

sent the year. For example, 0101

means the 1st week of 2001.

! Other markings

The following makings are also

placed on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which this tire may be

inflated. For example, “300 kPa

(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

– CONTINUED –

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-3

(464,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximum

permissible weight load for this tire.

For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg

(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)

MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating applies

only to the tire, not to the

vehicle. Putting a load rated

tire on any vehicle does not

mean the vehicle can be

loaded up to the tire’s rated

load.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.

For example, “TUBELESS STEEL

BELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cord

material used in the plies (both

sidewall and tread area) of this tire.

For e xample, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-

WALL 2 POLYESTER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tire

quality grading standards” F13-14.

& Recommended tire inflation

pressure

! Recommended cold tire infla-

tion pressure

For recommended cold tire inflation

pressure for your vehicle’s tires,

refer to “

Tires” F12-8.

! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is attached to

the driver’s side door pillar.

Example:

The vehicle placard shows original

tire size, recommended cold tire

inflation pressure on each tire at

maximum loa ded vehicle weight,

seating capacity and loading infor-

mation.

! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-

sively low tire pressures can cause

the tires to flex severely and to

rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-4

(465,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

crease in temperature could cause

tread separation, and failure of the

tire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to an

accident.

! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-

flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust the

pressure of each tire (including the

spare) at least once a month and

before any long journey. Check the

tire pressures when the tires are

cold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to the

specific values. Driving even a short

distance warms up the tires and

increases the tire pressures. Also,

the tire pressures are affected by

the outside temperature. It is best to

check tire pressure outdoors before

driving the vehicle. When a tire

becomes warm, the air inside it

expands, causing the tire pressure

to increase. Be careful not to mis-

takenly release air from a warm tire

to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology

. Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of

those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmis-

sion, power steering, power brakes,

power windows, power seats, radio,

and heater, to the extent that these

items are available as factory-in-

stalled equipment (whether in-

stalled or not).

. Bead

The part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforced

by ply cords and that is shaped to fit

the rim.

. Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between

components in the bead.

. Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at alternate angles substantially

less than 90 degrees to the center-

line of the tread.

. Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and

sidewall rubber which, when in-

flated, bears the load.

. Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the

tread or sidewall.

. Cold tire pressure

The pressure in a tire that has been

driven less than 1 mile or has been

standing for three hours or more.

. Cord

The strands forming the plies in the

tire.

. Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent

rubber compounds.

. Cracking

Any parting within the tread, side-

wall, or inner liner of the tire

extending to cord material.

. Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with

standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil and

coolant, and if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight

optional engine.

– CONTINUED –

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-5

(466,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and higher inflation pressure

than the corresponding standard

tire.

. Groove

The space between two adjacent

tread ribs.

. Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside sur-

face of a tubeless tire that contains

the inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from

cord material in the carcass.

. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the

same molding on the other side-

wall of the tire, or

(2) The outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has a

particular side that must always

face outward when mounting on

a vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufac-

turer as primarily intended for use

on lightweight trucks or multipur-

pose passenger vehicles.

. Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is

rated to carry for a given inflation

pressure.

. Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the

maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

. Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.

. Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

physical dimension requirements.

. Normal occupant weight

150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of

occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section.

. Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehi-

cle as specified in the third column

of Table 1 that is appended to the

end of this section.

. Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread,

sidewall, or innerliner that extends

to cord material.

. Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated

new tire.

. Overall width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, including elevations

due to labeling, decorations, or

protective bands or ribs.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-6

(467,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passen-

ger cars, multipurpose passenger

vehicles, and trucks, that have a

gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.

. Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

. Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound

between adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rub-

ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or

other materials, that, when

mounted on an automotive wheel,

provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the

load.

. Production options weight

The combined weight of those

installed regular production options

weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in

excess of those standard items

which they replace, not previously

considered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy duty

brakes, rid e levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special trim.

. Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to

the centerline of the tread.

. Recommended inflation pres-

sure

The cold inflation pressure recom-

mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher

loads and at higher inflation pres-

sures than the corresponding stan-

dard tire.

. Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire

and tube assembly upon which the

tire beads are seated.

. Rim diameter

Nominal diameter of the bead seat.

. Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width.

. Rim type designation

The industry of manufacturer’s des-

ignation for a rim by style or code.

. Rim width

Nominal distance between rim

flanges.

. Section width

The linear distance between the

exteriors of the sidewalls of an

inflated tire, excluding elevations

due to labeling, decoration, or pro-

tective bands.

. Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the

tread and bead.

. Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound

from the cord material in the side-

wall.

. Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for

testing, and it may be any rim listed

as appropriate for use with that tire.

. Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

– CONTINUED –

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-7

(468,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

. Tread rib

A tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.

. Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the

tire carcass.

. Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal

grooves designed to give a visual

indication of the degrees of wear of

the tread.

. Vehicle capacity weight

The rated cargo and luggage load

plus 150 lbs (6 8 kg) times the

vehicle’s designated seating capa-

city.

. Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the maximum

loaded vehicle weight and dividing

by two.

. Vehicle normal load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-

cupant weight (distributed in accor-

dance with Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section) and

dividing by 2.

. Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel

and tire assembly securely during

testing.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-8

(469,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for

various designated seating capacities

Designated seating

capacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,

number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3

2 in front, 1 in second

seat.

11 through 15 5

2 in front, 1 in second

seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

16 through 22 7

2 in front, 2 in second

seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in

fourth seat.

– CONTINUED –

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-9

(470,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

& Tire care – maintenance and

safety practices

. Check on a daily basis that the

tires are free from serious damage,

nails, and stones. At the same time,

check the tires for abnormal wear.

. Inspect the tire tread regularly

and replace the tires before their

tread wear indicators become visi-

ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-

dicator becomes visible, the tire is

worn beyond the acceptable limit

and must be replaced immediately.

With a tire in this condition, driving

at even low speeds in wet weather

can cause the vehicle to hydro-

plane. Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control can lead to an

accident.

. To maximize the life of each tire

and ensure that the tires wear

uniformly, it is best to rotate the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

For information about the tire rota-

tion order, refer to “

Tire rotation”

F11-25.

Replace any damaged or

unevenly worn tires at the time of

rotation. After tire rotation, adjust

the tire pressures and make sure

the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-

tened. For information about the

tightening torque and tightening

sequence for the wheel nuts, refer

to “

Flat tires” F9-5.

& Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-

ties

The sum of four tires’ maximum

load ratings must exceed the max-

imum loaded vehicle weight

(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the

maximum load ratings of two front

tires and of two rear tires must

exceed each axle’smaximum

loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original

equipment tires are designed to

fulfill those conditions.

The maximum loaded vehicle

weight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And each

axle’s maximum loaded capacity is

referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-

ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on the

vehicle certification label located at

the bottom of driver’s side door

pillar.

The GVWR and fro nt and rear

GAWRs are determined by not only

the maximum load rating of tires but

also loaded capacities of the vehi-

cle’s suspension, axles and other

parts of the body.

Therefore, this means that the

vehicle cannot necessarily be

loaded up to the tire’s maximum

load rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-

quences of overloading on

handling and stopping and on

tires

Overloading could affect v ehic le

handling, stopping distance, and

vehicle and tire performance in the

following ways. This could lead to

an accident and possibly result in

severe personal injury.

. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.

. Heavy and/or high-mounted

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information

13-10

(471,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

loads could increase the risk of

rollover.

. Stopping distance will increase.

. Brakes could overheat and fail.

. Suspension, bearings, axles and

other body parts could break or

experience accelerated wear that

will shorten vehicle life.

. Tires could fail.

. Tread separation could occur.

. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-

rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150

lb passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your ve-

hicle.

Vehicle load limit – how to

determine

The load capacity of your vehicle is

determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The load limit of

your vehicle is shown on the vehicle

placard attached to the driver’s side

door pillar. Locate the statement

“The combined weight of occupants

and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your

vehicle’s placard.

The vehicle placard also shows

seating capacity of your vehicle.

The total load capacity includes the

total weight of driver and all pas-

sengers and their belongings, any

cargo, any optional equipment such

as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

carrier, etc., and the tongue load of

a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity

can be calculated by the following

method.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total

weight of occupants + total weight

– CONTINUED –

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine

13-11

(472,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

of optional equipment + tongue load

of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-

ing, refer to “

Loading your vehicle”

F8-11.

& Calculating total and load

capacities varying seating

configurations

Calculate the available load capa-

city as shown in the f ollowing

examples:

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 900 lbs or

408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)

plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300

kg).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total

weight from the vehicle capacity

weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing

176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same

vehicle (bringing the number of

occupants to two), the calculations

are as follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine

13-12

(473,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-

hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placard

with the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed 408 kg or

900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has one

occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)

plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170

kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted

with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs

(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer

weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of

the trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =

176 lbs (80 kg)).

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can

be carried.

– CONTINUED –

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Vehicle load limit – how to determine

13-13

(474,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing

143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same

vehicle (bringin g the number of

occupants to three), and a child

restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5

kg) is installed in the vehicle for the

child to use, the calculations are as

follows.

1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity.

3. The total weight now exceeds

the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15

kg), so the cargo weight must be

reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

Uniform tire quality grading

standards

This information indicates the rela-

tive performance of passenger car

tires in t he area of treadwear,

traction, a nd temperature resis-

tance. This is to aid the consumer

in making an informed choice in the

purchase of tires.

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall be-

tween tread shoulder and maximum

section width.

For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-

perature A

The quality grades apply to new

pneumatic tires for use on passen-

ger cars. However, they do not

apply to deep tread, winter type

snow tires, space-saver or tempor-

ary use spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of 12 inches

or less, or to some limited produc-

tion tires.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards

13-14

(475,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-

ments in addition to these grades.

& Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under con-

trolled conditions on a specified

government test course.

Forexample,atiregraded150

would wear one and one-half (1-

1/2) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteris-

tics.

& Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified indoor labora-

tory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level

of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the la-

boratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire

failure.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards

13-15

(476,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Reporting safety defects

(U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has

a defect which could cause a crash

or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-

ministration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying Subaru of America, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA can-

not become involved in individual

problems between you, your deal-

er, or Subaru of America, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call

the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free

at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-

424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Building, Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-

tion about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)

13-16

(1,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Index

(2,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

14-2 Index

Abbreviation ................................................................... 3

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-33

Warning light ......................................................... 3-20

Access key fob ............................................................ 2-2

Warning light ......................................................... 3-25

Accessories ............................................................. 11-35

Accessory power outlet ................................................ 6-7

Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12

Air conditioner

Automatic climate control.......................................... 4-6

Manual climate control.............................................. 4-7

Air filtration system .................................................... 4-11

Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-7

Alarm system ............................................................ 2-24

All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-22

Alloy wheel .............................................................. 11-27

Cleaning ............................................................... 10-4

Antenna...................................................................... 5-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-33

Arming the system ..................................................... 2-25

Ashtray....................................................................... 6-9

AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-18

Auto on/off headlights................................................. 3-67

Auto-dimming mirror/compass ............................. 3-80, 3-81

Automatic headlight beam leveler

Warning light ......................................................... 3-31

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking

Retractor (ALR/ELR) ............................................... 1-14

Battery

Drainage prevention function ................................... 2-24

Jump starting.......................................................... 9-9

Replacement (access key fob) ............................... 11-43

Replacement (transmitter) ..................................... 11-44

Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-33

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-32

Brake

Assist.................................................................... 7-32

Booster ....................................................... 7-31, 11-17

Disc...................................................................... 12-9

Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7

Pad .................................................................... 11-20

Parking ....................................................... 7-43, 11-20

Pedal .................................................................. 11-18

System ................................................................. 7-31

Brake system............................................................. 7-31

Warning light ......................................................... 3-21

Braking ..................................................................... 7-31

Tips ...................................................................... 7-31

Breaking-in of new brake pads................................... 11-20

BSD/RCTA ................................................................ 7-52

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................... 7-56

OFF indicator......................................................... 3-32

OFF switch............................................................ 7-59

Warning indicator .......................................... 3-32, 7-58

Warning volume ..................................................... 7-57

Bulb

Chart .................................................................. 12-14

Replacement ....................................................... 11-36

(3,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Cargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-11

Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-41

Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-13

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3

Center console ............................................................ 6-6

Changing

Coolant................................................................ 11-12

Flat tire................................................................... 9-5

Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-9

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-17

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator

light....................................................................... 3-15

Checking

Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18

Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-18

Clutch function ..................................................... 11-18

Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-19

Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11

Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-15

Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-16

Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-28

Oil level (engine oil) ............................................... 11-8

Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-25

Installation of a booster seat ................................... 1-32

Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ........................... 1-28

Lower and tether anchorages.................................. 1-33

Top tether anchorages............................................ 1-36

Child safety.................................................................... 4

Locks ................................................................... 2-28

Chime

Key........................................................................ 3-5

Light ..................................................................... 3-66

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13

Cigarette lighter .......................................................... 6-8

Cleaning

Alloy wheels .......................................................... 10-4

Interior .................................................................. 10-5

Ventilation grille...................................................... 4-10

Climate control system................................................. 4-2

Automatic ............................................................... 4-6

Manual................................................................... 4-7

Clock ....................................................... 3-47, 3-51, 3-63

Clutch

Fluid ................................................................... 11-16

Pedal .................................................................. 11-18

Coat hook ................................................................. 6-10

Combination meter display (color LCD)......................... 3-33

Compass.......................................................... 3-80, 3-81

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-24

Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7

Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-18

Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7

Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-16

Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-16

Cooling system ........................................................ 11-10

Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4

Cruise control ............................................................ 7-48

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-31

Set indicator light ................................................... 3-31

Index 14-3

(4,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

14-4 Index

Daytime running light system ...................................... 3-72

Defogger .................................................................. 3-89

Defrosting ................................................................. 4-10

Deicer ...................................................................... 3-89

Differential gear oil

Front .......................................................... 11-15, 12-6

Rear........................................................... 11-15, 12-6

Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2

Disarming the alarm system........................................ 2-26

Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ....................... 7-32

Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-41

Door

Locks ................................................................... 2-21

Open warning light................................................. 3-22

Unlock selection function ........................................ 3-41

Drive belts ............................................................... 11-14

Driving

AWD vehicles.......................................................... 8-4

Drinking ..................................................................... 6

Drugs ........................................................................ 6

Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4

Off road.................................................................. 8-6

Pets .......................................................................... 7

Snowy and icy roads................................................ 8-9

Tips................................................. 7-23, 7-30, 8-2, 8-4

Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7

Winter .................................................................... 8-7

ECO gauge............................................................... 3-10

Electrical system ........................................................ 12-8

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system .......... 7-34

Warning ................................................................ 3-21

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-14

Engine

Compartment overview ........................................... 11-7

Coolant ....................................................... 11-11, 12-7

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2

Hood .................................................................... 11-5

Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-18

Oil ................................................................ 11-8, 12-4

Overheating........................................................... 9-12

Starting & stopping .......................................... 7-9, 7-11

Event data recorder ........................................................ 9

Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2

Flat tires..................................................................... 9-5

Floor mat .................................................................. 6-10

Fluid level

Brake.................................................................. 11-15

Clutch ................................................................. 11-16

Continuously variable transmission......................... 11-15

Fog light

Bulb.......................................................... 11-38, 12-14

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-31

Switch................................................................... 3-74

Front

Differential gear oil ....................................... 11-15, 12-6

Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-21

Turn signal light ................................................... 11-38

(5,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3

Consumption indicator............................................ 3-43

Economy hints......................................................... 8-2

Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4

Gauge .................................................................. 3-10

Requirements.................................................. 7-3, 12-3

Fuses ...................................................................... 11-34

Fuses and circuits.................................................... 12-10

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).............................. 8-13

Glove box ................................................................... 6-5

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).......................... 8-13

Hazard warning flasher.......................................... 3-8, 9-2

Headlight

Beam leveler......................................................... 3-73

Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-36

Bulb wattage ....................................................... 12-14

Control switch ....................................................... 3-66

Flasher ................................................................. 3-69

Indicator light......................................................... 3-31

Welcome lighting function ....................................... 3-67

High Beam Assist ...................................................... 3-69

High Beam Assist function .......................................... 3-69

Indicator light......................................................... 3-30

Warning indicator................................................... 3-30

High beam assist warning indicator.............................. 3-30

High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-30

High/low beam change (dimmer) ................................. 3-68

Hill descent control ............................................ 7-38, 7-40

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32

Hill start assist ................................................. 7-45, 11-19

OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-22

Warning light ......................................................... 3-22

HomeLink

................................................................. 3-81

Hook

Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-13

Coat ..................................................................... 6-10

Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-11

Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-13

Horn ......................................................................... 3-92

Hose and connections .............................................. 11-11

Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4

Light ...................................................................... 3-5

Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-12

Immobilizer................................................................ 2-15

Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-29

Indicator light

BSD/RCTA OFF............................................ 3-32, 3-35

BSD/RCTA warning ....................................... 3-32, 3-35

Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-16

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-31

Cruise control set ................................................... 3-31

Front fog light ........................................................ 3-31

Headlight............................................................... 3-31

High beam............................................................. 3-30

High beam assist ................................................... 3-30

High beam assist warning ....................................... 3-30

Index 14-5

(6,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

14-6 Index

Hill descent control ................................................ 3-32

Hill start assist OFF ............................................... 3-22

Immobilizer ........................................................... 3-29

Security ................................................................ 3-29

Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-30

Steering responsive fog lights OFF .......................... 3-31

Turn signal............................................................ 3-30

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................ 3-24

Vehicle Dynamics Control operation......................... 3-23

X-MODE............................................................... 3-32

Inside mirror.............................................................. 3-80

Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2

Jack-up point............................................................... 9-5

Jump starting .............................................................. 9-9

Key ............................................................................ 2-2

Number plate .......................................................... 2-2

Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5

Replacement......................................................... 2-15

Keyless access with push-button start system................. 2-2

Disabling keyless access functions .......................... 2-12

Warning chimes and warning indicator ..................... 3-25

When access key fob does not operate properly ....... 9-17

Keyless entry system ................................................. 2-17

Lap belt pretensioner ................................................. 1-22

Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-6

License plate light .................................................... 11-40

Light

Backup ............................................................... 11-40

Cargo area .................................................... 6-3, 11-41

Control switch ........................................................ 3-66

Daytime running..................................................... 3-72

Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-41

Front fog ..................................................... 3-74, 11-38

Front side marker ......................................... 3-67, 12-14

Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5

License plate ....................................................... 11-40

Map.............................................................. 6-2, 11-41

Parking ............................................................... 11-38

Rear combination ................................................. 11-38

Rear side marker light........................................... 11-38

Stop ................................................................... 11-38

Turn signal .................................................. 3-75, 11-38

Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-41

Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-11

Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-22

Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-18

Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-33

Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3

Schedule............................................................... 11-3

Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-20

Tools...................................................................... 9-3

Malfunction indicator light

(check engine warning light) ..................................... 3-15

(7,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Manual

Transmission......................................................... 7-21

Transmission oil.................................................... 11-14

Manual mode ............................................................ 7-26

Map light .......................................................... 6-2, 11-41

Maximum load limits................................................... 8-17

Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-8

Mirror defogger.......................................................... 3-89

Mirrors...................................................................... 3-80

Moonroof .......................................................... 2-32, 9-19

Multi-function display (black and white) ........................ 3-42

Multi-function display (color LCD) ................................ 3-47

New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2

Odometer ................................................................... 3-9

Off road driving............................................................ 8-6

Oil filter..................................................................... 11-9

Oil level

Engine.................................................................. 11-8

Front differential gear ............................................ 11-15

Rear differential gear............................................. 11-15

Warning light ......................................................... 3-18

Oil pressure warning light ........................................... 3-17

Outside

Mirror defogger...................................................... 3-89

Mirrors.................................................................. 3-88

Temperature indicator..................................... 3-46, 3-50

Overheating engine.................................................... 9-12

Parking

Brake.................................................................... 7-43

Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-20

Light ................................................................... 11-38

Tips ...................................................................... 7-43

Periodic inspections..................................................... 8-4

Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3

Power

Outlets ................................................................... 6-7

Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-88

Steering ................................................................ 7-30

Steering warning light ............................................. 3-23

Windows ............................................................... 2-28

Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-24, 1-68

Preparing to drive........................................................ 7-8

Push-button

Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6

Starting and stopping engine ............................ 7-9, 7-11

RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)

OFF indicator......................................................... 3-32

Warning indicator ................................................... 3-32

Rear

Combination lights................................................ 11-38

Differential gear oil ....................................... 11-15, 12-6

Gate ............................................................ 2-31, 9-19

Turn signal light ................................................... 11-38

Rear window

Defogger ............................................................... 3-89

Index 14-7

(8,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

14-8 Index

Wiper and washer switch........................................ 3-79

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-31

Recommended

Brake fluid ............................................................ 12-7

Continuously variable transmission fluid ................... 12-7

Engine oil ............................................................. 12-4

Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6

Rear differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6

Spark plugs........................................................... 12-8

Refueling .................................................................... 7-5

Remote engine start system........................................ 7-14

Remote keyless entry system...................................... 2-17

Replacement

Access key fob battery .......................................... 11-43

Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-13

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-19

Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ........ 2-20

Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-44

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-29

Replacing

Battery of access key fob ...................................... 11-43

Replacing bulbs.............................................. 11-36, 12-14

Backup light ......................................................... 11-40

Cargo area light.................................................... 11-41

Dome light ........................................................... 11-41

Front fog light ....................................................... 11-38

Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-38

Halogen headlight................................................. 11-36

Headlight ............................................................. 11-36

LED headlight ...................................................... 11-36

License plate light................................................. 11-40

Map light ............................................................. 11-41

Parking light ........................................................ 11-38

Rear combination light .......................................... 11-38

Rear side marker light........................................... 11-38

Rear turn signal light ............................................ 11-38

Stop light............................................................. 11-38

Tail light .............................................................. 11-38

Vanity mirror light ................................................. 11-41

Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11

Roof rails .................................................................. 8-13

Safety

Precautions when driving ............................................ 4

Symbol ..................................................................... 3

Warnings................................................................... 2

Seat

Fabric ................................................................... 10-5

Heater................................................................... 1-10

Seatbelt ................................................................ 4, 1-12

Fastening .............................................................. 1-14

Maintenance .......................................................... 1-20

Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-21

Safety tips ............................................................. 1-12

Warning light and chime.......................................... 3-13

Security

Alarm system......................................................... 2-24

Immobilizer............................................................ 2-15

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-29

Select lever

Position indicator.................................................... 3-30

(9,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Shift lock function .................................................. 7-28

Shopping bag hook.................................................... 6-11

Shoulder pretensioners............................................... 1-21

Snow tires....................................................... 8-10, 11-21

Snowy and icy roads.................................................... 8-9

Sounding a panic alarm.............................................. 2-19

Spark plugs..................................................... 11-14, 12-8

Specifications ............................................................ 12-2

Speedometer............................................................... 3-8

SRS

Curtain airbag ....................................................... 1-58

Frontal airbag........................................................ 1-47

Side airbag ........................................................... 1-58

SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ................ 4, 1-37

SRS airbag system

Monitors ............................................................... 1-66

Servicing .............................................................. 1-67

Warning light ......................................................... 3-15

Starting & stopping engine .................................... 7-9, 7-11

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7

Steering responsive fog lights system .......................... 3-74

OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-31

Steering Responsive Headlight.................................... 3-72

Steering wheel

Heater .................................................................. 3-91

Power................................................................... 7-30

Tilt/telescopic ........................................................ 3-90

Stop light ................................................................. 11-38

Storage compartment................................................... 6-5

Sun visors................................................................... 6-3

Sunshade.................................................................. 2-34

Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS)................ 1-37

Synthetic leather upholstery......................................... 10-6

Tachometer ................................................................ 3-8

Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-18

Coolant ................................................................. 3-16

Temporary spare tire............................................ 9-2, 12-9

Tether (child restraint system) ............................. 1-33, 1-36

Tie-down hooks/holes ................................................. 9-13

Tire................................................................. 11-21, 12-8

Chains .................................................................. 8-11

Inspection............................................................ 11-22

Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23

Replacement ....................................................... 11-26

Rotation .............................................................. 11-25

Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8

Types.................................................................. 11-21

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 7-41, 9-8, 11-21

Warning light ......................................................... 3-18

Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-21

Tools.......................................................................... 9-3

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-33, 1-36

Towing ...................................................................... 9-13

All wheels on the ground......................................... 9-16

Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-15

Hooks ................................................................... 9-13

Weight .................................................................. 8-17

Index 14-9

(10,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

14-10 Index

Trailer

Connecting ........................................................... 8-15

Hitch ............................................................ 8-14, 8-20

Towing tips............................................................ 8-22

Trailer towing ............................................................ 8-16

Trip meter ................................................................... 3-9

Turn signal

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-30

Lever.................................................................... 3-75

Valet mode................................................................ 2-27

Vanity mirror................................................ 6-4, 6-5, 11-41

Light.................................................................... 11-41

Vehicle

Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-12

Identification........................................................ 12-18

Symbols .................................................................... 4

Vehicle Dynamics Control

OFF indicator light ................................................. 3-24

OFF switch ........................................................... 7-37

Operation indicator light.......................................... 3-23

System ................................................................. 7-35

Warning light ......................................................... 3-23

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-12

Warning chimes

Keyless access with push-button start system........... 3-25

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13

Warning light

ABS...................................................................... 3-20

Access key............................................................ 3-25

All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-22

AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-18

Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-31

Brake system......................................................... 3-21

BSD/RCTA ............................................................ 3-32

Charge.................................................................. 3-17

CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-15

Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-16

Door open ............................................................. 3-22

Engine low oil level................................................. 3-18

High Beam Assist................................................... 3-30

Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-22

Icy road surface ..................................................... 3-32

Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-25

LED headlight ........................................................ 3-31

Low fuel ................................................................ 3-22

Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-18

Oil pressure........................................................... 3-17

Power steering....................................................... 3-23

RAB ..................................................................... 3-32

Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13

SRS airbag system................................................. 3-15

Steering responsive fog lights .................................. 3-31

Steering Responsive Headlight ................................ 3-31

Vehicle Dynamics Control........................................ 3-23

Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-18

Warranties..................................................................... 1

Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-17

(11,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

Washing ................................................................... 10-2

Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3

Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-25

Welcome lighting function ........................................... 3-67

Wheel

Alloy.................................................................... 11-27

Balance ............................................................... 11-24

Nut tightening torque...................................... 12-8, 12-9

Replacement........................................................ 11-27

Windows................................................................... 2-28

Windshield

Washer fluid......................................................... 11-28

Wiper and washer switches .................................... 3-77

Wiper blades........................................................ 11-29

Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-89

Winter

Driving.................................................................... 8-7

Tires........................................................... 8-10, 11-21

Wiper and washer...................................................... 3-76

Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-89

X-MODE................................................................... 7-38

Indicator light......................................................... 3-32

Index 14-11

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (1,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Right Page

————————————————————————————————————————

Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Left Page

————————————————————————————————————————

(2,1)

北米Model "A1320BE-C" EDITED: 2017/ 10/ 10

GAS STATION REFERENCE

S99AA

& Fuel:

S99AA01

Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90

RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane rating:

S99AA02

! RON

S99AA0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.

! AKI

S99AA0202

This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and

Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti

Knock Index (AKI).

& Fuel capacity:

S99AA03

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

& Engine oil:

S99AA04

Use only the following oils.

. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-

SERVING”

. or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC

certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”

F12-4.

& Engine oil capacity:

S99AA05

4.7 US qt (4.4 liters, 3.9 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated

based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.

After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked

using the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance

and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.

& Cold tire pressure:

S99AA06

Refer to “Tires” F12-8.

Subaru 2018 Crosstrek 2.0i

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Subaru 2018 CROSSTREK 2.0I Questions and Answers

Related Products

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT Leather

Subaru 2026 Solterra Touring XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited XT

Subaru 2026 Solterra Limited

Vevor YB06-11 High Flow Catalytic Converter Direct Fit Exhaust Manifold for Subaru Impreza Legacy Forester Outback 06-12

Subaru 2026 Solterra Premium